Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Navedtra - 14239 - Ship's Serviceman 3
Navedtra - 14239 - Ship's Serviceman 3
Navedtra - 14239 - Ship's Serviceman 3
NONRESIDENT
TRAINING
COURSE
July 1990
Ship’s Serviceman 3
NAVEDTRA 14239
COURSE OVERVIEW: In completing this nonresident training course, you will demonstrate a
knowledge of the subject matter by correctly answering questions on the following: organization and
security of supply afloat; operation of the sales outlets; stowage and custody of ship’s store stock; customer
service in the afloat barbershop; operation of the ship’s laundry and dry-cleaning plant; and general
maintenance of ship’s store equipment.
THE COURSE: This self-study course is organized into subject matter areas, each containing learning
objectives to help you determine what you should learn along with text and illustrations to help you
understand the information. The subject matter reflects day-to-day requirements and experiences of
personnel in the rating or skill area. It also reflects guidance provided by Enlisted Community Managers
(ECMs) and other senior personnel, technical references, instructions, etc., and either the occupational or
naval standards, which are listed in the Manual of Navy Enlisted Manpower Personnel Classifications
and Occupational Standards, NAVPERS 18068.
THE QUESTIONS: The questions that appear in this course are designed to help you understand the
material in the text.
VALUE: In completing this course, you will improve your military and professional knowledge.
Importantly, it can also help you study for the Navy-wide advancement in rate examination. If you are
studying and discover a reference in the text to another publication for further information, look it up.
Published by
NAVAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING
PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT
AND TECHNOLOGY CENTER
i
Sailor’s Creed
ii
CONTENTS
CHAPTER Page
3. Stowage 3-1
APPENDIX
I. Glossary AI-I
INDEX........................................................INDEX-1
iii
INSTRUCTIONS FOR TAKING THE COURSE
iv
PASS/FAIL ASSIGNMENT PROCEDURES For subject matter questions:
v
Student Comments
Course Title: Ship’s Serviceman 3
Privacy Act Statement: Under authority of Title 5, USC 301, information regarding your military status is
requested in processing your comments and in preparing a reply. This information will not be divulged without
written authorization to anyone other than those within DOD for official use in determining performance.
vii
CHAPTER 1
This training manual has been prepared for The ROM system has been successfully tested and
members of the Regular Navy and Naval Reserve used aboard ship. It has proven to enhance the
in the Ship’s Serviceman (SH) rating who are accuracy and timeliness of doing ship’s store
preparing for advancement to Ship’s Serviceman records. The system makes the SH’s job easier
third class (SH3). because it does much of the work the SH used
Ship’s Servicemen operate and manage resale to do by hand.
activities such as ship’s stores, commissary stores, The ROM system Terminal User’s Guide
and Navy exchanges; service activities of the ship’s (TUG) is the computer system reference book
stores and Navy exchanges such as laundry and providing detailed information on how to operate
dry-cleaning facilities, vending machines, snack the ROM. This publication was developed by and
bars, and barbershops; and they perform clerical is available free from the Navy Management
and stock control functions for all activities Systems Support Office (NAVMASSO) located
operated. in Norfolk, Virginia. NAVMASSO has also
As an SH3, you will work primarily as a sales published a Resale Operations Management
outlet operator, bulk storeroom custodian, (ROM) Desk Top Guide which is a supplement
barber, or laundryman. The majority of these to the ROM TUG. It is exclusively made up of
billets are aboard ship, so the afloat procedures job sheets. Each job sheet contains a step-by-step
should be your main concern. guide in performing a ROM function. Although
To be successful in this rating, you must the occupational standards for SH3 do not
possess certain personal characteristics. You indicate the use of the ROM system, many of the
should like dealing with people, have a good tasks performed by an SH3 will be centered
speaking ability, possess above average arithmetic around the ROM system. Throughout this manual
skills, and have basic recordskeeping abilities. you may see the terms manual recordskeeping,
Getting along with people deals with customer ROM procedures, and ROM users. The term
service which is completely covered in the manual recordskeeping relates to performing a
Navy Customer Service Manual, NAVEDTRA task without the use of the ROM system. The term
10119-B, and therefore, material already in- ROM procedures or ROM users is used to indicate
cluded in that manual will not be covered in this that the procedures being discussed are done
manual. using the ROM system.
The material covered in this manual is the
minimum required of an SH3 to perform the job
THE SUPPLY SYSTEM
properly. These are the minimum requirements
based on the occupational standards for SH3, Today’s Navy requires millions of items to
which can be found in the current advancement maintain its operational readiness. The supply
handbook for Ship’s Servicemen. system supports these material needs. The supply
system is composed of a group of activities that
is responsible for procurement, distribution,
SUPPLY AUTOMATION inventory control, and stowage of all materials
except ammunition.
The Navy has developed many new systems In this chapter you will learn the basics of the
to make the job of supply personnel easier. supply system and the organization of supply
Recently, the Navy developed a system for the department afloat. You will become familiar with
automation of ship’s store records. It is called the supply department security regulations that you
Resale Operations Management (ROM) system. must observe in performing your everyday duties.
1-1
NAVAL SUPPLY SYSTEMS improvements that have been developed. It issues
COMMAND the lists of items authorized for sale in the resale
program, enters into agreements with commercial
The Naval Supply Systems Command (NAV- suppliers as to the quality and price of
SUPSYSCOM) provides management policies and merchandise, and issues or causes to be issued the
technical guidance for naval material to activities Ship’s Store Contract Bulletins, Ship’s Store
of the Navy and Marine Corps. This includes Afloat Catalog, NAVRESSO Price Agreement
provisioning, cataloging, inventory management, Bulletins, and other publications concerned with
distributing, material handling, traffic manage- the displaying and selling of merchandise.
ment, transporting, packaging, preservation,
receipt, stowage, issue, and disposal functions. FLEET ASSISTANCE TEAMS
NAVSUP administers the Navy Stock Fund
(NSF) and the Navy Resale Program. NAVSUP NAVRESSO manages the fleet assistance
also exercises management control of field teams. These teams, located in the major port
purchasing offices, inventory control points, areas, are made up of master chiefs, senior chiefs,
supply centers, and other offices concerned with or chief petty officers. NAVRESSO established
supply support. these teams to provide technical assistance and
guidance in all areas of the ship’s store operation
to shipboard personnel.
NAVY RESALE PROGRAM
Ships can get assistance by calling the fleet
assistance team, by submitting a letter to the
The Navy Resale Program has the responsi-
proper fleet assistance team, with a copy to the
bility for providing an adequate selection and
Fleet Assistance Team Branch (NAVRESSO), or
inventory of health and comfort items for Navy
by naval message in urgent cases. Depending on
personnel. The Navy Resale Program takes care
the size of the ship, visits normally last from 2
of these needs through the operation of individual
to 5 days with no formal report made upon
stores, service activities, and other offices. The
completion.
purpose of the Navy Resale Program is as follows:
Ships preparing to deploy should schedule a
visit 120 days in advance of the scheduled
To provide a convenient and reliable
departure date. During the actual predeployment
source from which personnel may obtain, at the
visit, the fleet assistance team provides
lowest practical cost, necessary articles for the
information on the Consolidated Afloat Requisi-
health, comfort, or convenience of personnel and
tioning Guide Overseas (CARGO) (NAVSUP Pub
services needed in day-to-day living
4998), Q-cognizance items, foreign merchandise,
vendor control, and endurance loading. This
To provide through accrued profits a
information is beneficial to the ship preparing for
source of funds for the recreation of naval
deployment.
personnel
The fleet assistance teams may also be helpful
before overhaul. Ships scheduled to go to over-
To promote good morale
haul should schedule an assistance team visit 18
months before the overhaul date. This time is
NAVY RESALE AND SERVICES required to permit timely submission of work
SUPPORT OFFICE requests for repair or replacement of equipment.
In addition, the fleet assistance team provides
The Navy Resale and Services Support Office the following services in the operation of the sales
(NAVRESSO) is responsible for administering the outlets:
Navy Resale Program.
NAVRESSO is located in Fort Wadsworth, Modernization planning
Staten Island, New York, and is under the
command and the authority of the Commander, Merchandise promotion assistance,
Naval Supply Systems Command. including layout, display, and signing
NAVRESSO provides technical guidance and
administrative assistance to ship’s stores afloat. Merchandise planning, including stock
It conducts research, develops new ideas, and control review, model stock plans, and disposition
advises sea and shore activities on possible of excess stock
1-2
Pricing procedures FLEET COMMANDER
1-3
(fig. 1-1). The number of divisions varies the essential functions within the supply depart-
according to the type of ship and number of ment and defines channels of responsibility and
personnel aboard. authority. The chart is normally located in the
supply office and is updated as personnel are
Supply Officer reassigned.
The accountability for the ship’s store and
The head of the supply department is the other areas of supply may be assigned to a
supply officer. The supply officer is the senior subordinate Supply Corps officer; however, this
Supply Corps officer aboard and he or she is does not relieve the senior Supply Corps officer
responsible to the commanding officer for the of his or her responsibilities. The supply officer
proper operation and administration of all supply assigns responsibilities by written request routed
department functions. The supply officer prepares through the commanding officer for approval. The
the organizational chart. The chart identifies all subordinate Supply Corps officer is responsible
1-4
to the supply officer for the efficient operation equipment, other office equipment, and are
of assigned areas as required by the NAVSUP responsible for the cleanliness and upkeep of
publications. The approval of these requests is assigned spaces.
terminated upon detachment of the supply officer
or assistant for ship’s store, disbursing, or S-4 Division
foodservice.
The S-4 division is made up of personnel from
S-1 Division the Disbursing Clerk (DK) rating. Their duties
include collecting and disbursing all public funds
The S-1 division is made up of personnel from aboard ship and performing all pay and allowance
the Storekeeper (SK) rating. Their duties vary functions. The DKs’ duties also include main-
according to the size of the ship and unit taining military pay records, preparing money
requirements. lists, preparing and verifying public vouchers, and
In general, SKs procure, receive, stow, expend, preparing reports and financial returns.
and account for consumables, equipage, repair
parts, and other material as assigned. They also ORGANIZATION OF A LARGE
maintain records; prepare correspondence, FLEET SHIP
reports, and returns; and perform required
obligation recordings. The organization of the supply department
In stock control, SKs determine stock may differ on larger ships. The more personnel
requirements; prepare requisitions; process receipt aboard, the more complex the supply department
and expenditure documents and maintain related becomes. As you study figure 1-2, you will notice
files and records; perform financial accounting three additional divisions. These divisions are
for material; and maintain material catalogs, found on larger fleet ships.
allowance lists, and technical publications.
S-5 Division
S-2 Division
The S-5 division is made up of personnel from
The S-2 division is made up of personnel from the MS rating also. They do work that is similar
the Mess Management Specialist (MS) rating. to work done in the S-2 division, with the
They operate all phases of the general mess and exception that their duties are performed in
make authorized issues, sales, and transfers of officer’s country. These duties may include
food items. receiving, stowing, issuing, and accounting for
In general, they determine requirements; foodservice and other stores. They also prepare
prepare requisitions; and receive, stow, expend, and serve all meals in the wardroom and perform
and maintain related files and records for food other jobs such as cleaning, delivery, and pickup
items. They also prepare and serve food to the of officers’ laundry.
crew, including the operating of foodservice
equipment, and are responsible for the cleanliness S-6 Division
and upkeep of assigned spaces.
The S-6 division performs all functions related
S-3 Division to procurement, receipt, stowage, issue, and
accounting for aviation material. This division is
The S-3 division is made up of personnel from manned and operated by personnel from the
the Ship’s Serviceman (SH) rating. SHs operate Aviation Storekeeper (AK) rating.
and maintain all resale and service activities such
as the ship’s store, clothing store, snack bar, S-7 Division
vending machines, laundry, barbershop, and dry-
cleaning plant. The S-7 division operates all data processing
SHs also determine requirements for stock and equipment, maintains files and records, and
operating supplies; prepare requisitions and prepares and processes documents to produce
purchase orders; receive, stow, issue stock; records and reports as provided for in the
conduct inventory; operate the ROM micro- automated supply and accounting system. This
computer; and maintain related records and files. division is manned by personnel from the Data
They also operate all related service activity Processing (DP) rating.
1-5
Figure 1-2.—Organization of a supply department of a large fleet ship.
SECURITY OF SUPPLY
DEPARTMENT SPACES
Probably the most important aspect of
the supply department is security. The supply There are a few general rules you will need to
officer is responsible for making sure func- remember to keep supply department spaces
tional areas remain on track; however, many secure.
problems may be met if security is not main-
All stock should be kept under lock and
tained.
key.
Security regulations are listed in the Ships Supply spaces should be locked when unat-
Store Afloat, NAVSUP P-487, and the Afloat tended by authorized personnel.
Supply Procedures, NAVSUP P-485, that you,
as an SH3, will need to know. Your knowledge Responsibility for security rests with the
of these regulations will not only help you to keep person in charge of each space.
your area on track, but also help keep the supply
department on track. Read, remember, and follow Permission for entry of unauthorized per-
security regulations. sonnel into a supply department space will be
1-6
obtained from the supply officer or the designated Keyless padlocks should be the three-
assistant. combination manipulation type.
1-7
The original key will be drawn from the hours, the duty supply officer is responsible for
general key locker in the morning by the person making sure the office is secured. The duty supply
in charge of that particular space. That person officer is normally an officer or senior petty
will keep the key until the end of the workday and officer representing the supply department after
then return it to the general key locker in the working hours. He or she is directly responsible
supply office. The duplicate key will be kept by to the supply officer for the operation and security
the supply officer in a duplicate key locker or safe. of the supply department in his or her absence.
All master keys to Group I spaces will be in
the custody of the supply officer. The supply THE ROM SYSTEM SECURITY
officer may appoint, in writing, permission for
an officer or petty officer to hold a duplicate The ROM system is an unclassified system and
master key, if so desired. is not intended to store any data that is classified.
The ROM system itself should be located in an
Group II area accessible only to personnel with a need to
use the system. For security and accountability
This group includes all foodservice spaces purposes, all system administrative duties are
including the galley, bakeshop, breadroom, assigned to the ship’s store officer, the system
vegetable preparation area, issue room, meat administrator. The ship’s store officer must make
preparation area, refrigerated spaces, and sure the information generated and processed by
foodservice storerooms. Keys to Group II spaces the ROM is protected from unauthorized access
will be handled in the same manner as Group I to the system. The information within the ROM
except original keys to the galley, bakeshop, is protected from unauthorized use through the
breadroom, meat preparation area, and vegetable use of IDs, passwords, and access codes. Before
preparation area will be passed between galley a person can have access to the ROM system, the
supervisors as they relieve each other. The master ship’s store officer is required to input user IDs
key and duplicate master key will be handled in and passwords on a need-to-know basis. Password/
the same manner as Group 1. security instructions are contained in the ROM
system TUG, appendix F, and are distributed only
Groups III and IV to the ship’s store officer during implementation.
Any persons having access to the ROM system
Group III spaces are made up of the ship’s will be listed on the ROM security access rights
retail and clothing stores, the snack bar, vending list. This list will be placed in an opaque envelope
machines, and bulk storerooms. Group IV spaces and sealed, and tape will be affixed over the flap.
are made up of the ship’s store service activities The envelope containing the ROM security access
such as the laundry, barbershop, and dry-cleaning rights list along with the password/security
shop. Any Group IV space will be considered instructions will be retained in the ship’s store
Group III when cash transactions are made within officer’s Accountability File, SSA-21. The ship’s
those spaces or material intended for resale is store officer will review the ROM security access
stowed there. We will discuss both of these groups rights list monthly.
more thoroughly under Group III space security
later in this chapter. GROUP III SPACE SECURITY
1-8
impractical in certain situations and a high- setting the combination. The custodian of the
security key-type padlock with a shrouded shackle space should do the following:
and a high-security hasp may be used as an
alternative. The responsible custodian holds the Set the combination in the lock selecting
working keys to these locks and should make sure the numbers at random. Do not use popular dates
they are locked properly before securing for the and so forth.
day. The responsible custodian will then return
these working keys to a separate key locker for Record the combination on a piece of
the night. This key locker will not be the same paper, wrap it in a sheet of carbon paper, place
as the key locker used for supply spaces. This key this in an opaque envelope with the setting-in key.
locker will be specifically for the one Group III
space. Seal the envelope, sign name, and date the
flap in the presence of the ship’s store officer.
Duplicate Keys After the custodian does the above, the ship’s
store officer should do the following:
The spare keys to the spaces are the duplicate
Receive the sealed envelope.
keys. These keys are required in times of urgency
or when required by higher authority. To protect
Sign name and date over the other flap in
the security of your space these keys need to be
the presence of the custodian.
handled in a manner to prevent unauthorized
entry. These duplicate keys will be placed in a
Seal the flap with transparent tape.
sealed envelope, signed and dated across the flaps
by the ship’s store officer and responsible
Then retain the sealed envelope in a safe.
custodian, and placed in the ship’s store officer’s
safe. The flaps of the envelope will have
Keep in mind, do not disclose this combination
cellophane tape placed over the signature and any
to anyone. Do not record this combination
other openings. This envelope will be changed
anywhere, except for the piece of paper in the
when the responsible custodian or ship’s store
envelope. Make sure no one can see your
officer is relieved.
combination while you are opening the space. Do
not risk your space’s security for any reason.
Padlocks and Combinations
Hinges and Hasps
In addition to dead bolt locks, the keyless Hinges and hasps used on Group III spaces
combination lock listed in the NAVSUP P-487 should be manufactured of hard steel that cannot
will be used for securing Group III spaces. In the be cut with a bolt cutter or hacksaw. When the
event the keyless combination lock is not available hasp is installed, make sure tamperproof bolts are
through supply, the key-type padlock also listed used. Tamperproof bolts are more secure and
in the NAVSUP P-487 may be used as an alterna- cannot be removed using a wrench or screwdriver.
tive. If the key-type lock is used, a numbered car Pop rivets are considered inadequate and should
seal will also be used with it. The car seal number not be used in place of these bolts. Additionally,
will be logged by the ship’s store officer in the hinges should be installed so that the hinge pin
Car Seal Log. This key-type lock should be is not exposed, if possible. Hinge pins that are
removed and changed as soon as the combination exposed should be tack welded to prevent entry.
lock is available through supply. While the key-
type locks are being used, keep in mind that the Sales Windows and Visible Storerooms
duplicate keys to these locks will also be secured
in a sealed envelope and placed in the ship’s store There are several retail stores that have
officer’s safe. removable sales windows. Check these windows
daily. Make sure the perimeter of the frame is
The responsible custodian will set a combina- secured by means of inside locks. Do not use bars
tion in the keyless combination lock. The lock that may be popped out by an intruder. The keys
comes with a setting-in key and instructions for to these inside locks will be in the possession of
1-9
the retail store operator. The duplicate key will will not have access to the money box. The key
be secured in a sealed envelope and retained in or combination to this inside lock is kept by the
the ship’s store officer’s safe. ship’s store officer or cash collection agent.
As custodian of a bulk storeroom that is The outsides of most machines have an
visible from the outside, you should make sure installed lock. These locks are considered
adjacent passageways are well lighted. If you have inadequate for security purposes. Install a hasp
high-cost, small-cube items such as watches, and hinge made of hardened steel, using tamper-
jewelry, and so forth, stowed in the storeroom, proof bolts, and secure this with a keyless
take the proper precautions. These high-value combination lock. Combinations to these locks
items should be consolidated in the retail store and are handled in the same manner as all other ship’s
not stowed in out-of-the-way bulk storerooms. store spaces. They will be sealed in an envelope
Make sure the ship’s security watches are and locked in the ship’s store officer’s safe.
checking your storeroom. The bulk storeroom,
retail store, and other Group III spaces should Money Boxes
be checked at varying intervals for security
discrepancies. Any security discrepancy, however Several ship’s store officers are now installing
slight, should be immediately reported to higher locked money boxes in their vending machines.
authority. These money boxes are provided with two sets of
keys. One set of keys is for locking the box inside
Security After Working Hours the machine and the other set is for locking the
box. The key that locks the box inside the machine
The main purpose of security after working will be kept by the vending machine operator. The
hours is to prevent forced or unauthorized entry. key that secures the coins in the money box will
Before you secure for the day, conduct an be kept by either the ship’s store officer or
inspection of your display cases, display windows, designated cash collection agent. Duplicate keys
doors, stockrooms, and merchandise. You should will be sealed in an envelope and kept in the ship’s
be familiar with the way you left the store so you store officer’s safe.
can reinspect the same area in the morning and
report discrepancies. AMUSEMENT MACHINES
You should not use your Group III space for
personal reasons after working hours, whether in A metal restraining bar device is required for
port or at sea. If circumstances warrant reentering all amusement machines. This device will lock in
after working hours, you should first obtain final front of the coin box. A keyless combination
permission from the ship’s store officer. padlock will be used to lock the device in place.
To reduce the temptation of theft after The combination to this lock will be known only
working hours, items of higher value than $50 to the ship’s store officer or cash collection agent.
should be removed from sight including cartons
for these items. If space permits, they should be EMERGENCY ENTRY PROCEDURES
placed in a locked container within the space.
Since the custodian may not always be aboard,
VENDING MACHINES certain procedures need to be set up in case an
emergency entry has to be made into your space.
The vending machines aboard ship are con- In the event an emergency entry has to be
sidered Group III spaces too; however, they are made, the ship’s store officer will enter the space
secured a little differently. This is because the in the absence of the custodian; it should be done
vending machines do not always have a custodian in the presence of two witnesses. One witness
watching over the funds at all times. There are should be a commissioned officer. After obtaining
certain security regulations that must be followed. these witnesses, the ship’s store officer will remove
the combination and keys from the sealed
Padlocks and Keys envelope in the safe. The space will then be
opened. The two witnesses will not leave the space
The vending machines not only need to be unattended until secured. Once the problem has
secured on the outside, but also on the inside. The been resolved and access is no longer required,
lock inside will secure the money box and may the space will be secured by replacing the lock and
be a keyless padlock or key type. The custodian sealing the space with a numbered car seal. The
1-10
two witnesses will be present during this process. made through these spaces. If cash transac-
The ship’s store officer will log the car seal tions are made or ship’s store stock is stowed in
number in the Car Seal Log and the log will be these spaces, they will be considered Group III
initialed by both witnesses. spaces.
Upon return of the custodian, the car seal will The working key to Group IV spaces is
be removed by the custodian in the presence of obtained in the morning. The person in charge
the ship’s store officer. The custodian will verify of the space will sign for the original keys in a
the seal number and then change the combination key log and remove them from the general key
to the lock and reseal the new combination and locker normally located in the supply office.
duplicate keys to the dead bolt in separate During work hours, the person in charge of the
envelopes. These envelopes will be replaced in the space will keep the keys. After work hours, or
ship’s store officer’s safe. If desired, you, as the when work is complete, the working keys will be
custodian of the space, may conduct an inventory. turned over to the duty supply officer who will
In urgent situations, the command duty officer secure them in the general key locker.
(CDO) may enter a Group III space in the absence Duplicate keys to Group IV spaces will be kept
of the custodian and ship’s store officer. The entry by the supply officer in a special duplicate key
by the CDO will be made in the presence of two locker in the supply office, or in his or her safe.
witnesses, one of whom is a commissioned officer. If the lock to the space is part of a lock set, the
Access to the space can be made with damage original master will be kept by the ship’s store
control cutters or burners. The two witnesses will officer. The duplicate master to all Group IV
not leave while the space is open. spaces will be kept by the supply officer in his or
After the problem has been resolved, the CDO her safe or the duplicate key locker.
will secure the space with a lock and numbered
car seal. The lock and car seal will be placed on
the door to the space in the presence of the two ADDITIONAL SECURITY
witnesses. The car seal number will be recorded
by the CDO and initialed by the two witnesses. There are many additional security measures
The next morning, the car seal number will be the ship’s store officer may follow, if necessary.
given to the ship’s store officer by the CDO. You, The use of car seals is recommended but not
as the custodian, will handle this matter in the mandatory. Using these seals may alert the ship’s
same way as if the ship’s store officer had entered. store officer of unauthorized entry. These
You will more than likely have to obtain a new numbered car seals are available from servmart
lock and go through the same procedures again and should be placed on external locks after
for setting the combination. If the dead bolt was working hours. These car seals are issued by the
damaged, a new one must be installed. ship’s store officer or a designated assistant to the
custodian of the space. They are logged in the Car
Emergency entry procedures are included in Seal Log and the number is checked in the log
the supply department instructions. A copy of before removing any installed car seal.
these instructions should be posted outside each
and every Group III space. The ship’s store officer may also have roll-up
grills or scissor-type gates installed outside of retail
GROUP IV SPACES stores. An intrusion alarm system may be installed
to protect retail stores or storerooms. The alarm
Basically, Group IV spaces include all service should be connected so it will sound off in an area
activities. There are no cash sales or transactions that is manned 24 hours.
1-11
CHAPTER 2
As a Ship’s Serviceman third class, you can commission (except submarines) to which an
expect to operate one of the sales outlets aboard officer of the Supply Corps is assigned. Before
ship. The sales outlets are part of the ship’s store establishing the ship’s store, the commanding
and include retail stores, vending machines, officer must report by letter the date the ship’s
amusement machines, snack bars, and standard store will begin operations to the Navy Resale and
Navy clothing stores. The sales outlets are Services Support office (NAVRESSO). A copy of
basically used to display and sell ship’s store the letter should be forwarded to the ship’s type
merchandise, except in the case of amusement commander and Fleet Accounting and Disbursing
machines where you are selling the use of the video Center, Atlantic Fleet, by ships with service
game itself. The cash received from sales in these designator V and Fleet Accounting and Disbursing
sales outlets is normally more than the original Center, Pacific Fleet, by ships with service
cost of merchandise, unless you are selling designator R. Once this is done, the commanding
standard Navy clothing stock which is sold at officer may authorize any or all of the following
standard prices. This additional cash is used to activities to operate:
pay for expenses incurred in operating the
activities of the ship’s store. Any cash left after Sales Outlets
paying expenses is available for transfer to the
recreation fund, which is used for the recreation Retail store(s)
of crew members aboard ship.
Vending machine(s)
2-1
Precommissioned Ships if the sales outlet is not a reliable source, it is no
longer considered a convenient source; therefore,
A ship’s store may also be established on a as the sales outlet operator, you should make sure
precommissioned ship as long as the prospective the most popular and essential items are available
supply officer has already reported aboard. Once to the customers. The ship’s store officer will
the prospective supply officer is aboard, the prepare and approve a list of basic stock items,
prospective commanding officer may establish a based on the information in the Consolidated
ship’s store in the same manner as commissioned Afloat Requisitioning Guide Overseas (CARGO)
ships, except the letter request must be sent via NAVSUP Pub 4998, chapter 2. This basic stock
the ship’s type commander. list includes the most popular and essential stock
items and will be made available to ship’s store
Unauthorized Activities personnel to assist them in keeping these items
stocked in the retail stores. As the retail store
Only those activities authorized by the com- operator, you should notify the sales office in
manding officer may operate aboard ship. No advance when there is a shortage of any of the
sales outlet or service activity outside the ship’s items contained in this basic stock list.
store operation is authorized and considered a There are also several publications and guides
concession. No commercial vendors should be listed in the NAVSUP P-487 that will assist ship’s
allowed aboard to sell merchandise to the crew, store personnel in acquiring articles necessary for
under the agreement to pay a portion of the the health, comfort, and convenience of personnel
profits to the ship’s store or receive payment for and providing services necessary in day-to-day
items sold by invoicing them through the ship’s living. NAVRESSO also provides contracts and
store. No officer, enlisted, or civilian can sell bulletins so you can purchase these articles at the
merchandise individually owned through the lowest practical prices.
ship’s store for personal profit or interest. Ship’s Objective 1 is directly related to objective 2.
store personnel working in the service activities If you provide desirable merchandise at a low
cannot accept money or extra compensation for practical price, sales and profits will increase, thus
work performed. providing a source of funds to use for the
recreation of the crew.
PURPOSE OF THE SHIP’S STORE The fourth objective, promoting morale, is
easy to define but hard to fulfill, and almost
The objectives of the ship’s store (fig. 2-1) impossible to measure. To promote morale, you
consisting of sales outlets and service activities are must have satisfied customers. The best way to
as follows: satisfy a customer is to provide what the customer
wants or a satisfactory answer, and that can only
1. Provide a source of funds to be used for be done by improving your knowledge of the
the recreation of naval personnel through profits ship’s store operation, especially in the areas with
from sales which you should be familiar.
2. Provide a convenient and reliable source
for personnel to obtain articles considered ACCOUNTABILITY AND
necessary for their health, comfort, or RESPONSIBILITY
convenience at the lowest practical price
3. Provide services necessary in day-to-day Before we discuss the various sales outlets,
living there are a few terms you need to be familiar with
4. Promote morale because they relate to the ship’s store operation.
For now, we will discuss the terms accountability
The objectives mentioned previously are not easily and responsibility. These two terms are closely
obtained. It takes much work and effort by all related; however, they have noticeable differences.
Ship’s Servicemen. The term accountability is an obligation
Objectives 2 and 3 entail several tasks; imposed on an officer to give an account for
however, as a sales outlet operator, you will not property, funds, and returns in his or her custody.
be involved in all these tasks. Since the sales In the ship’s store operation, the ship’s store
outlets are located aboard ship, they are a officer is obligated by law, lawful order, and
convenient source for crew members to obtain regulation to give an account of all property or
articles necessary in day-to-day living. However, funds and their intended use in the ship’s store;
2-2
Figure 2-1.—Purpose of the ship’s store.
2-3
therefore, he or she has accountability for the manual, or other written directive and in the
ship’s store operation. letters of assignment issued by the ship’s store
The term responsibility is an obligation placed officer. Second, the supply officer will conduct
on an individual to exercise custody, care, and frequent inspections of spaces and operations to
protection in keeping property, records, or funds make sure responsibilities are being carried out
entrusted to him or her or under his or her properly. Third, the supply officer will conduct
supervision. This obligation is placed on an internal reviews to make sure tasks are being
individual by law, lawful order, regulation, or completed according to the NAVSUP P-487 and
custom of service. In the ship’s store operation, other current manuals, publications, or directives.
the sales outlet operator is obligated to exercise Fourth, the supply officer will make sure
custody, care, and protection in keeping all responsible personnel are being properly trained
property, records, or funds in his or her sales and supervised. Your assignment as sales outlet
outlet and, therefore, he or she is responsible to operator in no way relieves the supply officer or
the ship’s store officer who is accountable for that the ship’s store officer of his or her responsibilities
sales outlet. The ship’s store officer will hold you to the commanding officer for the proper
responsible for performing your duties in the sales operation of the sales outlet.
outlet properly. This is why it is very important
that you fully understand your responsibilities Letters of Assignment
because if you fail to carry out these responsi-
bilities properly you may be punished under the The ship’s store officer is required to assign
Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ). in writing all responsibilities to personnel. These
letters will include your duties and limitations,
Assigning Responsibilities effective date, and the person you relieve, if any.
You will acknowledge acceptance of these
Listed below are some of the responsibilities responsibilities required to perform your duties.
that may be assigned to you and are common to These letters of assignment will be filed and
the ship’s store operation: maintained in the Military Correspondence File,
SSA-17, for a period of 2 years.
Custody, care, and protection of monies
and property Separate and Combined
Responsibilities
Proper documentation of receipt and issue
of materials and monies As a Ship’s Serviceman, you will often hear
the terms separate responsibility or combined
Custody and accurate maintenance of responsibility. You should be familiar with and
stock and financial control records understand the difference between these two terms
because many ship’s store tasks will differ
Inventory control practice to ensure procedurally between the two.
prescribed stock levels A separate responsibility operation is one in
which two or more persons are responsible for the
Completion of inventories and preparation operation of a sales outlet and the bulk storeroom
of ship’s store returns that supplies that sales outlet. On the other hand,
a combined responsibility operation is one in
Preparation of required reports which one person is responsible for both a sales
outlet and the bulk storeroom that supplies that
Keep in mind, the term monies as used previously sales outlet. Most ships are under separate
is referring to cash transactions in the ship’s store responsibility operations; however, some ships
operation and does not include monies held by have combined responsibility operations and some
the disbursing officer. ships have a mixture of both.
Although you may be well trained in your area
of responsibility, the supply officer will still Multiple Sales Outlet Operators
exercise certain controls to maintain his or her
accountability. First, the supply officer will When circumstances make it necessary, the
prescribe the responsibilities assigned to you in commanding officer may request to have more
the supply department organizational chart, than one person operating a sales outlet. Once the
2-4
type commander approves the commanding policies, and familiarize yourself with many
officer’s request, a two-drawer cash register must procedures before you operate a retail store.
be used, where each operator has access to only
one drawer. When two persons operate one retail AUTHORIZED CUSTOMERS
store, cash will be collected at the end of each
shift and inventory will be held monthly.
Ship’s store and clothing stock may be sold to
officers and enlisted personnel of all branches of
OPERATION OF THE RETAIL the armed forces, Public Health Service
STORE personnel, National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration personnel, and foreign service
The primary sales outlet aboard ship is the personnel of the United States who are on board
retail store (fig. 2-2). This is not only the most for duty, active duty for training, or passage en
difficult sales outlet to operate, but customer route to a duty station. Accredited United States
contact is normally heavy. Most ships have one or technicians (military or civilian) who are assigned
two retail stores; however, this is dependent on on board in an official capacity are authorized
the size of the ship and crew. As the retail store customers. Also authorized are the previously
operator, you will eventually become the center of mentioned personnel who, while not actually on
attention among the crew. This is why you will board, are located in remote areas where armed
need to learn your job well so you can perform for services exchange facilities are not available.
your shipmates in a beneficial manner. You will Items purchased from the ship’s store by
perform many tasks, need to know many authorized customers must be purchased for the
personal use of the purchaser or dependents or
2-5
as gifts and must not be resold or exchanged in PERSONNEL OF FOREIGN SHIPS IN
barter with any other person. DISTRESS.— Sales for cash of ship’s store stock
All items of insignia, including buttons, have and nondistinctive items of clothing may be made
been designated as distinctive items of the Navy to personnel of foreign ships who are in distress.
uniform and will not be sold to anyone who is A request for sale must be submitted by the
not authorized to wear these articles as items of commanding officer of the ship concerned and
uniform. must be approved by the commanding officer
of the ship making the sale. Only such
Service-Type Ships
quantities that can be spared will be sold or
On service-type ships such as ADs, ARs, and transferred.
ASs, ship’s store stock and standard Navy
FOREIGN SHIPS VISITING U.S. PORTS.—
clothing stock are authorized for sale to officer
Sales for cash of ship’s store stock and
and enlisted personnel other than ship’s company
nondistinctive items of clothing may be made to
when they are attached to those ships receiving
military personnel attached to foreign ships
support.
visiting United States ports in connection with the
Survivors of Marine and following:
Aircraft Disasters
Participation in exercises with the U.S.
Ship’s store stock and nondistinctive items of fleet
clothing may be sold for cash to the survivors of
Research, development, and evaluation
marine and aircraft disasters, if such survivors
programs
have personal funds available. If the survivor is
without personal funds, emergency issues may be Outfitting incident to ships’ transfer
made according to the procedures outlined in the programs
NAVSUP P-487.
Scheduled conversion, overhaul, or repair
Other Military Activities
Merchant Ships
Ship’s store stock and items of clothing may
be sold to ships not operating ship’s stores and Sales for cash of ship’s store stock and
to armed services exchanges. Ship’s store stock nondistinctive items of clothing may be made to
and nondistinctive items of clothing may be sold merchant ships in distress or in need of supplies
to exchange locations operated on board civil when normal sources do not exist. A request for
service manned ships of the Military Sealift sale must be submitted by the master of the ship
Command (MSC), private messes, cigar messes; concerned and must be approved by your
to the commanding officer for recreational commanding officer. Only such quantities as can
purposes; and to other duly constituted clubs or be spared will be sold.
messes that have been authorized by a com-
HOURS OF OPERATION
manding officer and whose monthly records are
audited. The hours of operation of the retail and
clothing store are prescribed by the commanding
Official Government Organizations
officer. Consequently, they will vary from
Upon approval of the commanding officer, ship to ship or on change of command. The
cash sales of ship’s store stock and nondistinctive important thing to remember is that these
items of clothing may be made to representatives prescribed hours must be prominently posted at
of official United States Government organiza- all times.
tions at isolated activities outside the United Store hours of operation decals are available
States when the stock items cannot be con- on request from NAVRESSO. The decal is
veniently obtained elsewhere and the normal pressure sensitive and is applied easily. Lettering
operation of the ship’s store is not impaired by is brilliant gold on a blue background, hours are
doing this. interchangeable, and complete sets of different
hours are supplied with each decal for at sea and
Foreign Governments
in port.
Ship’s store stock and nondistinctive items of The hours of operation should be prominently
clothing may be sold to personnel of foreign ships posted and visible from the outside of the store;
in distress and to personnel of foreign ships usually on the door of a walk-in store or a window
visiting U.S. ports. of a smaller store.
2-6
Stores should be open at least 42 hours per comments on items carried and services offered.
week underway and 20 hours in port. The hours Drop a note in the suggestion box. The ship’s
should be set to provide the entire crew an store officer will give it special attention.”
opportunity to shop and should be staggered for There should be a sign stating that all profits
different outlets to provide service after working go to the recreation fund. A notice should be
hours, especially while underway. Customers posted that special orders may be made through
should be allowed an additional 15 minutes in the ship’s store office for authorized merchandise
walk-in stores to conclude shopping. Whenever not carried in stock.
changes are made to store hours or when the There should also be a sign stating the
store is going to be closed, customers should be ship’s store policy on returning defective
notified at least 1 week in advance. merchandise bought in the store. Some of the
signs previously mentioned are available from
POLICY SIGNS NAVRESSO ship’s store division. Consult the
Ship’s Stores Afloat Visual Merchandising
Policy signs should be prominently posted in Supplement on “Basic Display and Signing
the retail store so customers can see them. There Requirements” for what is currently available.
should be signs stating that personal checks are The other signs can be locally prepared.
accepted up to the amount of sale.
A sign about the harmful effects of cigarette DISPLAY OF MERCHANDISE
smoking must be placed in each area where
cigarettes are sold, whether by the pack or by the Display of items in the sales outlet
carton. should inform and educate the customer as
A sign showing the regulations for authorized to the quality, price, use, and other
customers should be posted near each register. A important characteristics of the merchandise
sign should be posted near the suggestion box (fig. 2-3). Displays should make
stating “To better serve you we solicit your
2-7
an impression on the customer that will answer QUICKLY IDENTIFIED
as many questions as possible about the
merchandise. This will reduce the time the Shopping can be speeded and customers made
customer will use in making a decision on whether to feel more satisfied if they can identify
to buy a product or not, thus shortening waiting merchandise quickly. To achieve this, bear these
time and lines at retail stores. Any display that points in mind when setting up displays:
does not convey, to the customer, sufficient
information on which the customer can make a Place labels and informative copy on
decision is incomplete and fails its purpose. The packages face up and right side out so that
purpose of a display is to show merchandise in information is read easily.
such a manner that it is attractive, easily seen,
quickly identified, readily accessible, neatly Show the item so that its purpose or use
arranged, and properly correlated for convenient is obvious. This may require the use of a sign or
selection and shopping ease. an opening on the item so that its features can
be seen.
2-8
CORRELATED Equipment Condition
Displays look best and are most productive Equipment, whether new or old, should
and convenient to the customer and the store always be kept in good working order. Special
operator when items are correlated. Simply attention should be given to maintenance of locks,
defined, this means show together items that are door tracks, shelf channels, and so forth.
related in use or purpose. It is an old retail axiom Replacement or repairs should be made without
that one item will suggest another. Therefore, delay when necessary.
when arranging displays, see that related items are
put together. Set up toiletries in a compact section, Fixtures
cigarettes and tobaccos in one, and jewelry in
another. This treatment of merchandise permits The basic fixture requirements for the ship’s
easier selection, and customers do not have to scan store are quite limited. The size of the store front,
several different areas of display to find what they space between shelves, and the nature of the items
want. It is much more helpful to the customer if displayed must be considered before display
toothbrushes are displayed near the toothpaste, fixtures are selected for use in any store. Fixtures
shoelaces near the shoe polish. This correlation considered basic for most stores are shown in the
of one item with another usually acts as a Ship’s Stores Afloat Visual Merchandising Guide.
reminder to customers and encourages or prompts Purchase orders for display aids listed should be
them to select or buy items that they might have forwarded on a DD Form 1155 to NAVRESSO,
forgotten they needed. You should go through the at which time prices will be negotiated with the
store frequently and take a look at your vendors by NAVRESSO.
merchandise arrangements, determine whether Fixtures should be treated with care. Dust and
each item is displayed to assist the customers, polish them before each use. When not in use,
rather than hinder them. store them in a safe place where they will be
protected from damage or breakage. Fixtures that
ARRANGING DISPLAYS have been damaged or broken should not be used,
since they detract from the appearance of clean
The preceding pages have been devoted to new merchandise. Head or shirt forms and other
explaining the principles of displaying and what display futures made of papier-mache and coated
good displays should do. Now that you under- with plaster can be easily repaired with patching
stand that merchandise must be treated in certain plaster or spackle. Glass, plastic, lucite, and metal
ways for maximum effectiveness we must consider fixtures should be spotless when being used.
the means and devices necessary to get the desired Discard those broken beyond repair.
results.
Many factors have to be considered in the Signs
operation of a successful and attractive retail
store. The location, layout, and condition of Signs are the silent voice of the store operator.
equipment are the three elements involved. They tell the customer where the store is, what
is or will be on sale, what the items are, and their
Location price. Any other information, descriptive or
explanatory, that will help the customer to shop
The most desirable location is an area adjacent more easily and quickly should also be included.
to a mess, recreational area, or other high traffic
spot. Space in front should be adequate to permit Decorations
free flow of traffic without disturbing shoppers.
Decorations should be used in the ship’s store
Layout displays to arouse customer interest and add to
the appearance of the merchandise on display.
Layout of equipment both inside and outside Decorations will also alert your customers to
the store should be planned to afford both the approaching events or seasons and remind them
customer and the operator as much convenience to purchase their needs in advance. The previously
as possible. In this respect, the location, the selling mentioned Visual Merchandising Guide includes
area, and the arrangement of shelving for fast- information on procurement of an all-season
selling merchandise must be considered. display kit.
2-9
The retail store should be decorated for all The maximum prescribed overall profit
major events and seasonal changes. When displays limitation is 15 percent. This limitation
are installed for seasonal events, the decorations applies to a percentage of overall sales and not
should be changed too. No displays should be left to individual items. Special order items will be
in cases for more than 1 month without being marked up as determined by the ship’s store
refreshed or changed. Clean, fresh, and colorful officer.
displays should be evident at all times. Care must
be taken when employing decorative materials to
avoid overshadowing or overcrowding merchan- CLOTHING
dise. The use of too much decor can detract from
the appearance of the display and cause Standard Navy clothing items are sold at
confusion. standard prices, as shown in the Navy Clothing
Remember, it is always better to keep displays Price List for Men and Women, NAVRESSO Pub
simple, neat, and lightly decorated. They are more 90. ROM users will assign department code L-1
pleasing to the eye and more likely to interest the to the stock records for all standard Navy clothing
customer. If it creates interest, shows merchandise items. The ROM system will not compute the 15
at its best, and holds attention, it is a good percent markup for items assigned department
display. code L-1.
2-10
PRICES TO OTHER MILITARY articles do not lend themselves to individual price
ACTIVITIES marking. These include beef pepperoni sticks,
belts, books, candy, chewing gum, cigarettes,
Nonexcess salable stock items of ship’s store combs, flint lighters, greeting cards, handker-
are sold at cost price to other military activities chiefs, key rings/chains, magazines, matches,
except as follows: postcards, rating badges, ship photographs,
shoelaces, shower shoes, soaps, toothbrush
Sales to the commanding officer of ship’s holders, and wick lighters. The selling price for
store stock for recreational purposes must be these items should be plainly marked on the bin
made at the retail price. or shelf holding these items by use of signs or price
lists.
Sales to ships not operating ship’s stores
must be made at the retail price when the The ROM system will generate shelf labels that
transferring ship provides a composite recreation identify the stock number and price. The ROM
fund. What this basically means is the requesting Terminal User’s Guide ( T U G ) p r o v i d e s
ship shares in the profits of the supporting ship; instructions on how to produce these labels that
for example, SSNs supported by an AS. can be used for all items in the retail store, but
you should make sure all items not mentioned
previously are also marked with the price
Authorized cigar messes. individually. This will help you in selling,
merchandising, inventorying, while at the same
Merchant ships and foreign governments. time prevent price manipulation. A standardized
price marker and price tags should be used.
Information on these items is available in the
MARKDOWNS Ship’s Store Afloat Basic Display and Signing
Requirement, NAVRESSO VM SUP.
A markdown is a reduction of a previously
established price. It is used to stimulate sales of When you receive merchandise into the retail
slow-moving merchandise or damaged goods. store or snack bar, you will price the merchandise
Markdowns are done only on the authority of a using the retail price list on the Intra-Store
Retail Price Change, NAVSUP Form 983, Transfer Data, NAVSUP Form 973. When you
approved by the ship’s store officer. are using the price marker, attach the price tickets
When a markdown is necessary, it is best to to each item without damaging the product or
mark down a substantial amount, rather than a product container itself. You should also attach
small amount one day and a little more a couple tickets uniformly on similar items so they can be
of days later. Make a markdown large enough to easily seen when you are ringing the prices up on
stimulate the sale now, rather than have the the cash register. Never use crayons or grease
customers try to wait until you have reached your pencils to mark merchandise because the price can
lowest point of reduction. Initial markdowns of be easily altered. Never re-mark any merchandise
25 percent or 50 percent are not uncommon in unless you have a Retail Price Change, NAVSUP
the retail trade and should be taken when Form 983, approved by the ship’s store officer.
necessary to stimulate sale of the item. Always have a price list available in the retail
All markdowns should be prominently store near the cash register so you can check
displayed so that the customers may notice the prices when you are not sure. You should use a
sale readily. copy of the Ship’s Store Inventory Count Sheet,
Standard clothing items are not marked down NAVSUP Form 238, for this purpose and make
on a NAVSUP Form 983, but are reduced on a changes to this price list as required in
Report of Survey, DD Form 200. These pro- ink.
cedures are covered elsewhere in this manual.
A ship’s store must display its prices for each The sales outlet operator is responsible to the
article so that customers can see the prices. Some ship’s store officer for the proper handling of all
2-11
cash received from sales (fig. 2-4). Since there is a Cash registers should not be turned back, nor
great deal of cash handled during an accounting should the reading be altered at any time.
period, caution should be exercised by all Readings should be allowed to accumulate. The
personnel having anything to do with money. “paid-out” key, if installed in the cash register,
must be blocked out to prevent use.
CASH REGISTERS
Location of the Register
All sales in the retail store must be cleared
through cash registers. Sales, therefore, shift The cash register must be located where it
accountability from merchandise to cash. You are will provide the customer with a clear view of the
responsible for safeguarding cash in the same registration of the amount of the sale. As an
manner in which you safeguard merchandise. optional procedure, a cash register that provides
The retail store operator is the only person the customer with a tape, itemized and totaled, is
allowed access to the cash register. Under no acceptable.
circumstances can anyone other than the retail
store operator ring up sales. The cash register Cash Register Keys
provides a record of the amount of money you
collect. Use it properly. Keep in mind, however, The keys to the register will be in the custody
that you are held responsible for errors in pricing of the cash collection agent including keys that
and in making change.
2-12
permit access to the detailed tapes and the key that On special occasions such as paydays, when a
controls the selection levers. All levers will be greater amount is required temporarily for
locked in the cash position except when the cash change, an extra amount may be entrusted to the
collection agent is making collections. retail store operator upon presentation of his or
her receipt. Such extra amounts must be specified
in the instructions of the commanding officer to
Cash Register Tapes the ship’s store officer.
2-13
identification card and verify the signature to TAKING THE CUSTOMER’S
make sure it is the same as that on the traveler’s MONEY
check.
Most errors happen during the exchange of
money between the customer and the operator of
PUTTING MONEY IN THE the store. Before you actually take the money, ring
REGISTER up each item the customer is purchasing separately
on the cash register. Do not try to add the total
Once you have signed for your change fund price of more than one item in your head. The
as discussed earlier, you will have to arrange the cash register is designed to do this for you.
cash from the change fund in your cash tray. It Complete each transaction before thinking about
may seem strange, but the number of cash starting another one. This will prevent confusing
handling errors you make may be related to how yourself and the customer and will avoid
you arrange your money in the cash tray. After any shortages or overages in the cash re-
you count your money, arrange it in the cash gister. Apologize to the customer who must
register carefully as shown in figure 2-5. If your wait. The better you manage your customers,
cash register has less than five compartments, the fewer errors you will make in handling
place any checks you receive during the day under money.
the cash- tray in the cash drawer. Make sure all
bills are placed in their respective compartments, Count the money as you receive it from the
facing up in the same direction. Make sure while customer for each sale. Repeat out loud the
putting the bills in the tray that they do not stick amount of money handed to you, as well as the
together. If the bills are new, it is a good practice amount of the sale. By doing this for every sales
to turn the corner down on each bill to prevent transaction, you avoid the chance of becoming
giving two instead of one for change. Large bills confused if the customer should claim that a larger
such as $50 or $100 should always be placed under bill was given to you. For example, as the
the money tray. Keep coins in their own customer hands you this money, you should say,
compartments, with pennies on the right, then “Thank you, that will be $4.35 out of $5.” Leave
nickels, dimes, and quarters. Half dollars should the amount of money received on the change plate
be kept together in one compartment next to the until you count the change from the till. If
quarters. someone interrupts you or you forget, you will
have the exact amount received in front of you
Before ringing up your first sale of the day just below the row of keys on the register. You
you should make certain the area around the cash will not have any doubt or mistakes on the
register is clear. Do not clutter the area amount. Count the change twice, first as you take
surrounding the cash register with signs, notes, it from the till and second as you give it to the
or other items. The sales window should be clear customer. Start counting your change from the
so the customer can see the amount of sale being amount rung up until you build up to the amount
registered. received. For example, if you have to ring up
$4.35 out of $5, you would pickup a nickel and
a dime from your till and count aloud, “Four
forty, four fifty,” and then pick up two quarters
and count aloud, “Four seventy-five, five
dollars.” Repeat in the same way as you count
the change into the customer’s hand. If you or
the customer finds an error in your count, take
back all change from the customer. Make your
corrections, and then count the change correctly
into the customer’s hand. Now remove the money
from the change plate and put it in the cash
drawer. Be sure to close the cash drawer after
every transaction; never work out of an open cash
drawer. If your cash register provides a receipt,
tear the receipt off and give it to the customer.
Figure 2-5 .—Arranging money in the register. Always remember to look at your first receipt of
2-14
the day to make sure it prints clearly and that the sale and is returned within 30 days of such
date is right. sale
Retain the daily log and adding machine OVERRINGS AND UNDERRINGS
tapes in the same manner as cash register
Some cash register operators, it seems, never
tapes.
make a mistake. But what happens if they push
the wrong button, or the customer does not have
Enter cash collected in the Cash Receipt enough money to pay for the purchase? When an
Book, NAVSUP Form 470, Cash Register underring occurs; that is, you didn’t charge the
Record, NAVSUP Form 469, and the ROM customer enough, you can correct it simply by
system. ringing up the difference between the item’s actual
retail price and what you charged the customer.
Collect all cash including change funds For example, the customer purchases a radio for
daily. $23. You, however, mistakenly ring up $13. This
problem is simply corrected by ringing up an
additional $10 ($23-$13). This type of cash register
REFUNDS error requires no authorization to correct;
however, overrings require the signature of the
ship’s store officer before they are valid. An
All sales made in the retail store are final overring occurs when:
except that merchandise determined to be
defective may be returned for refund or
adjustment under the following conditions: the amount rung up on the register is
greater than the price of the item, or
When merchandise can be reasonably Once an overring occurs, the sales outlet
assumed to have been defective at the time of operator must prepare an Overring/Refund
2-15
Figure 2-6.—Overring/Refund Voucher, NAVSUP Form 972 (for refunds).
Voucher, NAVSUP Form 972 (fig. 2-7). The sales PERSONAL CHECKS RETURNED
outlet operator and the ship’s store officer will BY THE BANK
both sign the NAVSUP Form 972, and it will be
kept under the cash tray in the register until daily When a personal check, which was written for
collections are made. At the time cash is collected, purchase in the retail store, is returned to the ship
the person making collections will attach the 972 due to insufficient funds, the ship’s store officer
to the applicable page of the Cash Register must reimburse the disbursing officer for the
Record, NAVSUP Form 469, and make a amount of the check from cash in the retail store
separate entry on both the NAVSUP Form 469 register. The retail store operator will take the
and the Cash Receipt Book, NAVSUP Form 470. personal check and place it under the cash tray
2-16
Figure 2-7.—Overring/RefundVoucher, NAVSUP Form 972 (for overrings).
in the register until cash, a certified check, or inventory prelisting and the amount of the check
money order is received for settlement. Once one included in the inventory.
of the above is received, it will be placed in the If, after repeated attempts, the ship’s store
cash register and the check returned to the officer fails to collect the amount of the check,
individual purchaser. it will reconsidered uncollectible after 4 months.
The amount of the check will have to be charged
To account for a personal check returned, you
as an operating expense of the ship’s store. The
should make a separate entry on the Cash Register
amount of the uncollectible check will be reported
Record, NAVSUP Form 469, showing that an
on the Cash Register Record, NAVSUP Form
uncollectible check is in the cash register. The
469, for information purposes only. The words
amount of the check will not be written in the
Dishonored Check will be entered in the Amount
Amount In Figures column of the NAVSUP Form
In Figures column of the NAVSUP Form 469 to
469, instead the words Uncollectible Check will
make sure the amount of the dishonored check
be entered here so it will not be totaled at the end
is not included in the monthly total. The
of the month. Once the money is received for the
dishonored check will be removed from the
check from the individual purchaser, the amount
register and turned over to the ship’s store officer.
will be shown on the Cash Register Record,
At the end of the accounting period, a
NAVSUP Form 469, for information purposes.
Memorandum Invoice, DD Form 1149, will be
The amount will not be included in the total figure
prepared listing all dishonored checks. The invoice
but the words Settled Check will reentered in the
will contain the following:
Amount In Figures column of the NAVSUP Form
469 to indicate the check is settled. Keep in mind
Name and social security number of each
that the amount of money received to cover the
check drafter
check will not be rung up in the register but just
placed in the cash drawer and the check returned
Date of check
to the individual purchaser.
If the check is not settled by the end of the Bank and bank account the check was
accounting period or when the retail store drawn from
operator is relieved, the retail store operator
should make sure the check is included on the Amount of check
2-17
A separate entry will be made for all Group sales are always made at established
dishonored checks by the office recordskeeper on retail prices and are cleared through the cash
the Ship’s Store Afloat Financial Control Record, register in the usual manner.
NAVSUP Form 235, to adjust the retail store
operator’s accountability. Bulk Sales
ROM users will create a separate Intra-Store
Transfer Data, NAVSUP Form 973, for dis- Bulk sales normally are made to Navy
honored checks from the retail store to the bulk exchanges, MSC exchanges, or ships not operating
storeroom to adjust the retail stores accountability ship’s stores when the transferring ship does not
on the Ship’s Store Afloat Financial Control provide a composite recreation fund. In other
Record, NAVSUP Form 235. After the ship’s words, the requesting ship does not receive a share
store officer verifies that an intrastore transfer was of the profits from another ship’s store.
accomplished to adjust accountability, he or she Bulk sales are made using the Requisition and
will change the balance on the Stock Record, Invoice/Shipping Document, DD Form 1149.
NAVSUP Form 464, to zero through the ROM Requests for bulk sales from activities that are
corrections function and delete the stock record. authorized to buy ship’s store stock at cost price
are submitted by the activities’ commanding
SPECIAL-TYPE SALES officer. (See fig. 2-8.) Once you receive this
requisition, your ship’s store officer will approve
In addition to regular sales transactions, you it by signing the DD Form 1149. You will then
have special transactions that are authorized for sell the items requisitioned at cost price from the
ship’s store with which you should be familiar. retail store. If your retail store stock is insufficient
These include group sales, bulk sales, and the sale to cover the order, additional quantities should
of traveler’s checks. be obtained from the bulk storeroom using the
Intra-Store Transfer Data, NAVSUP Form 973.
Group Sales ROM users must verify that the ship’s store
stock numbers used by the requesting activity are
The necessity for conducting group sales of the same as those used by the issuing ships
ship’s store stock is generally limited to ships such records. The requesting activity’s DD Form 1149
as transport vessels or activities that carry or serve is then taken by the ship’s store recordskeeper who
individual units of personnel such as Army troops, will enter the bulk sale into the ROM
Marine Corps troops, and large detachments of miscellaneous expenditure function and the ROM
Navy and Coast Guard personnel. Because ship’s will automatically assign an expenditure number.
store spaces and store hours are generally limited, After the bulk sale is entered in the ROM, the DD
it is often impossible to serve all the crew plus Form 1149 is taken to the retail store, and the
troop personnel on an individual basis. As a operator will then sell the items requisitioned at
remedy, group sales may be conducted. cost price.
Under this system, troop units are divided Normally, payment for bulk sales is required
according to squads, platoons, companies, at the time of delivery and you, as retail store
berthing assignments, or some other category, and operator, will acknowledge receiving payment by
individual orders for purchases within a group are signing the DD Form 1149. The purchaser will
combined and turned over to one responsible then sign the DD Form 1149 to acknowledge
person. This person may then either purchase the receipt of material. If for some reason the store
group orders directly from the ship’s store during operator does not receive payment, a copy of the
hours when it is normally not open for sales, or DD Form 1149 will be retained in the cash register.
may clear the orders through the troop The value of the material will be carried as
quartermaster for further combining. inventory and included on the last page of the
In either case, a considerable amount of time Inventory Count Sheet, NAVSUP Form 238, until
will be required for the ship’s store operator to payment is received. Once payment is received,
make up and check the group orders, and it will be rung up on the cash register and the DD
adequate allowance must be made for this time. Form 1149 will be removed.
For example, when orders are submitted late one The cash collected from bulk sales will be
afternoon, this person will usually have until the reported as a separate entry for information
middle of the following morning to make up the purposes in your Cash Receipt Book, NAVSUP
orders and check them. Form 470, and the Cash Register Record,
2-18
.
NAVSUP Form 469. The amount collected is not Journal of Expenditures, NAVSUP Form 978.
added to the total cash collected for the month The ROM system will enter and post the bulk sale
from the retail store. The words Bulk Sales are automatically to the applicable records. Make sure
entered in the Amount in Figures column of both you receive a copy of the bulk sale and the
the NAVSUP Forms 469 and 470. ROM users will NAVSUP Form 983 for your retail store file.
enter amounts collected from bulk sales in the Larger bulk sales for orders that cannot be filled
ROM cash receipt function using store number in your retail store may be made out of the bulk
99. ROM will automatically total and enter all storeroom at cost price. The procedures for doing
collections entered for store number 99 to the bulk this are contained in the NAVSUP P-487.
sales total of the Memorandum Cash Sales Invoice
Deposit of Cash with the Disbursing Officer, DD Traveler’s Checks
Form 1149.
Since bulk sales are made at cost price, the Traveler’s checks may be sold through the
retail store is losing the difference between cost ship’s store after approval of the commanding
price and selling price. To account for this, the officer. All traveler’s checks are stored in the
ship’s store office will prepare a Retail Price ship’s store officer’s safe. Any traveler’s checks
Change, NAVSUP Form 983, to mark down the that will not fit in the ship’s store officer’s safe
items to be sold to cost price. The NAVSUP Form will be turned over to the disbursing office for
983 will be posted to the Ship’s Store Afloat safekeeping. The retail store operator will main-
Financial Control Record, NAVSUP Form 235. tain a working stock of traveler’s checks in a three-
The DD Form 1149 for bulk sales is posted to the combination safe. Only the retail store operator
2-19
will have access to the safe and any of the working All cash collected from traveler’s checks is
stock not sold during the working day will be recorded in a separate Cash Register Record,
turned over to the ship’s store officer at the close NAVSUP Form 469.
of business. Traveler’s checks are issued by the
ship’s store officer to the store operator daily. The
ship’s store officer will maintain a locally CASH COLLECTIONS
developed log to account for the checks. The log
is called the Traveler’s Check Control Record and The ship’s store officer is responsible for the
this log will have columns for the following: collection and deposit of funds received from sales
in the ship’s store. If desired, however, the ship’s
Date store officer may designate an officer or enlisted
assistant as collection agent to count and collect
Quantity received from vendor cash from retail stores. Such designation must be
made in writing. The cash collection agent will
Quantity issued to retail store operator not be assigned duties as retail store, vending
machine, amusement machine, or snack bar
Quantity returned by retail store operator operator. The records keeper may be designated
cash collection agent only when sufficient
Initials (both ship’s store officer’s and personnel are not available; however, this is not
retail store operator’s) recommended. Although disbursing personnel
may not be designated as cash collection agent,
Balance on hand they may make collections from the sales outlets
by virtue of their position. Cash received from
The hours in which traveler’s checks are sold the sales in the retail store must be counted and
will be designated by the commanding officer and collected from the retail store operator at the close
should not conflict with the regular store hours. of each business day except when moneybags or
The minimum sale of traveler’s checks is $50. a night depository safe is used. When more than
There will be a surcharge of 1 percent ($1 per one shift is in operation, all cash from sales must
$100) of the amount sold. The ship retains two- be collected at the end of each shift. All cash
thirds of 1 percent (67 cents per $1) of the including change funds will also be collected at
surcharge, while the remaining one-third (33 cents the end of the accounting period (30 Sept, 31 Jan,
per $1) is given to the vendor. To assist you in 31 May), when the sales outlet is closed for 72
selling the traveler’s checks, consult the Ship’s hours or more, and when the ship’s store officer
Store Afloat Catalog listing for traveler’s checks, or the sales outlet operator is relieved.
which contains complete instructions for selling During actual cash collections, the cash
checks to customers. register will be rung out and the reading will be
At the end of the business day, turn any recorded. The difference between the current
remaining traveler’s check stock and all cash from day’s register reading and the previous day’s
sales of traveler’s checks collected over to the reading minus the cash left in the register for
ship’s store officer. Use the locally developed change should equal the cash collected. If it does
Traveler’s Check Cash Collection Record log for not, then you have an overage or shortage.
this purpose. The log will have columns for the Refunds and overrings will be included in the
following: formula when necessary.
Value of checks issued to the retail store CASH DELIVERED BY THE SALES
operator OUTLET OPERATOR
Value of checks returned The ship’s store officer may have the cash
delivered daily by the retail store operator to the
Cash for face value of checks sold designated collection agent. This is normally done
when it is impractical for one reason or another
Value of surcharge fees collected for the collection agent to go around to every sales
outlet to make collections.
Initials (both ship’s store officer’s and When the cash receipts are delivered to the
retail store operator’s) collection agent, the ship’s store officer must
2-20
make sure the cash registers, vending machine depository safe is used, moneybags will normally
meters, cash totalizers, and amusement machine be used to collect money from the sales outlets,
meters are read at the end of the business day. with the exception of vending machines where
When it is impractical to do this daily, it should money boxes will be used. The actual use of
be done at least twice weekly on an unscheduled money boxes is discussed later in this chapter. The
basis. Cash for change will be provided daily by sales outlet operator should carefully insert the
the cash collection agent to the store operator in moneybag or money box in the night depository
exchange for a cash receipt. safe, making sure it drops to the bottom. The
money safe in the lower depository of the
MONEYBAGS approved type of night depository safe is dual
controlled by a key and combination lock. Two
When conditions make it impractical to collect keys are provided for the key lock. One is given
the cash, such as when the retail store is open after to a person who does not have access to or
regular working hours, including weekends, all knowledge of the combination to the safe and who
cash in the register, including the change fund, is responsible for opening the key lock. The other
may be placed in a moneybag, which must be key is placed in an envelope (signed across the flap
locked and turned over to the supply department by the ship’s store officer and the person
duty officer or to another commissioned duty responsible for opening the key lock to the safe)
officer for safekeeping. and is kept in the ship’s store officer’s safe. The
All moneybags are numbered on the outside combination to the money safe is kept by the
and are logged out in a locally developed log at ship’s store officer or designated cash collection
the time of issue to the retail store operator. The agent. The combination is recorded on a piece of
supply department duty officer or another paper and placed in a sealed envelope, signed
commissioned duty officer keeps the log in his or across the flap by the ship’s store officer and cash
her possession during the duty day. Each collection agent, and kept in the ship’s store
moneybag is provided with two keys. One key is officer’s safe.
kept by the retail store or snack bar operator and
the other one must be kept in a sealed envelope Before the start of business the following day,
in the ship’s store officer’s safe. The envelope the cash register reading will be taken. The key
must be signed across the flap by the ship’s store lock and the combination lock to the safe are
officer and the retail store or snack bar operator. opened by authorized personnel, and the
After closing the retail store or snack bar, the moneybags or money boxes are removed and
operator places the cash from sales including opened by the sales outlet operator. The person
change fund in the moneybag. The moneybag(s) making collections then counts the money in the
is/are locked and turned over to the supply presence of the sales outlet operator.
department duty officer or another commissioned
duty officer to be placed in a safe for safekeeping.
The duty officer signs the log acknowledging CASH LEFT IN THE CASH
receipt of the moneybags. The money in the REGISTER OVERNIGHT
locked moneybag does not need to be counted;
however, every subsequent transfer of the locked Cash not to exceed $50 may be left in the cash
moneybag should be recorded in the log. The register overnight except when more than one shift
following day, before the start of business, the is operated. In each instance when a $50 change
cash register must be read and the retail store or fund is inadequate on a continuing basis, the type
snack bar operator must open the moneybag, commander may authorize that cash not to exceed
count the money, and turn it over to the person $100 may be left in the cash register overnight
making collections. except when more than one shift is operated.
It is highly recommended that cash not be left
NIGHT DEPOSITORY SAFE in the register overnight; it should be locked up
inside a safe installed inside the store for that
An approved night depository safe may be purpose. The cash register drawer should be
installed for depositing money when sales outlets drawn out in the evening to indicate that there
are opened after regular working hours, including is no money in it. Also, a sign should be posted
weekends or any other time it is impractical for conspicuously outside the store stating that
the person making collections to do so. When the “There is no money left in the register overnight.”
2-21
ACCOUNTING FOR CASH daily collections from the sales outlets, must
receipt for all cash in the cash receipt book. (See
Each store operator is responsible for the cash
fig. 2-9.) When the cash collection agent is making
collected from sales as long as it is in his or her
collections, the ship’s store officer will review the
possession. Cash is usually collected at the close
cash receipt book daily, or at least twice a week,
of each business day by the ship’s store officer
and will initial entries. In addition, the ship’s store
or a designated collection agent. Two records are
officer will compare the amounts entered on the
maintained in which the cash collection is
ROM with the amounts entered in the NAVSUP
recorded. In addition to these records, ROM users
Form 470 once a week. Spaces are provided in
will enter cash collections in the cash receipt
the cash receipt book for the date; the amount
function daily, or as soon as practical.
of cash turned in (which is written out in words
and also entered in figures); and the signature of
Cash Receipt Book
the person collecting, as well as that of the sales
The Cash Receipt Book, NAVSUP Form 470, outlet operator. Whenever an error is made, draw
has already been mentioned often in this chapter. a line through the entire line and write the correct
The NAVSUP Form 470 shows receipt for all cash information in the following space. Line-outs
and overring or refund vouchers, if any, turned must be initialed by the sales outlet operator and
in to the ship’s store officer or cash collection the person making collections. No alterations are
agent. This cash receipt book is kept in the allowed.
custody of each sales outlet operator. The Whenever the store is closed for 72 hours or
designated cash collection agent, when making the more, record it in the cash receipt book. Record
2-22
Overring/Refund Vouchers, NAVSUP Form 972, vouchers collected from sales is recorded in this
as a separate entry in words only, with the record at the end of each business day. The over-
notation Overring or Refund, as applicable, in the ring or refund voucher is recorded on a separate
Figures column and with the date and signature line of the NAVSUP Form 469 and the voucher
included. The amount of the overring or refund itself is attached to the applicable page. The NAV-
voucher will not be added to the total collection SUP Form 469 will show when the sales outlet is
figure for the month. closed for 72 hours or more. It is not required
At the end of the month, the sales outlet to start a new cash register record when changing
operator will total the amounts on the NAVSUP cash collection agents, ship’s store officers, or dis-
Form 470. The total figure must match with the bursing officers.
total figure reported on the Cash Register ROM users will enter amounts collected from
Record, NAVSUP Form 469, and the total cash each sales outlet daily in the ROM system or as
collections entered in the ROM for that sales soon as practical. The ship’s store officer will
outlet. compare amounts entered in the ROM with the
amounts entered in the NAVSUP Form 469 once
Cash Register Record
a week.
A Cash Register Record, NAVSUP Form 469, As the sales outlet operator, you will sign for
is retained in the custody of the person making all cash collected from sales in the cash register
the collection as evidence of cash collected from record and should be familiar with what is
sales. Cash including any overring or refund entered in this record. (See fig. 2-10.) The
2-23
NAVSUP Form 469 provides a record for the prevent this just by keeping a close eye on the
following: customers. Only allow a limited number of
customers at a time to enter the walk-in store and
The date that cash was collected. never allow any customers to shop wearing a
heavy jacket. Always ask the customers politely
The cash register reading at the close of
business on the day the cash is collected. to remove their coats or jackets while in the store.
A small sign placed on the door will also help to
The actual cash in the cash register. remind them.
2-24
informal examination, no further action is re- be composed of one person. The office records-
quired and the ship’s store operation may resume. keeper may not be assigned to an inventory team.
However, if a loss is discovered, the accountable The first team should consist of the ship’s store
officer or agent will be relieved if found to be officer or other commissioned officer and one
responsible. The commanding officer will request enlisted person, while the second team will consist
assistance from the local NIS and will establish of one enlisted person in the supply rating E-6 or
a formal fact-finding body according to the JAG above and one other enlisted person.
Manual, par. 0909. Once inventory is completed
Since each sales outlet differs in size, volume,
and accountability reestablished, the ship’s store
layout, and so forth, specific instructions will be
operation will resume. The commanding officer
prepared locally and distributed to personnel well
will report findings and actions taken in the same
in advance of the inventory to cover such topics
manner as if a breakin had occurred.
as assignment of personnel, cutoff times, stock
arrangements, and so forth. A layout sketch of
INVENTORY the sales outlet will also be prepared showing each
fixture, bin, shelf, and showcase with a number
Physical inventory is the process by which you
identifying each one. These layouts are prepared
identify, count, and evaluate all stock on hand.
by the ship’s store officer in advance of the
Inventory is conducted in the sales outlets at the
inventory. An identical number to the one shown
end of each accounting period (31 Jan, 31 May,
on the layout sketch will be attached to each fix-
and 30 Sept), on relief of the ship’s store officer
ture by the sales outlet operator in the sales outlet.
or sales outlet operator, and when directed by
higher authority. As the sales outlet operator, you should make
The ship’s store officer is responsible overall sure your space is ready for inventory. First, you
for an accurate and complete inventory. Just should arrange all merchandise in the sales outlet,
before inventory, a two-count system will be so similar items are together and stacked neatly.
employed and, therefore, a minimum of two Second, you will prelist the space by putting the
inventory teams is required. Normally, inventory information, as shown in figure 2-11, on the
teams consist of two persons; however, if Inventory Count Sheet, NAVSUP Form 238. The
sufficient personnel are not available, teams may NAVSUP Form 238 is used to record the
2-25
inventory; you may obtain the forms from the you should use care when preparing your
ship’s store officer. You do not need to worry restocking list to avoid overstocking items that
about retail or cost prices on the prelisting; may be perishable. Stowage of and information
however, be sure you follow the inventory pattern. on specific stock items is covered in chapter 3 of
Prelist from left to right and finish prelisting one this TRAMAN.
fixture before moving onto the next. If your ship
uses the ROM system, you may be required to STORING FOR SEA
generate or update the inventory prelisting by
identifying ship’s store stock numbers in the same The important thing to keep in mind when
order as they will be inventoried. During inventory preparing your store for sea is to anticipate rough
when the actual physical inventory is not in weather. Racks and bins should be used to the
progress, and on completion of the inventory, the fullest extent, especially for all breakable items
retail store must remain closed until it has been such as cameras and watches. When these expen-
determined that there is no excessive shortage or sive items are damaged beyond sale, the loss is
overage. The ship’s store officer secures the space absorbed in your profits and there is no way the
with a numbered lead or car seal. A log of these money can be recouped. Never secure the store
numbered lead or car seals is maintained. for the day until you have very carefully checked
After it has been determined that there is no everything and are sure things are secured to
excessive shortage or overage, the lead seal is withstand any heavy seas that may develop during
broken and the store is reopened for business. the night. It takes only one hard roll to bring all
unsecured merchandise crashing to the deck.
RESTOCKING Many retail store operators have learned the hard
way when they found themselves putting their
The retail store is restocked by breaking out store back together, not to mention having to
merchandise from the bulk storeroom on an Intra- answer for their negligence. Taking the initial
Store Transfer Data, NAVSUP Form 973. Pro- precautions and a few extra minutes at the end
cedures for conducting breakouts are included in of each day will eliminate the possibility of any
chapter 3 of this TRAMAN. The important thing mishaps.
to remember about breakouts from the bulk
storeroom is to check every item to be sure that
you receive what you are charged for. If you SANITATION AND CLEANLINESS
receive more than you are charged for, you are
not making any extra money for the store because Sanitation regulations are approved by the
the mistake will have to be resolved at the end of senior member of the medical department and
the accounting period. Also this causes a great issued to all sales outlets and service activities.
deal of extra work for the office personnel. So These instructions are posted in ship’s store spaces
demand what you are charged for and take ONLY and must be rigidly enforced. All merchandise,
those amounts. shelves, bins, and the overhead must be kept free
When preparing requirements for restocking of dust and dirt. Keep the decks clean and allow
the store, there are a few basic considerations to no dirt or dust to accumulate in corners. Dirty
keep in mind. Make sure you use the basic stock merchandise in a dirty space loses its appeal.
list when you prepare your list of requirements In addition, personnel assigned to the spaces
for the retail store. As we discussed earlier, these must be scrupulously clean at all times. Your
basic stock items are considered necessary for the customer has every right to expect to be served
health and comfort of the crew and you should by a neat, well-groomed operator. Create a
try to keep them in stock at all times. favorable impression, and you have a customer
In hot, humid climates, avoid overstocking who is more easily satisfied.
highly perishable merchandise such as candy bars,
chocolates, gum, biscuits, cookies, and some
tobacco products. If your retail store is air- VENDING MACHINES
conditioned, you will not have this problem. You
will be able to control the temperature in your Just like the retail store, the vending machines
space. You should keep the temperature between are sales outlets. These machines are another
60°F and 65°F to protect all items. If your retail means of merchandising products aboard ship.
store is not air-conditioned or ventilation is poor, A vending machine (fig. 2-12) is a coin-operated
2-26
Figure 2-12.—Vending machines.
machine that dispenses merchandise after the will more than likely have to time your collections
customer inserts legal coins or currency. The so they will not interfere with your other work.
vending machine is equipped with a coin changer This can be easily worked out with the person
that provides change to the customer after who is making collections. You should keep in
purchase. The following coin-operated machines mind that the vending machines need to be
are authorized for shipboard use: cup or can soft collected daily or before making any repairs to the
drink, candy/cookie, cigarette, hot food/snack, coin mechanism or the machine itself whether the
dollar bill changer, and electronic amusement ship is in port or at sea. On the weekends in port,
machines. cash only needs to be collected from the vending
Vending machines are very important toward machines if the volume of sales is over $150, or
high crew morale. The two top jobs of the vending when making repairs to the machine or the coin
machine operator are keeping the machines full mechanism. Also when the last business day of
and taking care of customer complaints. Servicing the month falls on a weekend or holiday, all cash
the vending machines is not an easy job. They are must be collected.
the only part of the ship’s store operation that Collections are recorded on the NAVSUP
provide service 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Forms 469 and 470 according to the
procedures previously described. All
VENDING MACHINE CASH collections from the vending machines will be
COLLECTIONS entered in the ROM cash receipt function
daily, or as soon as practical. When more
As the vending machine operator, you will than one machine is operated, the cash
normally have another job on top of taking care of receipts for each machine must be recorded
the vending machines. To make collections within on separate pages of the NAVSUP Forms 469
prescribed time limits and still do your jobs, you and
2-27
470, and the pages must be identified accordingly. person making collections will then make sure the
The Cash Receipt Book, NAVSUP Form 470, will vending machine operator agrees with the meter
be kept in the custody of the vending machine reading or number of cans sold for each machine
operator. Meter readings are taken at the time of and will use them to see if the cash collected is
collection and used to determine the amount of over or short. When the money box is delivered
cash that should be in the vending machine. A to the cash collection agent instead of the ship’s
record of these meter readings is maintained on store officer, the ship’s store officer must make
the NAVSUP Form 469 under the column marked sure the collection agent is personally reading each
Number of Customers. The previous day’s meter vending machine meter at least twice weekly.
reading minus the meter reading at the time of
collection times the selling price should equal the Optional Procedures
cash collected.
There may be times such as weekends or after
LOCKED MONEY BOXES regular working hours when the ship’s store
officer or the cash collection agent is not available
When locked money boxes are installed in to accept the vending machine coin box. In this
drink vending machines, the boxes will be case one of two things must be done. Place the
numbered on the outside and issued to the vending money box in a night depository safe or turn the
machine operator by the person responsible for locked money box and meter reading over to the
cash collections. Before issuing the locked money supply department duty officer or another
boxes, the collection agent will make sure the box commissioned duty officer for safekeeping.
is key locked and a seal is affixed over the lock When the second method is used, a money box
opening. The number of the seal will be recorded log will be maintained by the duty officer receiving
in an unused column of the Cash Register Record, the money box. Each time the vending machine
NAVSUP Form 469. operator delivers or receives a money box from
the duty officer, an entry will be made in this log
Delivery by the Vending and signed by both persons. When the money box
Machine Operator is turned in, the duty officer will keep the money
box in a safe place until the next day. The vending
The vending machine operator may be machine operator will pick up the money box and
required to deliver the locked money boxes to the the cash will be collected and compared to the
person making collections. If this is done, you meter reading or number of cans sold.
should first take the meter reading and write it
down before you remove the money box. After VENDING MACHINE CONTROLS
you remove the full money box, replace it with
the empty one. The locked money boxes in The Vending Machine Control, NAVSUP
vending machines are provided with two sets of Form 236, is prepared monthly by the office
keys, one locks the box inside the machine, while recordskeeper, for each drink vending machine
the other opens the money box itself. The vending operated aboard ship and will be signed by the
machine operator will have the key that removes ship’s store officer. The quantity of drinks in the
the box from the machine, and the other key that custody of the vending machine operator is
opens the money box will be retained by the determined at the beginning and the end of each
person making collections. If the vending machine month. This is done by inventorying the number
you are maintaining is not equipped with a meter of drinks in the vending machine and any backup
to count sales, you should figure out how many stock that is in the custody of the vending machine
cans you sold when you replace the money boxes. operator. The final cash collection of the month
The total cans in the machine at the last collection is done at the same time inventory is taken on each
plus the cans put in the machine minus the total machine.
cans in the machine at the time of collection equal
the number of cans sold. After you get the meter Vending Machines in Separate
reading or figure out the number of cans sold, Responsibility Operations
you will deliver the locked money box to the ship’s
store officer or cash collection agent. Cash will When one or more machines are operated
be counted by the person making collections in under separate responsibility, the vending machine
the vending machine operator’s presence. The operator will maintain a daily record of vending
2-28
machine drinks. This daily record will be locally vending machine and the bulk storeroom. The
developed and placed on the inside door of each office recordskeeper will post the inventory to the
vending machine. The form should indicate the Stock Record, NAVSUP Form 464. Using the
date, type of drink, and quantities as shown in information on the NAVSUP Form 464, the
figure 2-13. You must make sure you maintain office recordskeeper will figure the amount of
this log sheet accurately because it is turned over cans sold as we discussed earlier. The quantity of
to the ship’s store officer at the time inventory each flavor sold will be transferred onto an
is done at the end of the month and used in Intra-Store Transfer Data, NAVSUP Form 973.
preparing the vending machine control. If this The data on the NAVSUP Form 973 will be used
log sheet is inaccurate, the efficiency of the to prepare the Vending Machine Control,
vending machine operation will be hard to NAVSUP Form 236.
determine.
On the other hand, if you have more than one
vending machine in combined responsibility, you
Vending Machines in Combined will maintain a daily record of vending machine
Responsibility Operations drinks as discussed earlier. This daily record for
each machine will be turned over to the ship’s
When your vending machine operation is a store officer at the end of the month and the
combined responsibility, the procedures used will quantity of each drink placed in the machine will
depend on whether you have one or more vending be transferred onto a NAVSUP Form 973. The
machines. data from the NAVSUP Form 973 will be used
When you have one vending machine, inven- to prepare the Vending Machine Control,
tory will be taken monthly of the drinks in the NAVSUP Form 236.
2-29
SERVICING THE VENDING Filling the Vending Machine
MACHINES
Filling the vending machine (fig. 2-14) is
much easier if the product is stored properly
The operation of the vending machines is before being dispensed. For instance, during the
sometimes referred to as automatic process of shipping and handling of soda cases,
merchandising. However, the only thing there may be the possibility of damage occurring
automatic about it is the customer drops a coin that goes unnoticed. If these damaged cases are
into the machine and receives the product in not removed, the cardboard, plastic wrap, and
return. Everything else is done by the vending cans in the cases below or adjacent to the
machine operator who services the vending damaged cases often remain wet for long periods
machine. of time.
2-30
To prevent this damage, leaking or wet cases must shipmates an injustice and not doing your job
be identified and removed from the pallet. We will according to the purpose of the ship’s store.
discuss damaged cases and storage of different Remember, when you stick to name brand
stock items later in chapter 3 of this TRAMAN. products you cannot go wrong.
Before you fill the machine, go to each The most important factor for you to
individual machine and count how many of each remember when filling the machines is the timely
flavor you will need to fill the machine. Do not scheduling of refilling the vending machines to
guess at how much merchandise you will need or make sure there is a continuous supply of products
you may find yourself carrying merchandise back and services. Not scheduling your refilling times
to the storage area. Make sure everything you properly will result in empty machines or columns
bring to the vending machine is clean and free of and unsatisfied customers. Remember, you may
damage. Open the machine and place the have to adjust your schedule for specific weather
merchandise in its correct slot or space in the conditions. You sell more sodas when it is hot
machine. Nothing is more disturbing to a than when it is cold. On paydays, machines have
customer than pushing for their favorite brand a tendency to empty more quickly. As you gain
and receiving something else. Not only will the experience in filling the machines, you will learn
customer get the wrong product but the vending to adjust to these specific conditions.
machine operator is not always readily available
to assist the customer. It is best to place a sign Vending Machine Displays
on the machine with your name, rate, and ship’s
telephone number where you can be located if any All product displays should be kept neat and
problems occur. When restocking canned soda clean and look appealing to the customer.
machines, do not forget to indicate on the daily Displays should be changed frequently to
record of vending machine drinks how many stimulate customer interest. Light bulbs for
sodas you have placed in the machine by flavor, displays should be changed as soon as they burn
if this is required. out. Broken or discolored glass should be replaced
After you have filled all slots in the machine, as soon as possible. Plastic product decals are
test the vending machine for proper operation. normally available from the company you
It is very disturbing to the customer when the purchase sodas from and should be used. Never
vending machine will not operate or will not use handwritten signs, if possible.
accept money. Cleaning the coin changer regularly
will help to prevent contact surfaces from VENDING MACHINE SANITATION
becoming sticky and jamming coins. Make sure
all machine lights are in proper working order The vending machines aboard ship should be
such as sold-out lights and correct change lights. inspected on a regular basis by a representative
If you do not replace these burned-out lights and of the medical department. Vending machines and
they are inoperative, the customer will put the the surrounding area should be kept clean.
money in thinking the product is in the machine Especially remember to remove all trash, empty
when it actually is not. They will probably then soda cases, boxes, and so forth, from around the
have to settle for a product they did not want. vending machine after refilling it. The immediate
If you leave the correct change light inoperative, area of the vending machine should be well lighted
the customers may put incorrect change in and provided with a covered trash receptacle. This
thinking they will get their change back and they trash receptacle should be emptied and cleaned
will not because there will be no change in the frequently.
machine. Also place a sign on the machine stating The vending machine itself should be mounted
the time it was last filled so the customer will know on a stand so it is about 6 inches off the deck.
how cold the sodas might be. It is best to fill the The reason for this is to make it easier for the
machines about an hour before work starts so the vending machine operator to clean under and
sodas in the machine are cold by the time the around the vending machine, especially when
workday starts. seepage occurs. The vending machine should be
When possible, you should always try to fill mounted in an area that protects it from overhead
the machine with brand name products. Do not leakage or condensation from water, waste, or
fill the machine with off-brand products that do sewer pipes.
not sell. You might not have to fill the vending The actual cleaning of the machine should be
machine as often; however, you are doing your frequent enough so that no surface of the vending
2-31
machine inside or out is sticky or dusty. The door making collections is the only one who knows the
and panel to the vending machine and any access combination to this lock. You should collect cash
opening for food should fit tightly and any worn from amusement machines as frequently as you do
gasket material should be replaced to prevent dust, the vending machines. As the amusement machine
dirt, or any other foreign particle from entering the operator, you will be provided with a Cash Receipt
machines. The vending machine operator should Book, NAVSUP Form 470, to record all cash
maintain a record of such cleanings in each collected. When you are operating more than one
machine and the record should be kept current for machine, you can record cash collected for each
30 days and made available during inspections. machine on separate pages of the NAVSUP Form
Sanitation of vending machines is covered in 470. Also a separate Cash Register Record,
NAVMED P-5010, supplement 1 to chapter 1. NAVSUP Form 469, is maintained by the person
making collections from the amusement machines.
AMUSEMENT MACHINES Like the NAVSUP Form 470, a separate page will
be maintained in the NAVSUP Form 469 for each
Amusement machines aboard ship are operated machine.
as part of the ship’s store (fig. 2-15). Because of the Meters are also installed in amusement
changing popularity in games, amusement machines to tell you the total cash receipts for each
machines are leased instead of purchased. The machine. Meter readings are taken each time cash
money boxes to amusement machines should be is collected and recorded on the NAVSUP Form
secured by using a restraining bar across the front 469. The difference between the present meter
of the coin box. A keyless combination padlock is reading and the previous meter reading should
used to lock the device in place. The person
2-32
equal cash collected. ROM users will enter the of syrup, the container, and a spoon, if needed.
cash collected from amusement machines in the Once prices are set they must be prominently
ROM amusement machine function daily, or as posted near the cash register in full view of the
soon as practical. If a shortage or an overage customer.
occurs of $5 or more, the ship’s store officer will
examine and initial it on the NAVSUP Form 469 CASH COLLECTIONS
and take the appropriate corrective action.
Amusement machines are a great source of Aboard ship, all sales in the snack bar are
additional profits for your ship’s store and a big collected and recorded separately from sales in the
morale booster. You cannot lose with the retail store and the vending machines. Cash
amusement machine program because the con- collections are made according to the procedures
tractor will replace the machine on request, service previously described.
the machine, furnish a supply of spare parts when
the ship is deployed and, in some cases, install COST CONTROL
the machine. Amusement machines are set to
The ship’s store officer must establish a system
charge 25 cents per play and, depending on the
of cost control that is positive and that meets the
amusement machine contractor, about 65 percent
requirements for internal control. Most ships have
of the 25 cents will go directly to ship’s store
operating goals in order to generate the percent
profits.
of profit desired, and in connection with the
operating goals they keep production records.
For promoting high morale among ship’s The operating goal is the established gross
personnel, a well-administered snack bar can be profit percent desired, and it must be established
a great asset. The objective of the snack bar is by the ship’s store officer based on the amount
to give the best possible service to the greatest of profit that is desired to be generated. Once
number of people. Many times, the services will established, the operating goal should not be
include only the sale of “gedunk” (candy bars, changed during the accounting period. The
potato chips, crackers, canned snacks, and so reciprocal of the desired profit will be used to
forth) and soft drinks, either canned or cup type. compute the selling prices for various
Many ships have ice cream sales and some have manufactured items. For example, the ship’s store
a popcorn machine. If you are assigned to a large officer desires a profit of 35 percent. The
snack bar, you must know how to make sundaes, reciprocal of 35 percent is 65 percent. You would
malted milks, milkshakes, and several other simply divide the cost of selling a manufactured
specialties. Obviously, you cannot serve these item in the snack bar by 65 percent to give you
delicacies unless you have the equipment, space, your selling price.
personnel, and time. ROM users will establish a
separate outlet in the ship’s store constants Production Records
function so breakouts, sales, and inventories of
To determine accurately the cost per portion
the snack bar are documented.
of those items manufactured on board such as ice
cream, a Production Record, NAVSUP Form
PRICES 241, must be maintained. The NAVSUP Form
241 is maintained by the person in charge of
One thing that all hands are particularly manufacturing the designated item and must be
interested in is the price of the items for sale at checked by the ship’s store officer at least
the snack bar. Snack bar prices are set to realize monthly. To ensure accuracy of the cost controls,
a profit, but not an enormous one. Prices for it is essential that a uniform output of
snack bar sales of ice cream will include the cost manufactured products be maintained from a
of a serving of ice cream, the ice-cream mix, the given quantity of ingredients. The output
flavor, the container, and the spoon. For popcorn generally should be maintained as prescribed in
sales, the popcorn seeds, oil, salt, and container the directions on the container of the mix. The
or box are included in the price. The price for NAVSUP Form 241 must be kept on file in the
beverages will include the cost of a serving, cost office when completed.
2-33
RETAIL SNACK BAR ITEMS To safeguard the health of personnel, the
medical department will inspect all food offered
Many snack bars sell such items as candy, for sale.
cookies, cigarettes, canned drinks, and so forth.
These items are sold at established retail prices Syrup containers should be cleaned inside
and when the cash register permits, sales of these out and no caking or drying should be allowed.
retail items should be made separately from
manufactured snack bar items. When this is not
Only paper or plastic containers can be
possible the value of retail items sold must be
used for dispensing drinks.
computed monthly or as required during the
accounting period using the formula in NAVSUP
P-487. ROM users must establish a separate outlet Disposable spoons should be used for ice
for snack bar retail items in the ship’s store cream and ice-cream sodas.
constants function. This is done so manufactured
and retail snack bar items are accounted for All utensils (including spoons, spatulas,
separately. dippers, scoops, and so forth) used for dispensing
ice cream and other frozen desserts will be kept
MULTIPLE OPERATORS either in running water or in water maintained at
180°F between each serving.
Normally snack bars are operated by one
person. When more than one person is responsible All equipment and utensils used to
for the snack bar operation, cash will be collected manufacture ice cream and frozen desserts will
at the end of each shift and inventory will be taken be cleaned thoroughly, rinsed with clean water,
monthly in addition to each accounting period. and disinfected just before use with a chlorine
Follow the procedures discussed earlier in this solution containing not less than 50 ppm of
chapter under multiple sales outlet operators. chlorine. The interior of the machine or interior
parts that come in contact with the mixes will not
SANITATION OF THE SNACK BAR be touched with the hands after reassembly and
disinfection until ready for disassembly and
Snack bars will be inspected twice monthly by cleaning again.
a representative of the medical department. The
snack bar operator must receive a physical
examination from the medical department before All foods will be kept under secure covers
assuming duties in the snack bar. This physical to prevent excessive handling and prevent contact
must be redone annually. The following sanitation with dust or insects.
regulations apply in the snack bar:
Refrigerators will be kept clean at all times.
Snack bar operators are considered No spilled ice cream or syrup should remain on
foodservice workers and the standards of health the bulkheads or deck of the boxes for more than
and personal hygiene apply. a few minutes.
2-34
CHAPTER 3
STOWAGE
Stowage is the assembly of material from them. Group III spaces must be secured according
various sources held and protected in the to procedures discussed in chapter 1.
warehouse or storeroom until needed. Materials The person in charge of the bulk storeroom(s)
stowed in various storerooms aboard ship must is referred to as the bulk storeroom custodian and .
be arranged to: is responsible to the ship’s store officer for all
material in his or her space(s). The bulk storeroom
make sure of maximum use of available custodian accepts responsibility for this material,
space, once he or she signs the receipt document and
accepts custody of the material. Materials stowed
provide orderly stowage and ready in the ship’s store bulk storeroom must be limited
accessibility, to ship’s store and standard Navy clothing stock.
Any other articles not in the custody of the bulk
prevent damage to the ship or injury to storeroom custodian must not be stowed in the
personnel, same storeroom. If an emergency exists, the
commanding officer may authorize, in writing,
prevent damage to materials, for articles to be stowed in the same storeroom
as ship’s store and standard Navy clothing stock.
make it easier to issue the oldest stock first Once the emergency passes, articles will be stowed
using the first in, first out (FIFO) method, in a separate space.
and
3-1
accomplish. Figure 3-1 shows a Ship’s Serviceman When there is more than one bulk storeroom, the
arranging stock in the bulk storeroom. ship’s store officer will normally number each
bulk storeroom 1, 2, 3, and so forth. However, on
RANGE OF RESPONSIBILITIES a large ship such as an aircraft carrier with 10 or
more storerooms it may create confusion to
Your range of responsibilities as the bulk number the storerooms in this order. The ship’s
storeroom custodian may differ from one ship to store officer may elect to number the bulk
the next. Your actual responsibilities will be the storerooms using the compartment and frame
same, but the size of the ship’s store operation number of the ship where they are located (for
and the number of storerooms will determine the example: bulk storeroom numbers 2-325-0-A,
difficulty of your tasks. 3-405-1-A, 01-544-1-A, and so forth).
You may be assigned to a ship that has On a large ship with several storerooms, the
only 1 bulk storeroom aboard, or a large aircraft ship’s store officer will normally split up the
carrier that has 10 or more bulk storerooms. storerooms between different custodians for
43.1
Figure 3-1.-Stock arrangement.
3-2
accountability purposes. It would be unfair and boxes brought to the storeroom are not opened
unrealistic to assign one person the responsibility and all boxes arrive. If boxes are being numbered
for so many storerooms, so the ship’s store officer by the receipt inspector, the custodian will make
usually assigns one custodian the responsibility sure all numbers are accounted for. Only person-
for about three storerooms. The number of store- nel authorized by the bulk storeroom custodian
rooms each custodian will be responsible for should be in the storeroom to assist in loading
depends on the manpower availability and the operations.
overall number of storerooms aboard ship. The custodian of the bulk storeroom accepts
the merchandise by circling the quantity received
MAINTAINING FINANCIAL on the receipt document and signing the
ACCOUNTABILITY accountability stamp as shown in figure 3-2. If
the quantity of the item counted is not the same
In the ship’s store operation, each custodian as what is shown on the receipt document, record
must maintain financial accountability for all and circle the actual quantity received and cross
stock within his or her area of responsibility. This out the quantity shown on the receipt document.
simply means that the custodian is responsible for All cross outs must be initialed. The custodian
maintaining the money value of all stock to accepting the merchandise and signing the
prevent a shortage or overage during inventory. accountability copy is legally responsible for the
Past inspections have shown that the single proper disposition of the material while it is in
most contributing factor to lack of financial his or her custody. The custodian will forward the
accountability for stock in the bulk storeroom is copy of the signed receipt document to the ship’s
a breakdown in internal checks and controls. store officer.
Although human perfection is virtually impossi- The custodian receiving stock into the bulk
ble, the custodian of the bulk storeroom must storeroom must make sure what is signed for is
always strive to come as close to perfection as exactly what is received. The custodian must never
possible. The internal checks and controls we are take for granted what stock is received and just
talking about are included throughout the Ships sign the stamped receipt document. The custodian
Store Afloat, NAVSUP P-487, and are designed must always make sure the quantity received is
to cut down or eliminate inventory shortages. In the same as shown on the receipt document. If
this section we discuss some of the major checks it isn’t, the custodian must change the quantity
and controls considered necessary in maintaining shown on the receipt document to the actual
financial accountability in the bulk storeroom, but amount received and circle it. It is acceptable for
it will be entirely up to each individual bulk the custodian to use the quantity indicated on the
storeroom custodian to always follow the correct outside of the container if the container has not
procedures outlined in the NAVSUP P-487 when been opened previously. If the container has been
performing daily tasks. opened before, do not take for granted all the
merchandise is in the container—always check it
Errors in Receiving carefully.
3-3
Figure 3-2.—The bulk storeroom custodian accepting receipts.
3-4
Items that are carried for ultimate expenditure will be circled on the original and entered and
as cost of operation materials and cost of sales circled on the triplicate copy. If a discrepancy is
items are called cost items. Cost of operation items noted between what the bulk storeroom custodian
include items used in the performance of service broke out and what the sales outlet or service
to customers; for instance, items used in the activity operator received, an inventory will be
laundry, barbershop, and repair parts used for the conducted immediately of the item in the bulk
vending machines and snack bars. The internal storeroom and the count compared against the
movement of cost of operation items is referred corresponding Stock Record, NAVSUP Form
to as an issue. 464. After reaching an agreement on the actual
Cost of sales items require further processing quantities broken out, the bulk storeroom
or manufacturing and include snack bar ingre- custodian and sales outlet operator will correct
dients, soft drink syrup, carbon dioxide gas and initial all copies of the NAVSUP Form 973.
( C O2), straws, spoons, and paper cups. The
internal movement of cost of sales items is referred Security Controls
to as a breakout, like retail items.
A breakback is just the opposite of a breakout. In chapter 1 we discussed the controls
The breakout is when merchandise is transferred necessary for maintaining security in supply
from the bulk storeroom to the sales outlet while department spaces. You learned that the bulk
a breakback is when merchandise is taken from storeroom is a Group III space and that it must
the sales outlet and returned to the bulk store- be secured properly to prevent pilferage or theft.
room. The internal movement of stock whether If your bulk storeroom does not conform to these
breakout, breakback, or issue is documented on security controls, then you risk losing financial
an Intra-Store Transfer Data, NAVSUP Form accountability for the space.
973. Figure 3-3 is a sample security evaluation sheet
Requests for breakouts are routed by the sales listing the major controls necessary in maintaining
outlet or service activity operators to the ship’s security in the bulk storeroom. When using this
store office for processing. After the office sheet, you can determine whether your bulk
prepares a NAVSUP Form 973, there are certain storeroom is or is not conforming to these controls
procedures the bulk storeroom custodian should by the YES or NO markings. If the security
follow. The ship’s store office will distribute the control listed on the evaluation sheet does not
original and duplicate copy of the NAVSUP Form apply to your storeroom, leave it blank. Any
973 to the bulk storeroom custodian to issue the controls to which you answer NO must be
stock. The triplicate copy is retained by the promptly investigated and corrected.
records keeper. The quadruplicate copy is given
to the sales outlet or service activity operator Spot Check Inventories
receiving the stock.
On receipt of the original and duplicate copy During the fiscal year, the ship’s store officer
of the NAVSUP Form 973, the bulk storeroom will conduct spot check inventories in the bulk
custodian will break out the stock. The bulk storeroom at unannounced times. The purpose of
storeroom custodian must record the quantities spot check inventories is to determine if there are
broken out on the two documents and sign and any differences between stock on hand in the bulk
forward the original to the office recordskeeper. storeroom and the quantity shown on the Stock
The duplicate copy is retained by the bulk Record, NAVSUP Form 464. At a minimum, the
storeroom custodian. ship’s store officer should inventory at least 5
The sales outlet or service activity operator will percent of the stock in the bulk storeroom
not have access to the original or the duplicate monthly. Normally, the spot check inventory
copy. Once the stock is received in the sales outlet should be taken after a breakout or issue. The
or the service activity, the operator will record the bulk storeroom custodian will indicate the balance
quantities received on the quadruplicate copy of on hand of each item on the Intra-Store Transfer
the NAVSUP Form 973. The operator acknowl- Data, NAVSUP Form 973, after making the
edges receipt of the stock by signing the breakout or issue. The ship’s store officer may
quadruplicate copy and forwards it directly to the also prepare a local spot check inventory sheet
recordskeeper. similar to the one shown in figure 3-4. The ship’s
After the recordskeeper receives the original store officer will issue this document to the bulk
and quadruplicate copy, the quantities received storeroom custodian with the item descriptions
3-5
BULK STOREROOM SECURITY EVALUATION SHEET
1. Are keyless padlocks (NSN 5340-00-285-6523) and a dead bolt door lock
used to secure the bulk storeroom?
YES NO
2. If dead bolt door locks are impractical to install, are high-security key-
type padlocks with shrouded shackles used instead?
YES NO
3. Are high-security hasps installed on the door to the bulk storeroom and
have any hinge pins that are exposed been tack welded to prevent removal?
YES NO
4. Is the combination to the bulk storeroom keyless padlock and the setting-in
key placed in a signed, sealed, and dated envelope and held in the ship’s
store officer’s safe?
YES NO
5. Are duplicate keys to the bulk storeroom kept in the ship’s store officer’s
safe in a sealed envelope?
YES NO
6. Has the combination to the bulk storeroom lock been changed within
the last 6 months and/or on relief of the ship’s store officer or responsible
custodian?
YES NO
8. Are emergency entry procedures posted near the entrance to the bulk
storeroom where they may be readily seen?
YES NO
10. When using car seals to secure the bulk storeroom, are the numbers to
the car seals logged in the car seal number log?
YES NO
11. Before removing any car seals, do you make sure the number on the car
seal you are removing is the same number recorded in the car seal number
log?
YES NO
12. When setting combinations on the keyless padlock, did you pick numbers
randomly and not use popular dates or other easy to guess numbers?
YES NO
3-6
13. Are you careful not to record your combination anywhere except on the
piece of paper placed in the sealed envelope?
YES NO
14. Did the ship’s store officer place transparent tape over the flaps of the
sealed envelope that you and he or she signed?
YES NO
15. Does the responsible custodian of the bulk storeroom refrain from
disclosing the combination to the keyless padlock on the bulk storeroom
to any other person?
YES NO
16. If articles other than ship’s store or standard Navy clothing stock are
stowed in the bulk storeroom, does the commanding officer authorize
such action?
YES NO
17. Are only authorized personnel allowed into the bulk storeroom?
YES NO
18. Are small high-value items stowed in a locked security room or cage within
the bulk storeroom when possible and, if not, are they kept out of sight?
YES NO
19. Are adjacent passageways to bulk storerooms kept well lighted and are
all lights operational?
YES NO
21. If the bulk storeroom has any accessible openings, are they secured by
using bars, grilles, or expanded metal?
YES NO
3-7
SPOT CHECK INVENTORY
DATE
BULK NAVSUP
ITEM STOCK STRM 464 DIFFERENCES
DESCRIPTION NUMBER COUNT COUNT (+) or (-) REMARKS
REMARKS
RECORDSKEEPER DATE
3-8
Inventories must be taken of all tax-free tobacco precautions to prevent damage and deterioration
products when arriving and departing beyond the to stock. To use space properly, you should
3-mile limit of the United States. Inventories will outline the planned use of the space. Stowage
be recorded on the Tax-Free Cigarette Inventory, plans should be flexible to provide for changing
NAVSUP Form 1234 (fig. 3-5). These inventories conditions and requirements. For instance, if your
must be certified and retained by the ship’s store ship is located in the shipyard for an extended
officer who will also add any receipts of tax-free overhaul, your requirements for stock will be
tobacco products each time they are received. greatly reduced and your plans for stowing stock
If a discrepancy exists between the arriving and will decrease. However, if your ship is planning
the departing inventories, the ship’s store officer an extended deployment overseas, you will require
is required to submit a written report to the many stock items and need to do some preplan-
commanding officer concerning the differences. ning before deployment. Preplanning for stowage
A copy of the report and inventories must be of stock for deployment will normally occur 4 to
furnished to the inspecting officers and the 6 months before the actual departure date. The
internal revenue service officers. NAVRESSO fleet assistance team located near
Sea stores must also be removed from the your ship is available to assist you in preparing
retail store or snack bar while the ship is in a stowage plans, but a request for assistance needs
United States port unless the stay is 15 days or to be submitted at least 120 days before
less and the time does not warrant physical deployment. If your ship is underway or located
movement of the stock. When sea stores are not in an area where technical assistance is not
removed from the store and the store is open for available, the individual ship will have to plan the
business, a daily inventory is required to make stowage of stock on its own. Factors that will help
sure no sales of tax-free products are being made. you in deciding where to stow stock will be the
Tax-free tobacco products may not remain in storeroom’s size, location, and characteristics.
vending machines under any conditions while the The characteristics include your stowage facilities
ship is in a United States port. such as bins, racks, deck gratings, and so forth.
At the discretion of the commanding officer, The purpose of these stowage facilities within the
an optional procedure may be used instead of storeroom is to help you in choosing locations to
inventorying tax-free tobacco products when the fit the requirements for the material you are stow-
ship is in a United States port for a period of 5 ing and to prevent the waste of stowage space.
days or less and is scheduled to proceed beyond
the 3-mile limit of the United States. When a ship FUNDAMENTALS OF GOOD
arrives within the 3-mile limit of the United States, STOWAGE
all tax-free tobacco products may be stowed in
a storeroom that must be secured by replacing the When we discuss the proper stowage of stock
locks and attaching numbered car seals. The it is a lot easier said than done. This is so true
numbered car seal must be attached to the lock when we refer to the stowage of ship’s store stock
in a manner that requires the seal to be broken because it is so difficult to properly stow so many
before entering the storeroom. A log of the different items. The fundamentals of good
numbered car seals must be maintained by the stowage are those techniques, procedures, and
ship’s store officer. When bringing tax-free precautions used to properly stow stock.
tobacco products aboard, the seal must be broken These fundamentals will not only help you in
and the quantities received must be stowed using your space to the fullest extent, but they will
immediately in the presence of the ship’s store help you in preventing damage or deterioration
officer. The seal must be replaced and the number to ship’s store stock. There are some specific items
of the new seal must be entered in the car seal of ship’s store stock that require special stowage
number log. Breakouts from storerooms when instructions in addition to these good funda-
using this procedure are not authorized while the mentals. The general requirements needed to
ship is within the 3-mile limit of the United States. obtain good stowage include the markings of
stock, accessibility of stock, arrangement of stock,
storeroom maintenance, issue and rotation of
STOWAGE OF SHIP’S STORE STOCK stock, proper ventilation and humidity control,
and storeroom security.
Stow ship’s store stock so the storeroom space The bulk storeroom custodian needs to know
is used to its capacity and at the same time take and follow the fundamentals listed previously
3-9
3-10
when stowing ship’s store stock. Some of these
fundamental; are required and some are effective
methods that have been used before in stowage
operations. Although they have proven to be
effective, knowledge and experience in using these
fundamentals afford the custodian of the bulk
storeroom the skills required to stow stock
properly.
SAFETY
3-11
Markings of Stock storeroom facilities you should never have this
problem.
The bulk storeroom custodian is largely
responsible for the condition of stock in his or Arrangement of Stock
her custody. The custodian must make sure stocks
are rotated (first in, first out) so that older stocks Bulk storerooms should be neat and orderly
do not become shelf-worn or deteriorated while and, when possible, container labels should be
newer stocks are broken out to the ship’s store facing out. Containers should be arranged by
activities. The bulk storeroom custodian can item, brand name, and date of receipt or date of
prevent this from happening by placing ROM- manufacture. This way the contents of the item
generated labels on each case and marking the can be determined without handling each item and
receipt date or manufacture date on each case it will facilitate breakouts, inventory, and proper
before it is stowed. The labels generated by the turnover of stock. Case lots should be stowed on
ROM system contain information about each deck gratings and not placed directly on the deck.
stock item. These labels, when used, should be A few things to keep in mind when you are
placed on a predetermined spot on each stock item arranging stock are discussed below:
by the responsible custodian.
The manufacture date is a coded date shown Item similarity—Items that are similar and
by some manufacturers on each case. These codes have similar handling requirements should be
are currently contained in NAVRESSOINST stowed together when practical. This will make
4067.4, issued by NAVRESSO. For items that your job of issuing and controlling these stock
may be highly perishable or deteriorate easily, you items easier.
should use the manufacture date and not the
receipt date. When you use the receipt date instead Item popularity—The popularity of an item
of the manufacture date you are not considering must also be considered when arranging stock.
the time the item has been in the supplier’s Fast-moving stock should be stowed in areas that
warehouse. If, for example, the shelf life of the are easily accessible. Slow-moving stock should
item is 5 months and the manufacture date is be stowed away from easily accessible areas.
November 89, the product may begin to spoil or
deteriorate around April 90. If you receive the Item size and weight—The size and weight of
item in February 90 and use the date of receipt, the item not only affect the amount of stowage
you are not considering the 3-month lapse between space needed, but also affect your decision on
manufacture and receipt. where you will stow it. For example, a large, heavy
NAVRESSOINST 4067.4 contains codes used item should be stowed in a location that will
by various manufacturers to indicate the date of provide a balance between accessibility and
manufacture for products such as candy, cookies, required handling. In other words, do not stow
crackers, tobacco products, canned drinks, and heavy laundry supplies in the forward portion of
film. A copy of this instruction should be the ship while the laundry is located aft.
maintained in the bulk storeroom for use by the
bulk storeroom custodian. Item quantity—The quantity of the items to
be stocked affects the amount of space required
and will affect the arrangements of other stock.
Accessibility of Stock If you have a large number of one stock item, it
is always better for you to increase the amount
Accessibility of stock is simply allowing of space needed to stock all the items in one space
yourself the capability to reach and remove any than splitting the items up into two or more
stock items out of the bulk storeroom with the different locations. Keeping the item in one
minimum of effort. Accessibility of stock is a very location will also help in accounting for the item
important fundamental of good stowage. When especially during inventory.
you receive new stock you must keep in mind that
some day you will issue or inventory items in the Breakable material—Fragile material should
storeroom. You do not want to stock 20 cases of never be stowed in the same location with heavy
an item on 1 case of a different item. More than material. It should be stowed in a separate
likely you will use that 1 case before you use the location to prevent excessive movement while the
20 cases. With proper arrangement and use of the ship is underway. Empty cardboard cartons may
3-12
be cut into strips and used to fill unused space bulk storeroom. Also inspect and clean bins,
where fragile material is located. Material received shelves, ventilation ducts, and fans periodically.
in glass containers must receive special attention After major receipts or breakouts, stock should
since breakage not only results in loss of the item be organized with the content labels visible.
but may cause damage to other stores or create The material condition of the space is also the
a hazard to personnel. responsibility of the responsible custodian. For
instance, rust is an ever-present enemy and
Aisles—When arranging stock, position an requires constant vigilance to keep it under
aisle about 30 inches wide in the storeroom so you control. Rust spots should be chipped, brushed
will have access to all stock. If an aisle is not or sanded, primed, and spot painted. Loose bolts
maintained, you will have to remove several items should be tightened promptly to prevent possible
to get to others during breakouts or issues and damage to the storeroom or its contents. Pipes,
inventory can turn into a nightmare. It is generally valves, electrical systems, watertight fittings, and
recognized that just before deployment and 1 fire-fighting equipment must be examined daily
month into deployment it may be hard to main- and any defect reported to the ship’s store officer.
tain an aisle in the storeroom due to the amounts The ship’s store officer should inspect all ship’s
of stock on board. Lack of stowage space is a very store activities under his or her control each
evident problem aboard ship and during pre- business day and submit required reports to the
deployment planning these problems need to be supply officer or duty supply officer before 8
resolved. The supply officer may be able to o’clock reports. The method and the time of these
negotiate with other department heads for reports are established in each ship’s routine.
additional stowage space. If additional space is Before getting underway into open seas,
not available, stowage plans will have to be made storerooms must be thoroughly inspected and
on the space available. secured to prevent stores from shifting due to the
ship’s motion. Bulk stores must be braced or
Item characteristics—Most items of ship’s lashed to bulkheads, stanchions, or battens, and
store stock are of such nature that special stowage the fronts of open bins and shelves secured to
is not required. However, there are some stock prevent stores from falling out on the deck. Once
items that require special considerations such as you check and prepare your storerooms for sea,
flammable stock, perishable stock, and so forth. notify your supervisor to have the storeroom
We discuss some of these stock items later in this checked. After all ship’s store spaces have been
chapter. prepared for sea and checked, the leading Ship’s
Serviceman reports to the ship’s store officer that
Storeroom Maintenance all ship’s store spaces are ready for sea. The ship’s
store officer passes this information to the supply
The responsible custodian of the bulk store- officer so readiness reports for getting underway
room is responsible for cleaning and maintaining may be given to the officer of the deck in the
the space, including keeping the storeroom free pilothouse.
of items that should be surveyed because they are
damaged or deteriorated. When such items are Issue and Rotation
present in the bulk storeroom, the responsible
custodian should notify his or her supervisor so Earlier you learned that the oldest stock on
action can be taken to mark them down or survey hand in the bulk storeroom should be issued first.
them. Generally speaking, it is first in and first out.
The neatness, cleanliness, and order of the However, when deployed overseas, you may
bulk storeroom are also responsibilities of the receive stock from naval supply depots or combat
custodian. These are carried out by proper logistics force (CLF) units that was manufactured
housekeeping and maintenance of the space. before the stock procured in the United States
Observation of good housekeeping practices in the when loading out. Manufacture age codes that we
bulk storeroom promotes safety, reduces losses discussed earlier are especially important in this
from damage of merchandise, reduces fire case because they indicate the date of
hazards, and increases the efficiency of the bulk manufacture. In the instance above, the new stock
storeroom operation. just received is actually older than the stock
Before you secure for the day, break down all already in the bulk storeroom and should be
loose boxes, sweep, and remove all trash from the issued first.
3-13
Ventilation and Humidity Control handling precautions. The Naval Ships’ Technical
Manual, chapter 670, and the Consolidated
All storerooms must be well ventilated to Hazardous Item List (CHIL), NAVSUP P-4500
prevent excessive heat and humidity because high (now known as the H a z a r d o u s M a t e r i a l s
temperature and humidity encourage bacteria Information System (HMIS) List, DOD 6050.5)
growth and insect infestation. In addition, high outline the requirements for stowage of
humidity can result in mold and mildew and may dangerous, semisafe, and safe materials and list
cause mustiness in cookies, crackers, and tobacco these materials under each classification.
products. Of course you have no control over
storeroom location, but you are responsible for
making sure space is left between cases and Dangerous Materials
structural obstructions such as steam pipes to
permit maximum ventilation. When possible, bulk Dangerous materials include all types of
storerooms will be ventilated once a week to compressed gases and materials that present a
permit air circulation and to remove stagnant air considerable fire hazard or other dangerous
that can cause damage to perishable items. characteristics. These materials must be stowed
in a cage within the paint and flammable liquid
STOREROOM SECURITY storerooms with access limited to the responsible
custodian. Paint and oil constitute the bulk of
Security of the bulk storeroom has been material in this category that is stocked. The paint
mentioned several times in this chapter but and flammable liquid storerooms are normally
security cannot be overemphasized. No matter provided with sprinklers and CO2 smothering
how well you fulfill other requirements for good systems that may be activated by automatic
stowage, without proper security your efforts will temperature sensitive devices inside the
be useless. Security is not only important from storerooms and by manual controls outside the
a standpoint of preventing unauthorized use, storerooms. A flooding system operated manually
pilferage, and theft of stock, it also prevents outside the storerooms is an additional safety
damage to stock and storeroom facilities and factor. When practical, these storerooms are
hazards to personnel and the ship due to improper located below the full load waterline, near either
stowage. end of the vessel, and not adjacent to a magazine.
They are equipped with watertight doors that must
be locked and dogged when not in use.
SPECIAL STOWAGE
Semisafe Materials
Most items of supply are of such a nature that
special stowage is not required. However, there
Semisafe materials include linseed oil, paints,
are some items that require special considerations. and metal polish. These materials are considered
For instance, some materials have characteristics
safe as long as the containers have not been
that require the materials to be specially stowed
opened and do not leak. Any leakage must be
or handled to prevent a hazard to personnel or cleaned up promptly and also the leaking or
facilities. Other materials require a high degree
opened container issued for use or otherwise
of protection because they have a limited stowage disposed of. All semisafe materials must be
life and care must be taken to make sure the oldest
stowed in the paint and flammable liquids
stock or that which may have an earlier manu-
storeroom.
facture date is issued first. Also many foods or
confections must be stowed in areas where the
temperature can be controlled to prevent Safe Materials
deterioration. When planning the stowage of
ship’s store items, you must recognize these Safe materials include deck wax, furniture
factors and take appropriate action. polish, and laundry blue. Safe materials are not
subject to spontaneous combustion and present
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS no particular hazard due to reactions that might
arise from broken containers. No special stowage,
Certain materials with inherent hazardous fire protection, or ventilation is needed for safe
properties require special stowage facilities and materials.
3-14
SPECIAL STOWAGE OF SHIP’S Once you receive flammable ship’s store
STORE STOCK stock, c h e c k i t f o r c o n d i t i o n , c o r r e c t
identification, and proper marking/labeling.
Certain items of ship’s store stock are highly
perishable in nature and, therefore, proper Do not concentrate flammable items in the
stowage techniques are important. You have store; stow remaining stocks in a flammable liquid
already learned that the oldest stock on hand must storeroom or other protected space.
be issued first, unless the newer stock was
manufactured before the stock already in the Identify flammable stock on the Stock
storeroom. Perishable items should be inspected Record, NAVSUP Form 464.
frequently for signs of damage, spoilage, insect
infestation, or rodent contamination. If hot pipes, Periodically inspect flammable stock in the
such as steam lines, are present in your stowage store and in the storeroom for leakage.
space, you should make sure they are insulated
properly to prevent heat transfer to stowed food Post NO SMOKING signs and make sure
items. A high stowage temperature is always bad good housekeeping practices are strictly followed
for perishable items. High temperatures increase in areas containing flammable stock.
the risk of bacterial growth, and insect infestation
is particularly dangerous when accompanied by Clothing
high humidity. When high humidity is present,
chemical action is accelerated; food acids Dunnage or deck gratings must be used to
naturally present within cans become activated keep clothing cases off the deck and away from
resulting in pinholing, blackening of contents, and bulkheads since moisture caused by sweating can
swelling of cans. In the following section, we be absorbed by the cases and result in stains and
discuss specific ways you can prevent damage and mildew on the clothing. Clothing should be
personnel hazards from happening when stowing stowed in a systematic manner; that is, arranged
specific items. Although laundry and dry-cleaning according to stock number and by sizes of articles.
chemicals require special considerations, they are When preparing for inventory you will save time
not discussed in this section because they are in getting the stock ready for counting. Remember
discussed in later chapters. to always put the new stock in back of the old
stock, so that you can follow the first in, first out
rule when issuing material.
Flammable Ship’s Store Stock Clothing stock, such as gold braids, buttons,
cap devices, insignia, and so forth, must be
Any ship’s store stock that has a closed cup wrapped individually in nontarnishing paper and
flash point of 200°F or less is classified as not held together by rubber bands. Rubber bands
flammable stock. These authorized items of ship’s and certain types of wrapping paper contain sulfur
store stock are listed in the NAVSUP P-487, par. that tarnishes gilt or gold articles, especially braid
6008. The flash point of a liquid can be defined and thread. Always be careful when handling
as the lowest temperature at which its vapor forms white articles because they stain so easily. Any
an ignitable mixture within the air. The flash point clothing items made with rubber should be kept
measures the risk of combustion when the liquid clear of heat. Frequently you must inspect your
escapes its packaging. Do not confuse the flash storeroom where clothing items are stowed for
point with the combustion temperature which is dampness and the presence of moths.
when the liquid will actually burn. As long as the
temperature remains below the flash point, there Food Products and Snack Bar Items
is no potential danger of a liquid burning.
The proper stowage of food products and
The following precautions are taken to snack bar items is essential if you are going to give
minimize the hazards of handling flammable the customer a fresh product. Food products
ship’s store stock: should be stowed at 70°F. Cookies or crackers
must be stowed in a well-ventilated space because
Carefully estimate needs to prevent they will rapidly deteriorate and become stale and
overstocking of flammable items. Limit retail musty when the humidity is greater than 75
store quantities to 3 days of anticipated sales. percent.
3-15
Light can cause deterioration to snack bar heat and humidity. Film stocks must be rotated
supplies bottled in glass containers. The cases and issued according to the expiration date printed
holding these glass containers should not be on the package by the manufacturer. Cut film and
opened until ready for use or sale. High sensitized photographic paper should be stowed
temperatures are also the chief cause of on edge to prevent them from sticking together.
accelerated spoilage in snack bar canned foods
and toppings and can speed up the pinholing
action caused by the acid in canned citrus fruit Tobacco
juices. All snack bar supplies except cups, dishes,
and spoons should be stowed in a cool, dry space. To keep tobacco products from becoming
stale and musty, they should be stowed in a dry,
Candy well-ventilated space. Cigarettes should be stowed
in a cool place at 70° to 75°F with a relative
Candy is included under the confections humidity of 60 percent. Cigars and tobacco
category aboard ship. Candy will keep reasonably require dry stowage of about 60°F.
well when it is stowed in a dry space and air freely
circulates around the cases. If the air circulation
is improper, hot spots may develop and cause the Canned Drinks
product to deteriorate. Never stack cases of candy
over 8 feet high because the pressure and weight Canned drinks can last for quite a while if they
will damage the product in the lowercase. Never are stowed properly. First, always cross stock
stow candy with other ship’s store stock such as sodas to keep the stack solid. Second, do not stack
dry goods protected with camphor, detergents, or canned drinks too high or bursting and crushing
other products, or the candy will spoil. can occur to the lower layers. Third, do not stack
Candies can also be spoiled by high canned drinks too close to steam or heated pipes.
temperature and humidity. Chocolates should be Fourth, stow canned drinks on pallets or deck
stowed and displayed at 60° to 65°F with a relative gratings secured with battens. This will not only
humidity of 50 percent. If chocolates are stowed provide good air circulation around the stacks,
above 70°F, the cocoa butter will melt and rise but will prevent the stacks from falling and
to the surface of the candy causing a condition becoming damaged while the ship is underway.
referred to as white bloom. Although it is still Canned drinks must also be properly rotated
edible, it looks bad and will hurt sales. so the customer purchases a fresh product. You
Nonchocolate candies are affected more by must frequently inspect canned drinks and remove
high humidity than temperature. High humidity any leaking or wet cans from the pallet to prevent
will change the taste of nonchocolates. With items secondary damage. Secondary damage occurs
such as marshmallows, nougat, and fudge it is just when you leave damaged or leaking cases in a
the opposite, if the humidity is less than 40 stack of canned drinks. If they are not removed,
percent, these types of items will dry out. Other these cases will cause the cardboard, plastic wrap,
nonchocolates such as jellies, caramels, and hard and cans below or adjacent to the damaged cases
candies will become sticky when the relative to become wet and sticky for long periods of time.
humidity is over 60 percent. This wetness is sometimes not seen from the
outside of the pallet and corrosion will take place.
Film The outside of good cans deteriorates and begins
to pinhole and leak. Secondary damage can
Film should be stowed in a cool, well-ven- destroy an entire pallet if the damage is not
tilated space since it deteriorates rapidly in high corrected promptly.
3-16
CHAPTER 4
BARBERSHOP SERVICE
4-1
barbershop for every barber to see and read. you are running short on one particular supply,
Barbershop instructions may vary slightly from let the supervisor know so it may be ordered.
one ship to another; however, they all provide Security of the barbershop is also important.
instructions governing barbershop personnel, The supervisor should be the last to leave the shop
equipment and spaces, and conduct of barbers. and should make sure it is secured properly at the
These instructions must be approved by the supply end of the workday. Since the barbershop is a
officer and the commanding officer. Group IV space, the keys should be handled as
outlined in chapter 1 of this manual.
Ship’s Instructions
Good Barber Ethics
Ship’s instructions set forth the hours the
barbershop will operate, including schedules for Good ethical conduct deals with the rules and
officers, CPOS, and crew. These instructions also standards for conduct and practice in the barber-
include the type of scheduling whether it is by shop. The way barbers treat their customers
appointment system or divisional schedule system. builds a good relationship between the barbershop
The hours of operation and appointment schedule and the ship. These good ethics include the
should be posted on the door entering the following:
barbershop.
Opening the barbershop on time
Medical Instructions
Giving courteous and friendly service
The medical officer prepares instructions,
using the Manual of Naval Preventive Medicine, Showing no favoritism between customers
covering the sanitation of the barbershop and
personal hygiene. The instructions should be Showing respect for feelings and rights of
signed by the senior medical officer aboard and others
posted in the barbershop for all barbers to see.
If a medical officer is not attached, the Fulfilling your duties to the best of your
instructions will be prepared and signed by the ability
senior corpsman (HM) aboard.
Setting examples of good conduct and
BARBERSHOP PERSONNEL behavior
4-2
cause a bad relationship between the barbershop hygiene, sterilizing barbering instruments, and for
and the ship. DO NOT do the following: helping with general shop sanitation—to say
nothing of rest periods and the noon meal.
Criticize other barbers in front of The two systems recommended for scheduling
customers appointments for the barbershop are the
appointment system and the division schedule.
Use profane language
APPOINTMENT SYSTEM
Become sarcastic with unpleasant cus-
tomers Appointment schedule sheets are marked off
for a definite number of haircuts for each barber
Accept tips during the day. Every barber keeps his or her own
sheet and posts it the day before the time the
Use poor barbering practices haircut is to be received or early in the morning
on the day customers apply. There is a space for
Be careless in sanitation practices
the signature of each customer opposite the
appointment time selected.
Smoke in the presence of customers
The appointment system works fairly well,
although on occasions customers fail to report for
Discuss personal problems with customers
appointments and throw your schedule off.
Lounge on arms of chairs or furniture Occasionally, an unclaimed period may be
claimed by another customer. If you experience
Play the radio too loud too much difficulty with broken appointments,
you can report their names to the responsible
Carry on a conversation with someone division officer.
while serving a customer The customers who make what they think are
proper appointments and find no barber to serve
Open the barbershop late them are understandably upset. Make sure the
procedures you follow are well known by the cus-
Have poor personal hygiene tomers and are followed explicitly by all barbers.
DIVISION SCHEDULE
SCHEDULING APPOINTMENTS
The division schedule allows a definite number
The purpose of scheduling appointments of hours during which personnel in a particular
aboard ship is to provide better service to the division may receive service in the ship’s barber-
customers. Shipboard personnel should receive a shop. The division petty officer controls the sched-
haircut once every 2 weeks; therefore, the schedule uling of appointments and sends a certain number
should be made with this factor in mind. Other to the barbershop at a time. This method of sched-
factors that need to be considered areas follows: uling prevents broken appointments, but it is gen-
erally not preferred over the appointment system.
Number of personnel aboard The barbershop supervisor should save all the
appointment sheets for at least 2 weeks just in case
Number and competency of each barber someone complains about not being able to get
a haircut because of full appointments. This
Daily workload of each barber protects the barber in the case of someone failing
an inspection and claiming he received a haircut
Space available for patrons to wait (usually in the shop when he did not.
no more than two should wait for each
barber)
BARBERSHOP SPACE
A barber can usually give a satisfactory haircut REQUIREMENTS
in 20 minutes. Therefore, if busy all the time
during a 7-hour work period, the barber can give The barbershop should be a pleasant space to
21 haircuts. The barber needs time for personal enter. The air within the barbershop should
4-3
neither be dry or stagnant nor have a stale musty Wear pants that are clean, without holes,
odor. Most barbershops are air-conditioned so and pressed.
you can easily control the atmosphere within the
shop. The temperature of the shop should be kept If you do not follow the previous traits, you
at about 70°F. Do not allow the temperature to should try to conform to them. Personal traits are
get too cold or too hot. sometimes hard to change, but after you get into
You should always check your lighting to be a routine, it will be easier.
sure there are no burned-out light bulbs and the Posture is another factor involving your per-
lighting is sufficient to prevent undue strain on sonal appearance. Most barbers do not realize the
your eyes. The bulkheads, deck, and all flat benefits of good posture. Good posture not only
surfaces need to be kept clean of all hair and dirt. makes you look better, it builds good health and
The barbershop should be equipped with a sink, allows the inner organs to function properly.
having hot and cold running water. The barber- Standing erect improves your speech by freeing
shop should never be used for lounging, eating, the power source of your voice, the diaphragm.
or sleeping. A ship having 101 to 300 personnel Standing for 8 hours at a time puts extra stress
should have one barber chair with one additional on your body. You will find yourself feeling better
chair for each 300 personnel. Barbershops with after a long day when you stand correctly. The
more than one chair should have the chairs spaced following rules should be followed when standing
4 1/2 to 5 feet apart to allow ample room for each in the barbershop:
barber. Ships with less than 100 personnel should
have portable barbershop utensils stored in a Carry your body weight on the balls of
locker. On ships carrying troops, if two or more your feet.
barber chairs are required for the troops, a
Keep your shoulders back.
separate troop barbershop should be provided.
Hold your stomach in, even if you are not
overweight; poor posture can give you a
potbelly.
PERSONAL HYGIENE
Hold your head high and straight.
Although personal hygiene is a subject most
people would choose to keep private, in the Good posture will eventually prevent aching
shipboard barbershop poor personal hygiene is in the neck, shoulders, lower back, and feet, and
something that cannot be tolerated. will make your entire day go easier.
As a barber you should take pride in the way
you look. Pay close attention to correct posture
and neatness and do the following: BARBERSHOP SANITATION
4-4
diseases, skin infections, and blood poisoning are BACTERIAL INFECTIONS
caused by transferring infectious material from
one person to another, or by using unsanitary There are basically two types of infections that
tools. Dirty hands or fingernails are also sources pathogenic bacteria can cause, local infections and
of contagion. general infections. A local infection is indicated
Bacteria, commonly known as germs, are one- by a boil or pimple containing pus. A general
cell microorganisms found nearly everywhere. infection results when bacteria enter the
Bacteria exist on the skin, water, air, decayed bloodstream.
matter, in the secretion of body openings, on the Control of bacterial infections can only be
clothing, and under the fingernails. The micro- done through the use of proper sanitation
organisms are normally not visible to the naked practices. Although all bacteria cannot be killed,
eye. they can be kept inactive or harmless through
proper sanitation.
Nonpathogenic Bacteria
4-5
NOTE: The use of ultraviolet light, form- and supplies, each barber should have the
aldehyde tablets, and materials capable of following equipment:
releasing formaldehyde into the air is not
authorized for use in ships’ barbershops. Clipper blades, three sets of three, each set
containing one size each of #000, #1, and
WET DISINFECTANT #1 1/2
4-6
Individual sanitary neck strips will be used or scalp disease or with sores or boils. This
for each customer. information will be reported to the medical
officer.
Covering cloths will be changed, preferably
daily or as often as necessary, to ensure cleanliness The barbers will wash their hands and
at all times. sterilize their instruments before serving each
customer.
Street clothing of operators will not be
stored with that of customers. Deodorants and mouthwash should be
made available and their use encouraged.
Barbers or beauty operators will not eat,
drink, or smoke while attending customers. Each barber’s unit will be equipped with
a sponge or paper towels to wipe out the
Clean, covered sanitary receptacles will be washbasin and backbar.
provided for waste materials and used linen.
Bottles and jars should be kept closed
The removal of cut hair from the decks when not in use.
should be done frequently by dustless methods.
All instruments must be cleaned
Vacuum-equipped clippers are acceptable. immediately after each use. Scissors, combs,
clipper blades, and other tools must be thoroughly
When compressed air is used to remove washed with soap and hot water to remove film
hair from customers, the pressure should be 15 and debris, then dried with disposable tissue and
psi or less. sterilized after each use.
Ships’ barbers are prohibited from shaving Clippers must be kept clean at all
customers. times. After each use, foreign matter must be
removed, clippers wiped with cotton saturated
The barber’s uniform will consist of a clean with sterilizing solution, and dried with a
barber’s jacket and clean trousers. The barber’s tissue.
appearance at all times will be neat and tidy.
Barbers having any infections or com-
The barber’s hands and fingernails will be municable diseases must not attend customers.
clean at all times.
Barbers will not smoke while attending
The barber is forbidden to cut hair of customers. The sanitation regulations should be
anyone who has any kind of disease or sore on posted in the barbershop where they can be easily
the scalp or the back of the neck within the read and adhered to. As stated earlier in this
hairlines. The barber will obtain the name, rate, chapter, the medical officer or senior Hospital
and division of any person coming into the Corpsman on board will prepare the sanitation
barbershop who is evidently afflicted with a skin regulations and post them in the barbershop.
4-7
CHAPTER 5
5-1
costing 1 cent per pound of laundry. Records are administered in the laundry. In a large laundry
should be kept if the amount of work received such as this, each section has its own personnel,
from sick bay monthly is in excess of $25. although individuals might be moved from one
Laundry services in excess of $25 are charged to section to another from time to time to accom-
the ship’s OPTAR. modate the workload or to provide training and
experience. In a small laundry, all these functions
are performed with fewer personnel and less
LAUNDRY PERSONNEL
working space. The result is likely to be a simpler
Personnel preassigned to the laundry from the organization chart, with each person performing
Ship’s Serviceman complement. The allowance of a variety of tasks.
rated personnel is based on the assumption that
LAUNDRY SUPERVISOR
an additional number of nonrated personnel will
be required in order to operate the laundry On a small ship, the Ship’s Serviceman in
efficiently. These additional personnel, unless charge of the laundry is responsible to the
detailed for a specified time (3 months or less), immediate superior for the complete operations.
are classified as strikers for the Ship’s Serviceman There may be no experienced laundry officer
rating. available to provide guidance. On a large ship,
The organization of a ship’s laundry varies the ship’s store officer may operate the laundry
with the size of a ship. A small ship, for example, under the supervision of the supply officer or the
may have a Ship’s Serviceman 2 in charge of the supply officer may have an assistant supply officer
laundry and two Ship’s Servicemen 3 assigned as in charge of the services branch who operates the
laundry personnel. These three persons receive, laundry under the supply officer’s direction. In
wash, and issue finished laundry. They do every- either instance, the supervisor of the laundry has
thing necessary in the laundry. A large ship, on a position comparable to that of a civilian
the other hand, has a much larger laundry manager of a Navy shore laundry. Responsibilities
operation. A new Navy carrier may have as many are many and varied according to the size of the
as 50 Ship’s Servicemen working in the laundry. laundry supervised.
A guide for determining the number of personnel The Ship’s Serviceman supervising the laundry
required to perform the laundry function is 1 orders supplies; sees that the laundry is kept clean
laundryman for every 75 to 100 crew members. and that the equipment is properly maintained; as-
Figure 5-1 illustrates the organization of a signs and trains laundry personnel; maintains the
shipboard laundry on a carrier. This chart gives flow of work through the laundry, maintains the
you a basic idea how duties and responsibilities standard of quality required on the ship; and does
5-2
whatever is necessary to make the operation Faulty or careless operation can easily
efficient. injure operating personnel.
5-3
should make sure all laundry is carefully logged severe headaches, nausea, and poor physical and
in. As you study figure 5-2, notice the columns mental performance. As the temperature of your
for the bulk log: (1) division or department, (2) body continues to increase due to exposure to high
number of bags received, (3) weight in whites or heat, you run the risk of having heat exhaustion
dungarees, and (4) another column for miscellane- or a heatstroke.
ous items. There are also signature columns for Listed below are some of the factors that
the receiving laundry man and divisional laundry reduce the chances of heat injuries from high
petty officer to check laundry in and out and a temperatures in the laundry.
column for any additional remarks.
Your press deck log consists of a record of Recording temperatures in the heat stress
individual officer and chief petty officer lots log each 4-hour period
received in the laundry. As you study figure 5-2,
notice the columns for the press deck log. Inspecting the laundry for conditions that
Under the column marked Other you normally would cause higher heat
list items other than shirts or trousers. If space
Reporting all temperatures 100° or over as
does not permit listing these items, you should
required
keep a separate press deck log as indicated in
figure 5-2. Following the do’s and don’ts list included
At the end of each week, the press deck and in this chapter
bulk work logs are summarized on a locally
prepared laundry summary sheet by the laundry The requirements of the Navy’s heat stress
supervisor. This summary sheet is routed to the program are included in OPNAVINST 5100.20,
supply officer for review and signature. A copy Shipboard Heat Stress Control and Personnel
of the summary sheet should be filed in the Protection. A hanging dry bulb thermometer
laundry for later reference. should be permanently mounted near the wash
and press deck. It should be mounted in such a
EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE LOG manner that the bulb of the thermometer is not
influenced by adjacent or local heat sources. You
The equipment maintenance log is shown in should record the temperature readings in the heat
figure 5-3. This log is maintained for the purpose stress log using these dry bulb thermometers once
of recording historical repair data. A separate log every 4 hours. When temperatures are 100°F or
sheet should be kept on each piece of laundry more, you should do the following:
equipment you have aboard your ship.
Log the temperature reading and circle it
HEAT STRESS LOG in the heat stress log.
The heat stress log shown in figure 5-4 is used Notify the ship’s store officer and medical
for the purpose of checking temperatures in the officer.
laundry. Temperature readings are taken once
every 4 hours and logged in. The number of Leave the laundry until a heat stress survey
readings you take depends on how many hours is done by the medical officer.
the laundry operates; however, readings will be
taken whenever the laundry is manned. If laundry You should remain out of the laundry until
work continues into the night, the log will include further directed on what to do by the medical
each additional 4-hour period. officer. If the temperature remains high, you will
only be able to work certain periods in the
laundry. These periods are better known as stay
HEAT STRESS times. These stay times are determined by the
medical officer and are always followed by a
Heat stress is a very dangerous element in the recovery period where the laundry personnel will
shipboard laundry. It is a combination of air go to a cool dry place to allow their body
temperature, thermal radiation, humidity, air- temperature to return to normal. The stay time
flow, and workload that may stress the body as is always half of the recovery time. The recovery
it tries to regulate body temperature. The period never exceeds 4 hours provided there is no
condition of heat stress can readily cause fatigue, evidence of cumulative fatigue.
5-4
Figure 5-3.—Laundry equipment maintenance log.
5-5
Do not wear starched clothing. laundry by unauthorized personnel can cause a
variety of problems including the following:
Do not drink commercially prepared liquid
electrolyte supplements instead of water. Possible laundry fires due to not following
safety precautions and lack of training
Past inspections conducted aboard various
ships have identified many of the principal Damage to equipment due to operating
problems that may cause a heat stress incorrectly
environment. Some of these problems were so
severe that personnel exposures had to be limited Injury to unauthorized users due to lack
to avoid harm. These heat stress conditions are of knowledge of safety devices on
caused by the following: equipment and safety precautions in the
laundry
Steam and water leaks
Loss of personal clothing or supplies due
Missing or deteriorated insulation on steam to theft
piping, valves, and machinery
A laundry fire can cause thousands of dollars
Ventilation system deficiencies, such as in damage. Damage to equipment can run into
missing or mutilated ductwork, misdirected loss of production capabilities and longer working
terminals, clogged exhaust screens, closed or hours for all laundry personnel. Injury to
partially closed Circle William dampers, dirty unauthorized users could range from burning a
ventilation ducting, and inoperative fan motors hand on a press to heat injuries due to heat stress.
and controllers
Even though the above conditions are Standard stock laundry chemicals are requisi-
identified and corrective action taken, there may tioned from supply activities ashore. These
still be instances where a heat stress situation may laundry supplies are used in conjunction with the
occur. Some examples include ship operations in Navy wash formula to launder clothing. Laundry
hot and humid climates, performance of hard personnel should be familiar with the proper
physical tasks, and so forth. While working in the handling and stowage of all laundry supplies
laundry, you should be aware of conditions that especially the supplies used in the wash cycle. See
may cause a heat stress condition and report all figure 5-5.
problems to the laundry supervisor so corrective The proper stowage and handling of supplies
action can be taken. is essential in order to prevent health and safety
hazards. Stowage space aboard ship is normally
limited, and some planning is required to make
LAUNDRY SECURITY sure space is used efficiently. Laundry chemicals
must be stowed in a bulk storeroom. Chemical
Security of the laundry is the responsibility of supplies in the laundry should be limited to those
all laundry personnel. You must take proper amounts needed for a 1-week period. Heavy
security measures to protect the laundry from loss laundry supplies should be stowed close to the
of personal clothing, damage to equipment, loss laundry and small items kept in bins to prevent
of supplies, and unauthorized use. loss. Items such as pins, laundry net bags, or other
The ship’s laundry is a group IV space, and pilferable items should be kept under lock and
the keys to the laundry should be handled as key. Rust remover or stain removal supplies
outlined in chapter 1 of this manual. The ship’s should be stored in a cool, dry space. Within the
laundry should not be used after working hours laundry, chemicals should be stowed in a metal
except when final approval is obtained from the bin using bin liners or plastic bags. The sequence
ship’s store officer. The laundry should never be of stowage in this metal bin should be two-shot
used by unauthorized personnel. Use of the detergent, laundry sour, and starch.
5-6
TWO—SHOT DETERGENT NSN NOT AVAILABLE 40 lb
SOUR 7930-00-205-2882 50 lb
STARCH 7930-00-841-6362 25 lb
5-7
supervisor. As a Ship’s Serviceman third class, representative regarding delivery and pickup of
you should be familiar with factors that determine laundry or to resolve problems. Meetings are
not only the laundry schedule but how many normally held periodically by the laundry
hours the laundry will be operating. These factors supervisor to inform divisional laundry petty
include the following: officers of any changes that may occur in laundry
policy.
Amount of work that must be processed
weekly RECEIVING BULK LOTS
Capacity of laundry equipment When receiving bulk lots, the receiving laundry
personnel should consider the many problems that
Number and competence of laundry crew may be encountered when identifying, classifying,
and marking these bulk lots. Bulk lots are
These factors listed may be overwhelming at delivered to the laundry in large divisional laundry
times. To eliminate problems and establish normal bags. You should be careful not to accept laundry
working hours for personnel, a laundry is bags that are overstuffed. Overstuffed laundry
generally operated in shifts. bags cause handling problems during the laundry
A laundry shift normally lasts 8 hours. Your process. For the purpose of safety and production
laundry may operate one, two, or three shifts per standards, divisional laundry bags should not be
day. Each shift must have experienced Ship’s accepted over your washer extractor capacity. If
Servicemen to handle each shift so work turned you do accept bags over your capacity, they will
out is satisfactory. A shortage of experienced have to be split upon the wash deck causing delays
personnel will require strikers to assist SH and possible claims for loss of clothing. Check
personnel. Strikers should not be allowed to bulk lots and make sure the division name is
operate equipment until they are qualified in using stenciled in large letters on all divisional laundry
that equipment. bags received. You should also check bags to
make sure blues and whites are not mixed in one
bag. If a divisional laundry bag makes it past the
PROCESSING LAUNDRY receiving section mixed with blues and whites, it
will delay the laundry process on the wash deck
The first step to processing laundry is receiving as the divisional laundry in the bag will have to
the different lots into the laundry, marking them, be separated. Divisional bulk laundry bags should
and classifying them. Articles to be laundered are not be accepted until all discrepancies noted above
delivered to the ship’s laundry either in bulk lots have been corrected. If policies concerning your
or in individual bundles. Bulk lots include division laundry process are given to divisional laundry
laundry (crews’ personal clothing and linen), petty officers during the monthly meeting,
flatwork (towels, linen, and tablecloths from problems will be eliminated.
staterooms, officer and CPO messes, and sick
bay), and service lots (clothing of cooks and RECEIVING INDIVIDUAL LOTS
foodservice attendants, barbers, hospital per-
sonnel, and snack bar personnel). Bundles received daily in the laundry from
The workflow for individual and bulk lots is officers and chief petty officers are considered as
shown in figure 5-6. The solid black line running one lot of individually marked bundles. If you
from the Bulk Lots block, top left, to the Issuing have more bundles in the daily lots than available
block at the bottom shows the steps in processing assembly bins, it is best to set up two lots daily.
bulk laundry. The broken line on the right side You can then assemble and check out the bundles
of the chart connects all types of work in the first lot before work from the second lot
accomplished on individual lots. comes to the assembly bins. Twenty bundles in
The receiving laundry personnel are re- a lot are easy to handle. Never put more than 50
sponsible for receiving, marking, and classifying bundles in one lot.
all lots delivered to the laundry. The number of bundles you should put in a
To perform these duties, the receiver should lot is affected by the classification of the items
have a list of divisional laundry petty officers. The in the bundles. Classification is the separation of
laundry supervisor provides the receiver with this a bundle of laundry according to color, type of
list in case there is a need to contact a division fabric, and degree of soil; that is, white cottons,
5-8
Figure 5-6.—Workflow for a laundry operation.
other white or light-colored fabrics, light cottons person is responsible for stenciling his or her own
with heavy stains, dark-colored cottons, and so clothing. The laundry petty officer in each division
forth. Items are classified according to the should accept only properly stenciled clothing.
washing formulas to be used. Both black and white stencil pens usually are
available in the retail store.
5-9
stenciled before they are sent to the laundry, this
type of control will generally be unnecessary.
Once bulk work is accepted it is the responsi-
bility of the laundry to make sure it is properly
identified from start to finish. You do not have
to identify individual items in bulk lots brought
to the laundry, but you do need to put some type
of marker with each lot so that you can identify
it during any phase of processing. You can make
your own markers, or flags, from a duck fabric.
Cut squares about 8 to 12 inches and hem them.
Then stencil one marker for each division, service
group, or any activity that brings bulk work to
you. When bulk lots are brought to the laundry,
put the proper identification markers on them.
You can use the same markers week after week.
In addition to these markers, the division/
department name should be stenciled on the side
of the bag in case the marker gets lost during the
process.
In the event you are required to split a lot, put
the right markers on every part of it. All markers
remain with lots and portions of lots during the
complete washing and processing cycle. Put the
marker in the washer with the load, and identify
the load on the shell of the washer with chalk.
If it is necessary that you put more than one lot
in the washer to get full capacity, use a proper
size laundry net for the smallest lot. When more
than one net is required for the same lot, use a
marker for each net.
All soiled divisional bulk bags delivered to the
laundry should be kept separate from clean
laundry. In smaller laundries where space is
limited, an effort should be made to have all clean
laundry picked up after it is completed.
5-10
for washing. Nylon nets have generally replaced is in disagreement with that of the customer, he
cotton nets. They resist chemicals better than or she should enter the correct count on the
cotton and thus last longer. They also increase the laundry list, circle the customer’s count, then
payload. initial the circle and notify the customer of the
You can do effective washing with laundry change through whoever brought in the laundry
nets, provided you do not overload them. You bundle.
must give the water and soap a chance to get to 5. Check each article for a correct legible
the clothes in order to remove soil. mark. If there is not a mark, put ONE ONLY in
Nets are especially useful for separating small the proper place (explained later). Do NOT mark
items such as handkerchiefs or socks from the such items as bath towels, wet articles, or dark-
larger articles. There are two general types of colored fabrics. Use pronged marking tags on
nylon nets— woven and knitted. Woven nets do these items. These tags are narrow strips of cloth
not stretch and thus retain their size; knitted nets approximately 1 inch long with metal fasteners
have a tendency to stretch and increase in size. in the ends. Push the metal fasteners through the
For this reason, the range of knitted nets in material and press them flat on the other side.
capacities is given below: Enter the correct identification on the tags.
6. Check the inside of all pockets for any
Size in Inches Capacity in Pounds articles such as pens, pencils, lighters, combs, and
so forth. If any items are found in the pockets,
9 by 15 or 10 by 15 2 to 4 a notation should be made on the NAVSUP Form
233, Ship’s Store Laundry List, and also in the
24 by 36 8 to 12 laundry logbook so these items can be returned
to the owner.
Steps in Identifying Individual Lots 7. Check all articles of clothing for any tears,
stains, missing buttons, and so forth. Any items
The procedure for identifying items in found to be damaged should be noted on the
individual bundles described in detail herein has reverse side of the laundry list and also in the
been used successfully in shipboard operation. Remarks column of the laundry logbook.
You may be able to modify this procedure to fit 8. Clear the laundry marking machine by
your own needs. The steps in the procedure are setting all type to the neutral position when you
as follows: finish with one bundle. You are ready to start on
another bundle.
1. Work on ONLY ONE individual bundle
at a time; this prevents mixing of items from
several bundles. Location of the Laundry Mark
2. Remove the laundry list from the bundle
and determine from the individual’s name and There is a standard spot for the laundry mark
social security number what the laundry mark will on each article. If the mark is correctly placed in
be. This mark is made from the first letter of the this location, the receiving clerk can check items
individual’s last name and the last four numbers in easily and quickly. The clerk can also check
of the individual’s social security number. For and assemble finished articles without unfolding
example, the laundry mark for SHCM Frederick them. The locations of laundry marks are as
M. Wishnacht, 123-45-6789, would be W-6789. follows:
This is the standard type of laundry mark used
throughout the Navy. Underwear—On the inside of the waist-
3. Set the individual’s laundry mark on the band, left of center of the label.
marking machine and stamp it across the face of
the laundry list. Check the mark for accuracy. Handkerchiefs—Do NOT mark. Put them
This list now denotes ownership of laundry in the in a net and identify with a marked strip tag placed
bundle. on the inside or pinned on the outside. Some
4. Count every article in the laundry bundle handkerchiefs are made of fine linen and are
and enter the number in the correct block on the expensive. A mark would be ugly if used on such
laundry list. If your count does not agree with that articles and exposed to view.
of the customer, ask the senior laundry man to
recheck it. When the senior laundry man’s count Shirts—On the front inside shirttail.
5-11
• Tropical shorts—On the inside waistband of marking laundry is the same on most types of
shorts, right side, in line with the outside leg marking machines:
seam.
1. Put the item to be marked underneath the
• Socks—Socks are NOT marked; instead, tension plate and over the platen. The tension
marks should be put on a piece of sheeting and plate holds the item in place so the laundry mark
then placed inside a standard 10-inch by 15-inch can be placed exactly where you want it.
laundry net used for washing socks. The socks 2. Raise the printing lever forward with both
should be untied and loose in the net. A separate hands to bring the item to be marked into contact
net should be used for each individual. with the type. Use a steady push on the lever for
best results.
• Undershirts—On the inside, 1 inch to the left 3. Check the mark for clarity. If it is not clear,
of the label. repeat the process.
5-12
manufacturer’s instruction manual is furnished fabrics can be safely laundered in the ship’s
for each laundry marking machine. The mechanic laundry without causing damage provided they
who works on the machine should also have a are resistant to the laundry chemicals used.
copy of this instruction book. Do not try to do Therefore, it is a good laundry practice to first
any mechanical work on the machine unless it is determine what type of fabric you are washing
absolutely necessary. Always request that the and take every precaution to prevent damage. It
work be done by a trained person from the is essential that all laundry personnel know the
engineering department. different kinds of fabrics.
To minimize the effects of chemicals on
Ships Without Laundry Marking fabrics, classify all clothing according to color,
Machines fiber content, and degree of soiling. Wash lightly
soiled articles separately from heavily soiled items
All ships are required to have a laundry to minimize redeposition of soil on fabrics,
marking machine on board. Ships’ laundries causing them to look gray/dull. Wash colored
temporarily without laundry marking machines fabrics separately from whites to avoid color
will have to use laundry marking pens while a transference.
machine is being procured or the old one repaired. For maximum washing efficiency, do not
The laundry supervisor should obtain white and exceed load limits of equipment. In the case of
black laundry markers from the bulk storeroom synthetics/blends, washer loads should not exceed
and charge them to cost of operations laundry. three-fourths of the rated capacity to provide for
These pens will serve the same purpose as the maximum mechanical action, cleaning efficiency,
laundry marking machine; however, they will and to avoid wrinkling.
probably slow the work process while marking Never use hot flushes with supplies before the
clothing. For individual lots, the laundry mark first bath. In the case of synthetics or synthetic
has to be handwritten on the Ship’s Store Laundry blends, a hot flush with no supplies will soften
List, NAVSUP Form 233. Care should be taken the fabric and allow soil to penetrate more deeply.
while marking clothing with marking pens to Synthetics or synthetic blends do not absorb
make sure the mark does not go completely water, making rinsing easier. The final extract
through the fabric. It is best to stencil on a should be consistent with the Navy wash formula.
semifirm surface such as cardboard, making sure Laundry chemicals should come in contact with
you do not press too firmly. Be sure the ink from fabrics ONLY AFTER appropriate water levels
the stencil is completely dry before placing the are achieved. The two-shot detergent mentioned
clothing with the remainder of the lot. earlier is used in washing all shipboard clothing
and textile items, including synthetics and
synthetic blends, and no other washing chemical
WASHING should be used in place of them.
The primary goal of the washing process is to
remove all soil from the fabrics being washed.
TYPES OF SOIL
This is done through a series of baths in which
the soil is loosened from the fabric, suspended in
In general there are four types of soils. Some
the water, and rinsed away. There are five baths
can be removed during the washing process and
in the washing cycle—the breaksuds, the flush
some cannot. It is important that you know them
suds, two rinse baths, and the sour bath. During
so you can decide whether they require special
the first two baths, the two-shot detergent
treatment.
(detergent/oxygen bleach) removes and loosens
the soil so it may be rinsed away.
CHEMICAL SOLUBLE SOILS
Sour is used in the last rinse cycle to neutralize
alkalinity and to decompose any remaining traces
Chemical soluble soils are soluble or readily
still in clothing.
dissolvable in chemical solvents. Soils of this type
include oils, greases, certain waxes, fatty acids
(which are mainly body oils), and vegetable,
FABRICS
mineral, and animal oils. These soils usually are
The laundry personnel should be familiar with not soluble in water and may require special
the different kinds of fabrics. In general most treatment.
5-13
WATER SOLUBLE SOILS and the water collects calcium and magnesium
salts. The salts are in the form of bicarbonates,
Water soluble soils are such substances as chlorides, nitrates, and sulfates. The kind and
sugar, starch, gums, salt, flavoring agents, and quantity of these substances are determined by the
syrups, as well as a wide variety of substances soil the water passes through. Water that contains
generally found in such foods and beverages as an appreciable quantity of salts is HARD water.
mustard, catsup, soups, and soft drinks. Per- SOFT water is water that has not picked up salts
spiration stains are also included in this category. from the earth, or water that has had these
These types of soils are removed during the substances removed or neutralized. Since seawater
normal laundering process. contains the concentration of salts, it is the hardest
of all wash waters.
INSOLUBLE SOILS
TYPES OF HARD WATER
Insoluble soils, substances that are not soluble
or dissolvable in either water or chemical solvents, In laundry terminology, hardness in water is
are the materials most commonly found in fabrics the power to kill soap. When soap is added to
and constitute the bulk of the soils removed in hard water, the calcium and magnesium salts in
the laundry. Included are earth, concrete dust, the water combine with the soap to form insoluble
sand, carbon, ashes, lint, hair, cosmetics, and lime soaps. These soaps then unite (precipitate)
dandruff. These types of soils are usually less in the form of a sticky, insoluble deposit. This
visible than oils, greases, or food stains, but they reaction kills the soap and makes it useless for
contribute greatly to fabric damage due to fiber washing, and the sticky deposit traps dirt and puts
abrasion. it back on the fabric in the form of scum. If no
Most insoluble soils are readily dispersed dirt is present, the scum is white and is seen as
during the wash cycle, but their complete removal a film on the clothes.
may prove more difficult. Such soils are some- There are two types of water hardness:
times redeposited on the garments during the
laundry process, a condition that can cause 1. Temporary hardness—Water that contains
“graying” of the fabric. calcium and magnesium bicarbonates is called
temporary hard because these elements can be
SPECIAL SOILS removed by boiling. Scale on the inside of steam
kettles and steam boilers is due to the precipitation
Special soils are insoluble in either water or of insoluble carbonates as the hard water is boiled.
laundry chemicals. They may be removed partially 2. Permanent hardness—Water that contains
or entirely using spotting operations. These soils calcium and magnesium chlorides that are NOT
include nail polish, paint, ink, various kinds of affected by boiling is said to be permanently hard.
adhesives, and so forth. Spotting operations are Permanent hardness requires special treatment
discussed in the dry-cleaning chapter. with chemicals or by distillation.
5-14
LAUNDRY DETERGENT to help shipboard personnel produce whiter and
brighter washes. The formulas are illustrated in
The detergent/oxygen bleach is intended for
figures 5-10 through 5-12. These formulas have
shipboard laundering of cotton, synthetic, and
been tested in laundries aboard ship and have been
blended items using fresh water or seawater. It
found satisfactory for the type of work indicated.
is referred to as the two-shot detergent because
These formulas were developed to conserve energy
it includes a detergent and oxygen-based bleach
and to meet environmental regulations while
and is mixed and ready to use. Since it is premixed
providing quality laundry. These formulas should
you won’t have to proportion laundry chemicals
be posted on the wash deck for laundry personnel
as in the past. As long as you add the correct
to read and follow.
amounts to the washer, the chemical proportion
will be correct. Figure 5-9 shows the wash sizes
and the amounts of two-shot detergent that should RINSING
be used with fresh water and seawater.
Rinsing removes soil and cleaning solutions
The two-shot detergent uses an oxygen-based
from the clothes. Poor rinsing results in grayness,
bleach that is safe in washing all fabrics, therefore,
disagreeable odors, harsh finish, and generally
the problem in damaging colored clothes with
poor quality work.
bleach is eliminated. The bleach is an integral part
The number of rinses used should always be
of the detergent and will not require special
according to the Navy wash formula you are using
handling as it is not reactive to the other
and should not be modified. Under normal
ingredients in the formulation. The detergent/
conditions, following the Navy wash formula in
oxygen bleach releases a sharp, unpleasant
regards to the number of rinses, the rinse water
solvent-type odor into the air while being used.
levels, water temperature, and time of running will
You should not be alarmed by this smell because
bring desirable results. If clothes that are heavily
the smell will not be transferred to the clothing.
soiled do not come out clean in the first wash they
should be washed again according to the Navy
wash formula.
WASHING FORMULAS
LAUNDRY SOUR
The Navy recently changed all Navy wash
formulas to include the two-shot detergent. The Laundry sour is added to the last rinse to
new wash formulas were developed by the Navy neutralize the remaining alkalies and to dissolve
Dosage
16 2.6 3.2
20 3.2 4.0
35 5.6 7.0
60 9.6 12.0
5-15
Figure 5-10.—Navy wash formula I.
5-16
Figure 5-11.-Navy wash formula II.
5-17
Figure 5-12.—Navy wash formula III.
5-18
iron and other metallic salts that cause rust or a Command (NAVSEA) publishes the N a v y
yellow discoloration. If left in fabrics these Laundry and Dry-Cleaning Equipment Catalog
chemicals cause odors and discoloration after (Tech Manual #S6152-B1-CAT-010). This catalog
drying. is used by the Navy to obtain information for
Another reason for using a sour in the last identification, selection, and procurement of
rinse is that it removes sodium bicarbonate, which standard naval shipboard laundry and dry-
is normally in the rinse water. Even though cleaning equipment. The washer extractors used
other chemicals may have rinsed out, sodium by the Navy are listed in figure 5-13. This catalog
bicarbonate remains. It is not injurious to fabrics includes several different types and sizes of washer
in itself, but when subjected to the heat of extractors, however, the Edro (Dyna Wash) and
flatwork ironers, presses, or hand ironers, it is the Pellerin Milnor washers are the ones most
converted to sodium carbonate which is quite widely used by the Navy.
alkaline and in sufficient concentration can cause Washer extractors are basically made up into
injury to fabrics. two parts, the outer shell and the cylinder. The
Souring also decomposes any oxidizing bleach shell holds the water and cleaning ingredients,
left in a load, prevents discoloration, and helps while the cylinder hold the clothes.
to sterilize the clothes. In addition, sour sets acid The cylinder is perforated to allow water and
dyes often used in bright-colored fabrics and suds in the bottom of the shell to enter and clean
preserves the tensile strength of fibers. Laundry the clothes during the wash cycle. The washer
sour also removes rust stains. extractor then extracts the water from the cylinder
There are many different laundry sours of by using centrifugal force. A separate extract
varying strengths, including acetic acid, fluorosilic motor spins the cylinder at a high speed to do this.
acid, hydrofluoric acid, and several types of
fluoride (ammonium, sodium acid, and sodium
silico). Fluoride is generally used. The sour OPERATION OF THE WASHER
required for use is combined in the powdered form EXTRACTOR (EDRO MODEL)
with powdered blue (NSN 7930-00-205-2882).
The washer extractor manufactured by the
STARCH Edro Corporation, better known as the Dyna
Wash, is procured in three sizes—200-, 100-,
Starch is applied to wearing apparel and other
or 60-pound sizes. The 100-pound Dyna Wash
linens to give them body, smoothness, and an
(including basic parts) is illustrated in figure 5-14.
improved appearance. Only cotton fabrics should
This washer extractor was designed to provide an
be starched in the ship’s laundry. DO NOT starch
easy and safe method of washing clothes,
synthetic and synthetic blend fabrics or work
therefore, training personnel to operate the
clothes. The amount of starch used should be the
machine is easy. Since the washer extractor is
amount indicated on the formula.
automatic, the only thing the operator will have
Starching should only be done in the
to do is load, add supplies, and unload.
automatic mode; however, when you have to do
it manually, follow these steps:
WASHER EXTRACTOR CONTROLS
1. Do not drain the sour/blue bath. Reduce
The Dyna Wash control system consists of two
water to a low level with the water at temperature
parts, the control panel and the programmer. The
indicated on the formula. Add the proper amount
control panel is illustrated in figure 5-15. This
of starch.
panel may look slightly different on some models;
2. Run the machine for 4 minutes, long
however, the purpose of the basic controls on this
enough to allow the starch to penetrate the shirts.
panel is the same.
3. Drain the starch from the machine while
The control switch energizes all electricity to
it is running to prevent the starch from settling
the control panel and programmer. This control
on the load.
switch must be energized before you can use any
of the basic controls. The basic controls on
the control panel are used when loading and
WASHER EXTRACTORS
unloading the washer. By depressing the jog
Washer extractors installed aboard ship differ switch simultaneously with the reverse or forward
mainly in load capacity. The Naval Sea Systems switch, the washer cylinder will rotate in that
5-19
Figure 5-13.—List of washer extractors used.
5-20
43.33
Figure 5-14.-100 pound washer extractor basic parts.
5-21
direction until the cylinder door is lined up with the programmer is opened, the microswitch pops
the outer shell door. out and de-energizes the circuit to prevent
The programmer is illustrated in figure 5-16 electrical shock. The drum control disk is used
and lists all major controls and indicators. The to manually turn the program wheel around.
drain indicator and switch open or close the drain
and indicate when it is in use. Depress the cold As you can see there are several controls,
or hot water indicators and switches to add cold however, if you run the machine automatically
or hot water. A light on the panel indicates when the way it was intended, you will never have to
the programmer is in use. The master and timer use most of them.
indicator lights are used in conjunction with the
operation of the timer. Once these two switches
are energized, the timer wheel begins to move. The DESCRIPTION OF THE
wash indicator light is also used in conjunction PROGRAMMER
with the master switch for operating the machine
in the manual mode. The steam indicator and The operation of the programmer is controlled
switch are used to emit steam to the machine in by energizing the control switch on the control
the manual mode or indicate steam is being added panel and then energizing the master and timer
by the light being lit during the automatic mode. switch on the programmer. (See fig. 5-16.)
The signal indicator light and switch light up and
sound a bell when the automatic cycle is complete A program chart is cut to conform with Navy
to alert laundry personnel. The extract indicator wash formulas and is installed on the control disk
light and switch are used to energize the extract wheel inside the programmer. Also inside the
motor during the manual mode and light up when programmer are fingers that drop into grooves
extract is being used during the automatic mode. that were cut in the program chart. Once these
A microswitch is installed inside the pro- fingers come in contact with the metal on the disk,
grammer to protect the user. Once the door to they energize that particular operation. The disk
5-22
continues to rotate until the timer switch is off PROGRAM CHART
or when one of the following occur:
In conjunction with the wash formula, a
program chart is cut according to the Navy wash
The disk stops until proper water levels are
formula. These charts, available through the
reached.
supply system, are used with the automatic
programmer on the washer extractor to make sure
The disk stops until correct water the Navy wash formula is followed to the letter.
temperatures are acquired during steam Your local fleet assistance team is available to
injection. provide assistance in cutting the chart. A sample
program chart is illustrated in figure 5-17. Keep
The disk stops while adding supplies from in mind this is a sample chart only and should not
the automatic dispenser. be referenced in cutting your own chart.
The disk stops when the signal goes on. Temperature Control
After the completion of the cycle and when the This control on the program chart regulates
signal alarm goes off, the timer switch should be the temperature of the water. The desired
de-energized to prevent the chart from advancing temperature of the water in the washer extractor
again. is controlled by a thermostat located on the
5-23
washer itself (fig. 5-18). This thermostat can Automatic Supply
control two temperature settings, the high
temperature for washing and the low temperature The automatic injection of supplies into the
for sour. The low temperature is controlled by water is done by slots 11 and 12. The automatic
turning the black pointer on the thermostat to the supply bins that are located on the right side of
desired temperature setting. Once the temperature the washer extractor contain four bins. Navy wash
control slot is reached on the program chart, hot formulas I and II require three supplies and Navy
water is added to the washer and tempered with wash formula III requires two supplies. Therefore,
cold water to reach the desired temperature you you will only use two bins because sour and starch
set on the thermostat. The desired temperature can be added together. This means only two of
will always be the lower temperature on the Navy the four slots on the program chart will be cut
wash formula. to allow these supplies into the washer drum.
To set the high temperature, move the red
pointer on the thermostat to the high temperature
SAFETY FEATURES
setting on the wash formula. During the break
suds, hot water is admitted into the washer. The
All laundry personnel should be familiar with
hot water stops when water levels are reached and
washer extractor safety features to prevent
then steam is admitted until the high temperature
personal injury and/or damage to equipment. The
is reached. The third pointer in the thermostat
laundry supervisor should prepare a locally
indicates the actual temperature in the washer.
prepared document that covers all safety features
noted in the equipment technical manual. The
Water Levels
safety features listed below are generally true for
all models; however, check your technical manual
Water levels in the washer are controlled by
for any additional safety features.
slots 5 through 7 on your program chart (fig.
5-17). Wash formulas are based on certain
1. During the wash cycle the washer extractor
amounts of water. If the amounts are other than
will cut off if the outer shell door is opened.
indicated, your concentration of supplies will not
2. The outer shell door of the washer extractor
be correct. Water levels are preset at the factory;
will not open during the extract cycle because of
however, they may have to be adjusted to
an interlock switch.
conform to Navy wash formulas. Water levels
3. Both hands must be used to operate the jog
should be reached before steam is admitted into
switches on the control panel.
the washer. If you notice steam being admitted
4. The control switch on the control panel or
into the washer before water levels are reached,
the master switch on the programmer can be used
the cutting of the program chart should be
as emergency stops.
rechecked.
5. The vibration switch is installed to stop
incorrectly loaded machines during extract.
6. The air pressure switch will not allow the
machine to operate on less than 50 pounds of air
pressure for the wash cycle and 80 pounds of air
pressure for extract.
7. The automatic brake engages during power
loss or emergency stop.
8. The positioning interlock switch is installed
to eliminate the possibility of having the wash
motor activate while the outer shell door is open.
PREOPERATIONAL CHECKS
5-24
• Check to make sure you have fresh water. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
• Check your air pressure (the washer extractor Figure 5-19 shows a laundryman loading
will not operate if less than 50 pounds). a Dyna Wash. Except for loading, unloading,
and adding supplies all functions in the
• Make sure all other switches are off when you automatic mode are done for you. When
energize the control and master switches so loading the Dyna Wash, you should divide the
nothing else will energize. wash load into three equal piles. There should be
no more than a 10 percent difference in the
• Turn equipment on; check for response weight of each pile. Overloading a washing
(lights, dump closed, and so forth). machine is one of the chief causes of breakdowns
because greater strain than the manufacturer
• Check the cylinder door; make sure it is intended is placed on all moving parts,
secured. particularly the motor. Overloading also results
in poor washing because the water and cleaning
• Check the thermostat for proper tem- solution do not have adequate space and
perature settings. sufficient agitation to remove soil. Underloading,
on the other hand, results in a waste of water and
cleaning supplies. You should, therefore, weigh
every load of clothes for each compartment in the
43.69
5-25
cylinder. Once you have done your preoperational 13. Add water to the proper level and at the
checks, you are ready to operate the washer proper temperature, as indicated on the wash
extractor using the following procedures: formula. If the water is not hot enough, use steam
to bring it to the desired temperature.
1. Open the shell door.
14. Add chemicals as prescribed by the
2. Energize the control switch; make sure all
washing formula, through the supply door when
other switches are in the OFF position before
the cylinder is passing the supply door in the
doing this function.
downward direction.
3. Rotate the cylinder with the jog switch,
used simultaneously with the reverse or forward 15. Start timing the bath (follow formula).
switch until the cylinder door is opposite the shell
16. Open the drain switch and drain the water
door opening.
when time for each cycle elapses.
4. Turn off the control switch.
5. Open the cylinder door. CAUTION: 17. Permit sufficient time for the water to
NEVER place hands inside the shell or cylinder drain from the shell after the water level reads
while the control switch is energized. zero, and then close the dump valve.
6. Load washer to rated capacity.
18. Repeat steps 14 through 17 until the wash
7. Mark on the washer with chalk what is
formula reaches the extract cycle of the formula.
in each pocket (each cylinder door is numbered
1, 2, or 3). 19. Leave the valve open for more complete
8. Close the door to each cylinder; latch it drainage after the last bath.
securely.
20. Start the extraction cycle. Move the switch
9. Close the outer shell door.
to extract position. When extraction is completed,
10. Add required supplies to the automatic
move the switch to WASH or INCH position as
dispenser; make sure you place them in the correct
desired.
bin.
11. Use the drum control disk to set the 21. Secure the power, loosen the handwheel,
programmer chart to the beginning; make sure the and open the outer shell door only after the
master switch to the programmer is off while washer cylinder comes to a complete stop. Use
doing this. the jog switch to align the cylinder doors, then
12. Energize the control switch, master open and unload each pocket.
switch, and timer switch (in that order).
From this time on, the operator normally will LOADING AND UNLOADING
not have to return until the signal sounds. The
bell to this signal can be silenced by securing Before the wash in the washer extractor is
power or depressing the button. done, attending laundry personnel should have
three piles of sorted and weighed soiled laundry
MANUAL OPERATION ready for loading. The unloading process is just
the opposite of the loading process. Make sure
If the automatic timer is inoperative, you will when you open the outer shell door that the
have to operate the machine manually. Manual cylinder has come to a complete stop and all
mode should not be used when the washer timer switches are de-energized. You are now ready to
is operating properly. The controls and switches line up the cylinder doors with the outer shell door
as mentioned earlier when used properly allow the for unloading purposes. CAUTION: NEVER stick
operator to use the manual mode. Looking back any part of your hand or arm inside the shell door
at automatic operation you should follow all steps if any of the washer extractor controls are
up to and including step 9 and then follow these energized. After unloading the freshly laundered
instructions: clothing, it should be routed to the next processing
station and the presorted and weighed soiled
10. Turn the control switch on. laundry loaded. The clean laundry should be
11. Start the wash motor by energizing the routed swiftly to prevent it getting mixed up with
wash and master switches. other laundry. It is either routed to the press deck
12. Make sure all other switches are off and for processing on the presses or flatwork ironer
the drain switch is closed. or placed in the dryer for drying.
5-26
43.70
Figure 5-20.-Milnor washer extractor, 60 pound.
OPERATION OF THE PELLERIN MILNOR are different from the Dyna Wash and you should
WASHER EXTRACTOR be familiar with them.
5-27
to understand. The programmer controls and
indicators are shown in figure 5-21. The door to
the programmer is open so you can see the
controls on the inside. Machine controls are
located near the supply injector; as we discuss the
controls, follow along on the illustration.
OFF—power off
6. Water level switch (No. 7)—This switch has 9. Thermometer—The thermometer auto-
three positions: HIGH, LOW, or AUTO. The matically controls preset water temperatures
5-28
within the machine. The thermostat indicators personnel as they will be busy attending machine
include a: controls. The following steps should be followed:
5-29
to stop and unload. Figure 5-22 shows a laundry- The senior laundry petty officer and all
man unloading a Milnor. operators are responsible for the care of washer
extractors. The washer should be kept as clean
MAINTENANCE OF THE inside and outside as possible. Soap solutions and
SHIPBOARD WASHER EXTRACTORS hot water help to keep the inside clean and
sanitary, but scum and other accumulations
The washer extractor is a very important and should be removed daily from the exterior.
expensive piece of equipment. If it breaks down, An oxalic acid solution made by dissolving 1/2
time and money are consumed, perhaps un- pound of oxalic acid crystals in a gallon of water
necessarily, and the ship’s company may be can be used to keep the outside of the tub clean
subjected to inconveniences and unsanitary living and bright. Use a rag or brush to apply the solu-
conditions. Therefore, too much emphasis cannot tion. Rub vigorously and then rinse with clean
be placed on the proper care and maintenance of water. A fine abrasive powder, such as pumice
the washing machine.
43.72
Figure 5-22.-Laundryman unloading the Milnor washer extractor.
5-30
stone, sprinkled on the damp cloth helps to • Extract engages roughly
remove grease and film from the tub. Scouring
powder and a brush vigorously applied also work • Water levels incorrect
quite well.
As an operator, be alert for mechanical • Safety features inoperative
problems that may occur between maintenance
checks such as the following:
Laundry personnel should not attempt
• Loose latches on cylinder doors mechanical or electrical maintenance. Remember,
hands off electrical wiring in the electrical box.
• Leaky valves All mechanical or electrical maintenance must be
done by qualified shipboard maintenance
• Extractor brake working improperly personnel.
43.73
Figure 5-23.-Battery of tumble dryers.
5-31
Cissel-type dryer. In figure 5-24 the door of the clothes. The exhaust fan removes the air from the
tumbler dryer is open and part of the perforated basket and forces it out through an exhaust duct.
basket can be seen inside, while a laundryman
loads the tumbler dryer. Each drying tumbler has
an exhaust fan enclosed in the bottom of the CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
machine. This fan exhausts air from the tumbler
enclosure, and outside air then rushes through Figure 5-25 illustrates the controls and
the open sides of the heat coil box, where it is indicators on the tumbler dryer. Most of these
heated by the steam coils. The air then enters the controls are self-explanatory; however, check the
basket through the perforations and dries the
43.74
5-32
Figure 5-25.—Tumbler dryer controls and indicators.
5-33
Figure 5-26.—Tumbler dryer controls and indicator chart.
chart in figure 5-26 for the name of each control SECONDARY LINT TRAPS
or indicator and its function.
Secondary lint traps help to cut down the
PRIMARY LINT TRAPS buildup of lint in ducting. Air that has gone
through the primary lint trap and left the dryer
The primary lint trap is located in the front still may have lint in it. This lint and debris build
of the machine inside the lower lint trapdoor. up in the ducting blocking airflow. Ducts that
Figure 5-27 illustrates a laundryman cleaning the have long runs and elbows attract lint that gets
lint trap and lower casing. Cleaning the primary stuck and builds up creating back pressure and
lint trap and lower casing should be done once a possible fire hazard. Inspection and cleaning of
every 2 hours. Proper cleaning of the lint trap these vents and ducts should be done monthly.
eliminates airflow restrictions which increase the Secondary lint traps can be installed by procuring
time for drying each load and create possible fire dryer lint trap bags and installing them as
hazards. indicated in figure 5-28. Lint bags are available
5-34
43.76
5-35
through sources contained in the Ship’s Store shipboard fires have revealed the following
Contract Bulletin. These bags are easy to install conditions in laundry tumbler dryer safety devices:
and remove and should be cleaned once every 4
hours. Clogged, damaged, or missing lint traps
Steam coils are located at the top of the dryer. Thermometers that do not indicate tem-
The configuration of steam coils as heat ex- peratures above 220°F, although the
changers makes them collectors of lint and dirt, equipment can be operated above this
which slows down the transfer of heat and reduces temperature
airflow. Steam coils should be examined daily for
No automatic temperature control
the presence of lint; any lint present must be
removed. No automatic timing device to control
drying time
TUMBLER DRYER FIRES
No automatic cool-down cycle
Before we get into the actual operation of the
tumbler dryer, let’s discuss the potential fire No fire sensing and smothering device
hazards involved in drying clothing and other
textile materials in standard shipboard tumbler When the above conditions exist on board
dryers. The principal cause of shipboard laundry your ship, be extra careful when operating the
fires is spontaneous combustion of residual soil tumbler dryer.
in clothing (particularly paint and drying or edible A Prevent Laundry Dryer and Hamper Fires
oils) and/or polymeric elastic waistband materials. placard (fig. 5-29) should be posted on the front
Most laundry dryer fires are caused by human of each dryer. Placards are available through the
error or negligence. Many of the causes are listed supply system and should be mounted on the door
below: of every dryer.
5-36
lot in its proper sequence and maintain an
identification marker with each lot during the
tumbling operation. Exercise the greatest care to
prevent any mixing of lots. Items requiring
approximately the same drying time should be
processed together, when possible.
Do not overload tumbler dryers as tumblers
are more sensitive to overloading than any other
type of equipment used in the Navy laundry.
Overloading retards drying time, produces
wrinkled work, and accelerates wear on the
equipment. No set time can be prescribed for
drying a load in a tumbler because drying time
is dependent upon steam conditions, weight of the
load, texture and type of material, and the amount
of moisture left in the work after extraction.
However, the maximum drying time for an
average load of cotton items in a 50-pound
tumbler dryer is approximately 20 to 25 minutes.
Under ideal conditions, the drying time required
for the same load may even be less. Very heavy
cottons require a slightly longer drying time.
Drying times used should be checked frequently,
and, if longer periods are required, the dryer may
have to be checked by maintenance personnel to
make sure there are no problems. Tumble drying
of washed synthetic or synthetic blend clothes and
linens properly carried out can minimize and/or
eliminate the need for pressing of the items. When
drying linen or this type of clothing do the
following:
To avoid loss of items and production, Heavy items scheduled for pressing must be
perform all drying operations by lot. Keep each preconditioned (partially dried) in tumblers for
5-37
approximately 5 to 8 minutes before being Screws, nails, pins, and melted plastic that
pressed. This will make pressing easier; however, have solidified will occasionally clog the
preconditioned items should not be overdried perforations in the basket mesh creating operating
before being removed from tumblers. When hazards. Baskets should be checked and cleaned
overdrying takes place, the difficulty of pressing daily.
these items is increased and the quality of the The engineering department should check the
finished item is impaired. tumbler dryer at regular intervals for accumula-
Remove tumbled laundry from tumblers by tions of lint in air passages and the lint box, faulty
hand, place in trucks or baskets provided for this opening and closing of the dampers, leaks in the
purpose, and deliver to the next processing steam valves or lines, and the general condition
section. Care must be taken that lots are not mixed of the machine. Engineering personnel should
and that they are delivered in the sequence in lubricate the tumbler and make major overhauls
which received. It is important that processed according to the recommendations of the
workloads be delivered to the next processing manufacturer.
section as soon as possible. This is of particular
importance to preconditioned workloads since
delays will cause the work to dry excessively and FLATWORK IRONER
will affect the efficiency of the pressing operation.
Preconditioned workloads should be covered with The main items in the laundry processed
dampened cloths or nets to help preserve their through the flatwork ironer aboard ship are bed
moisture content. Unload all tumblers when the linens and tablecloths. The flatwork ironer is
laundry is shut down for the day. Check for heat installed on ships that have sufficient requirement
content of all unfolded rough-dry work that is to for this piece of equipment. On this ironer
remain in the laundry overnight. Spread items out (sometimes called a mangle) the flatwork is ironed
for airing if they are still hot. damp just as it comes from the washer extractor.
Such things as handkerchiefs, hand towels,
aprons, undershirts, and white trousers can also
GENERAL MAINTENANCE be finished on the flatwork ironer.
Items of laundry flatwork are currently being
The majority of all dryer maintenance is done manufactured from synthetic, synthetic blend,
by the engineering department. You should always and cotton blend fabrics. These items can be
keep your tumbler dryer free of lint. Lint is a fire successfully finished without pressing in a tumbler
hazard, besides, clothes will not dry properly dryer. Use of dryers in this connection can reduce
unless the lint screen is clean enough to allow free the press deck load where an ironer is not
passage of air through the machine. If dryer lint available. Where an ironer is available, its use
traps become worn or torn you should replace reduces the drying tumbler workload and
them. Always clean the lint screen casing when produces a better finish than rough drying.
you clean the lint screen. On ships without flatwork ironers, some of
Use a vacuum cleaner or a compressed air jet the flatwork, such as table linen, is pressed on a
to remove lint deposits from heater chambers and laundry press of the type described in the next
air passages in the dryer. If lint is left to section. The rest of the work is rough dried.
accumulate, spontaneous heating may result, or You will probably serve at some time on a ship
the flow of air will be restricted. that has a flatwork ironer and, therefore, will be
Other maintenance you can perform on the expected to know how to operate one correctly.
drying tumbler includes the following:
IRONER CONTROLS
Checking switches and dampers to
determine how well they work Currently flatwork ironers used on Navy ships
have either 60-inch or 85-inch cylinders. The
Keeping nuts and screws tight flatwork ironer consists of a steam-heated cylinder
against which the flatwork is pressed by means
Reporting maintenance requirements to of three padded pressure rolls. The work is carried
your supervisor promptly into the ironer on feed ribbons that lead the work
over the cylinder. At the rear an apron or ribbon
Checking the tension of drive belts presses the work against the underside of the
5-38
cylinder and returns it to the front. Steam to heat The feed ribbons feed flatwork.
the cylinder is provided by the ship’s steam line,
and the motor is electrically driven. The feed ribbon drive roll turns the feed
The ironer parts that you are mainly concerned ribbons.
with are shown in figure 5-30. The one part not
shown that is very important is the emergency stop The speed control lever controls the
button located in the right-hand rear of the speed in which flatwork is passed through
machine. We will briefly describe the main parts the ironer.
so you can get a broad understanding of the
flatwork ironer. The foot pedal engages the compression
roll.
The return ribbons hold flatwork in
contact with the heated cylinder until SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
discharge.
Before discussing operation of the flatwork
ironer, we need to discuss safety precautions that
The delivery table catches all discharged
apply to this equipment. Do not try to remove
material.
jammed linen or material while the machine is
running. Serious injury to the operator or damage
The finger guard prevents the hands to the ironer can occur if you attempt to reposition
of the operator from getting near the or unjam linen or service the ironer while it is
padded pressure rolls. running. If something is jammed, shut the ironer
off at the power source before trying to remove
The padded rolls smooth and flatten fabric it. If the ironer has compression roll levers, learn
to the heated cylinder. how these levers work and always use them to
5-39
fully raise padded rolls before you shut off the of each control and the equipment safety
power, allow the ironer to cool, and try to remove precautions. The compression roll should be
jammed linen or service the ironer. Always avoid disengaged (top position) and flatwork ready to
contact with heated parts. be fed into the machine. Follow these steps:
Never reach over, under, or behind the safety
finger guard or into any area near the heated roll 1. Start ironer by pressing the green button.
or moving parts without first shutting off the 2. Set to the lowest speed by adjusting the
ironer at the power source. If you break this rule, speed control handle. NOTE: NEVER change the
you are taking the chance of getting caught in the speed of the ironer when the ironer is on or you
rolls or ribbons and possibly incurring serious may damage the variable speed mechanism.
injury from the ironer’s heat or pressure. This rule 3. Open the steam supply valve slowly. Open
should be followed whether you are working at the valve one-half a turn at first and gradually
the front, side, or rear of the ironer. allow steam to enter the cylinder. Continue to
Check the operation of the safety finger guard open the valve slowly until opened all the way.
at the beginning of every shift. Touching the The steam pressure for the ironer should be about
safety finger guard should activate a switch that 100 psi. It normally takes about 30 minutes to
will stop the ironer. If this safety feature is not fully heat the cylinder.
working properly, shut off the ironer at the power 4. Engage the compression roll and wax the
source and notify your laundry supervisor. ironer (see waxing the ironer).
Do not try to operate the ironer until the safety 5. Start feeding the flatwork. You may
finger guard is repaired and working properly. increase speed to meet your particular need.
Always make sure that all other safety guards and During normal operation there are two locations
end panels are in place before operating the ironer. in which the ironer maybe stopped, the red finger
ALWAYS make sure that all ribbons and safety guard and red emergency stop button.
tapes are in place and working properly. They are 6. To stop the ironer at the end of your work,
designed to hold linen so it is properly ironed and close the steam supply, raise the compression roll,
to prevent jamming. Never relace or adjust and allow the machine to run without steam for
tapes, ribbons, or padding while ironer is running. 20 to 30 minutes. This procedure allows all
Keeping the ironer well waxed also helps to components to properly cool before the power is
prevent jams. DO NOT iron anything except shut off. This cool-down procedure also prevents
flatwork because damage to the ironer or injury damage to return ribbons and protects the
can result. The ironer is designed for processing compression roll padding from being flattened.
flatwork only. DO NOT stand, sit, or kneel on
any shelf at the front or rear of the ironer. These FEEDING THE FLATWORK IRONER
are not designed to support a person’s weight.
PROTECT yourself and your fellow workers The flatwork ironer was designed to finish all
by making sure that everyone follows these simple cotton or blended flatwork such as tablecloths,
rules. Read and follow all safety labels. Learn napkins, towels, and linen. It is not designed to
which parts are hot and how the ironer works— process nylon or rubberized fabrics. Do not try
including how to shut it off in an emergency. Do to process these items as it may result in fire or
not get close to heated or moving parts or wear damage to ribbons or cylinder surface. When
loose clothing or jewelry when near the ironer. leaving the ironer for more than 5 minutes, always
If you see people breaking these rules, help them raise the compression roll.
prevent serious injury to themselves or others by To help ease feeding, you should shake a
reminding them to follow the rules and shut the quantity of work out and lay it over the edge of
ironer off first. When in doubt contact the the laundry basket or on a table within easy reach.
engineering department. Do not try to make Check on the amount of dampness in the
mechanical repairs on this equipment. Only pieces before feeding. The piece should come out
qualified personnel should service this equipment. of the ironer dry, and to accomplish this, some
adjustment of the extracting time may be
OPERATION OF THE FLATWORK necessary. If the pieces are not extracted long
IRONER enough they will come out of the ironer still damp;
and if extracted too long they will come out with
Before you start and operate the flatwork a rough, dry appearance. Do not let flatwork sit
ironer, make sure you fully understand the use around in the laundry baskets after it is removed
5-40
from the extractor. Iron flatwork immediately spread firm and straight as it passes through the
while it is at the proper stage of dampness, or ironer. As the spread comes out, the personnel
cover it with plastic or other material to retain a take it by the edges again and fold it.
proper amount of moisture. Feed flatwork into
the ironer WRONG SIDE UP, so that the smooth Small Items
or “right” side comes into contact with the
cylinder. This gives a smooth finish to the outside When you feed small articles into the
of the flatwork. Fold the smooth side out as the flatwork ironer, use the entire length of the
work comes from the machine. cylinder, If you continually feed small items into
the ironer at one or two spots, the padding on the
Large Items pressure rolls wears more at these points and
your work comes out unsatisfactory. The only
Two persons should feed large items as way to correct this difficulty is to repad the rolls.
shown in figure 5-31. To start the piece through
the ironer, each person grasps a top corner with CARE AND MAINTENANCE
the hand nearest the ironer, stretching the
forward edge between them so that it enters the Maintenance of the flatwork ironer is the
machine straight and smooth. Each person uses responsibility of engineering personnel. ONLY
the other hand to straighten the front edge as it trained maintenance personnel should do any
enters the ironer. After the feed roll ribbons pick work on the ironer. Instructions for changing
up the spread, they use both hands to hold the
43.79
5-41
ribbons, aprons, friction material on ribbon drive to jam and wrinkle while under the return ribbons,
rolls, pads, and covers are contained in the that is usually an indication that the ribbons are
manufacturer’s technical manual. Laundry not running at the proper speed and the friction
personnel should do this maintenance ONLY after material may need replacement. You should
being properly trained in the correct procedures contact maintenance personnel to check and
for performing this work. replace this friction material if necessary.
The return ribbon drive roll drives the ironer The press deck area of the laundry processes
return ribbons. This return ribbon drive roll is all clothing received from washing or tumbling
located at the front of the ironer underneath the operations that cannot be processed through the
white canvas feed ribbons. For the ironer return flatwork ironer.
ribbons to be driven properly, the ribbon drive Uniform items made of synthetic or synthetic
roll must be properly covered with friction blends may be successfully finished by tumble
material. Special 6-inch-wide friction material drying if the procedures outlined in the washing
wound around the drive roll is used for this and drying sections are followed. Other cotton
purpose. When this material becomes smooth or uniform coats, shirts, and trousers must be
if it should become worn off the roll, it must be pressed before they are worn. Laundry personnel
replaced with new material. If this material is not working on the press deck must know how to
replaced, the ironer return ribbons will not be operate a press and press clothing correctly. This
driven at the proper speed and wrinkling and other requires practice and repetition of standard press
problems can result. Return ribbons normally run lays for shirts and trousers. It also requires
faster than the heated roll and the padded knowing the basics of the laundry press operation
compression roll. If linens should have a tendency and following all safety precautions.
5-42
LAUNDRY PRESSES TYPES OF LAUNDRY PRESSES
A laundry press is shown in figure 5-32. A Figure 5-33 shows the many presses used
laundry press consists of a stationary padded buck afloat. There are several models used afloat;
fastened to a rigid metal frame. The head of the however, the operation of them is basically the
press is made of polished metal and is lowered same. The following are the basic types of presses
by a system operated by compressed air. Live installed aboard ship:
steam is admitted to the head to heat it, and
the condensed steam is carried away by a drain- 1. Tapered head—for general pressing of
pipe. A steam trap prevents live steam from wearing apparel
entering the drainage system. A table for 2. Rectangular head—for general pressing of
holding a garment undergoing pressing is wearing apparel and flatwork items
secured to the frame of the press beneath 3. Triple head—for pressing shirt collars and
the buck. cuffs simultaneously
4. Sleeve press—for pressing sleeves of shirts
The buck of a press is your worktable. The
size and shape of the buck may vary according In addition to presses you have your spray
to the function for which it was designed. The guns attached to press units. A spray gun is
buck is padded in a specific way for satisfactory essential for dampening garments that are too dry
pressing. This padding must be in good condition for good pressing. Cold water is used to dampen
at all times and must be changed when scorched, the garments. A small amount of water sprayed
uneven, or worn. The amount and condition of on the last part of a garment being pressed is
padding affect head pressure, and you must necessary to compensate for the moisture lost
readjust this pressure to get the amount required while the other parts of the garment were pressed
for good pressing. on the hot press.
5-43
Figure 5-33.— Laundry press listed for use aboard ship.
5-44
47.81
Figure 5-34.-Laundry press single operator station.
43.82
Figure 5-35.-Several single operator stations.
5-45
OPERATION OF THE LAUNDRY This prevents getting your hand caught under the
PRESS press head. Opening the press head requires
pushing only one of the green buttons. This is
Presses are air operated and controlled by done to allow easy release in an emergency. Also,
push buttons mounted flush with the front of the press heads will not close and lock if an object
press table. The air buttons located on the front too thick is between the press head and pad. This
of the table are used for lowering, locking, and safety feature can be tested by taking a bed sheet,
releasing the head. The two outside red buttons rolling it up in a tubular fashion, placing it under
lower and lock the head. Both hands must be used the press head, and then trying to close the press
to press both buttons at the same time. The release head. If the press head is adjusted properly, the
buttons are the two inside green buttons. The head head of the press will not lock shut.
can be released by depressing either the right or Many incidents have occurred where laundry
left inside release button. personnel have caught their hands between the
Before you operate the press, examine the press head and the pad. If you follow a few simple
cover and padding before heating it. Then check safety precautions, this should never happen.
the head pressure by inserting a bedding sheet
leaving a portion exposed and trying to pull it out Never operate the press if any control
after the press is closed. The bedding sheet will buttons are sticking.
resist all efforts to remove it and remain in place
in all areas. Never plug one of the buttons with any
If the padding is bad, do not use the press until device to increase speed.
it is repadded. If the cover is unsatisfactory,
replace it with a new one. Do not allow anyone to stand near
When you heat the laundry press, do it grad- the press while operating it.
ually. Turn the steam valve partially open for 20
minutes and then open it completely. The press Only one operator should be working at
is then ready for use. a press station at a time.
The time required to press and dry a garment
satisfactorily is dependent upon the following: Know the location of the main steam valve
to the laundry in case of an emergency
1. Type of material such as a broken steam line or steam leak.
2. Moisture in the material
3. Steam pressure (less than 100 psi will
require longer time) MAINTENANCE OF PRESSES
4. Effectiveness of the steam trap in carrying
away the condensed steam to allow unrestricted The laundry supervisor and operators should
flow of live steam into the head chamber not only perform minor maintenance on presses,
5. Head pressure but also should see that repairs to presses are re-
corded properly in the equipment maintenance log.
An article with a rough, dry appearance The steam pressure to the presses should be
usually requires more than normal pressing time. 100 pounds per square inch. Some of the presses
Be certain, of course, that the article is damp have pressure gauges. The air pressure on air-
enough when you start to press it. If the article operated presses should be 75 to 95 pounds per
lacks sufficient moisture for good pressing, spray square inch. In addition, engineering personnel
it with the spray gun. For normal pressing, keep should give the presses a hydrostatic test once a
the head down for about 15 seconds. Experience year. This test should be for 150 pounds per
in pressing enables you to tell when to add square inch for 1 minute.
dampness to a garment before you press it, and Laundry personnel should not get into the
how long it will take to press that particular type mechanics of the laundry press; however, they
of material. should perform the following operator
maintenance:
SAFETY FEATURES
1. Thoroughly clean presses (daily).
The laundry press head will not close unless 2. Clean and wax press heads (as required).
you use both hands to push the two red buttons. 3. Change pads and covers (as required).
5-46
Early in the morning and just before pressing,
you should use a foxtail to dust off the entire press
table of the laundry press. Then take some hot,
soapy water and completely wash off the press
table and dry it. Always be careful not to bring
your arms into contact with any of the heated
surfaces of the press.
Two flannel pads Always use two layers of flannel on the press.
One flannel pad does not cushion the garment well
One press cover enough and buttons may be broken. When two
5-47
layers of flannel are used, change one layer each in shipboard laundries. The press lays shown are
week. Place the new layer on the bottom and the considered the minimum required in pressing a
used layer on top. You can wash double-faced shirt properly. The first lay shows the pressing of
flannel and reuse it. If the flannel shrinks, use it a shirt collar on a standard press; it may be done
on a smaller buck. If the flannel becomes hard, on a collar/cuff press if available.
apply steam to the surface and work it with the Laundries with a sleeve press may use it to
hand until the flannel becomes pliable. Tumbling press sleeves in place of a conventional press. The
also makes the flannel pliable. pressing of the inside of the pocket should be done
Change the knitted padding when it becomes as shown in figures 5-37 through 5-39; however,
scorched or burned. No set time can be given for on synthetic uniforms it is not necessary and
changing the knitted padding, but under normal pockets will normally not fold back. Synthetic and
operating conditions it should be changed about synthetic blend uniforms should be finished in the
once a month. dryer when possible as outlined in the drying
section. Spray guns should be used when necessary
to keep shirts damp during pressing. This also
PRESS LAYS
improves the finished appearance of the shirt, Any
In machine pressing, each garment is finished wrinkles that cannot be removed using the
by a series of LAYS. Each lay is a position of the conventional press should be done by a hand iron.
garment on the buck, and the series should cover
the entire garment. Out-of-the-way places that PRESS LAYS FOR TROUSERS
cannot be pressed with the machine should be
smoothed out with a hand iron. Figures 5-40 and 5-41 illustrate the press lays
Sequences of lays for shirts and trousers are that are used for a pair of trousers.
described on the following pages. The ones given Remove the trousers from the damp box.
are considered the minimum for each article when (Keep a wet net over the damp box at all times.)
good quality pressing is desired. The lays, Straighten out the trouser pockets as shown in the
however, are not standard with all pressers. For first two lays of figure 5-40. Shape the trousers
example, some laundry personnel use two lays for with your hand and dampen, if necessary. Then
pressing the front of shirts, one with the pocket continue with the lays as shown.
flap up and the other with the flap down. Other If the steam pressure in the laundry is below
pressers use one lay with the flap down and get 100 pounds of pressure, you may have to press
accept able work. the trousers a bit longer to make sure all dampness
When determining the proper sequence of lays is gone, especially for the inside pockets. When
for a garment, take into consideration the matching the inseams be sure the outer seam
following: matches the inner seam on both legs. If they are
not matched properly, the line will run uneven on
1. Minimum number of lays required to do
the trousers. When you complete the press lays,
the work satisfactorily
hang the trousers on a hanger equipped with a
2. Logical sequence of lays, for easier and
trouser guard to prevent lines from setting in the
quick handling
legs of the trousers during stowage.
3. Part of the garment to be pressed last to
prevent damage to the finish of the most
FINISHING OTHER ARTICLES
conspicuous parts of the garment
The lays given for different articles below are To finish cap covers you should use a regular
now used in ships’ laundries. The following lays iron and press the band on the small end of a
for shirts and trousers do not include the use of press.
a hand iron for touch-up work on places difficult Press garrison caps in two lays on any type
to reach with the press. When available, use these of press. Use one lay for each side. Do NOT press
irons as necessary to get good quality work. A caps with leather bands on a laundry press, The
garment that is nearly finished should not be leather will not withstand the temperature of the
handled too much in doing touch-up. hot head.
When you press ties, cut a cardboard form
PRESS LAYS FOR SHIRTS
that will fit inside to hold them straight. Then
Figures 5-37 through 5-39 give the sequence press with two lays, one for each side. Do not
of lays for pressing a shirt on presses available press wool worsted ties on a laundry press. Use
5-48
43.84
5-49
43.85
5-50
43.86
5-51
43.87
5-52
43.88
5-53
a press in the dry-cleaning plant, with a covered and napkins are not preconditioned before
head. pressing, they may scorch. On the other hand, if
they are pressed too dry, they will not be finished
Pressing dungaree shirts is done in the same properly. Tablecloths should be stored with a wet
manner as shown in shirt pressing; however, care cloth over them until you are ready to press them
should be taken when pressing the sleeve with or they will dry out.
the petty officer crow. This petty officer crow may
cause a stain on the press head or press cover. To ASSEMBLY AND ISSUE
avoid this problem, you should place a piece of
cardboard between the crow and the press head In this section we are concerned with
or cover. This prevents the petty officer crow from assembly and handling of articles both in
imprinting on the press head or press cover. individual bundles and in bulk lots. Bulk lots that
Precondition dungarees in the dryer before are tumbled can be loaded directly into the
pressing as discussed in the drying section. This laundry bags in which they were brought to the
is done because they hold a lot of water and on laundry. Such is not the case, however, with
newer dungarees the blue color may fade onto the items in an individual’s bundle. This is a matter
press cover, thus ruining the cover. Dungaree of (1) careful handling, (2) thorough inspections,
trousers are pressed inside out and the legs are and (3) accurate counting.
pressed flat with creases going inward on the
seams instead of in the middle of the leg. ASSEMBLY OF INDIVIDUAL LOTS
Care should be taken when pressing
tablecloths or napkins. When a flatwork ironer is Before the individual lots are received in the
not available, these items will have to be pressed assembly area, the individual’s ticket (NAVSUP
on a conventional press. The tablecloths and Form 233) should be placed in the assembly bins
napkins should be preconditioned in the dryer in alphabetical order. Then you will place finished
before pressing (do not overdry). If the tablecloths articles as marked in the proper bin. Figure 5-42
43.89
5-54
shows laundry personnel doing this procedure in HANDLING FINISHED LAUNDRY
the assembly room. After all the articles in an
individual bundle have been binned, it is best to Handle finished laundry with care. Collect it
remove the articles from the net bag. Fold and promptly and place it in the proper bin. Do not
return them to the net bag as you check off the allow unfolded clothes from the net bags to pile
items on the laundry list. up around the laundry on the worktables or
Pin the net bag with a large laundry pin and shelves. Be careful not to allow clothing to fall
attach the separate sock bag to this net bag using to the deck. When finished work is soiled or
a small laundry pin. MAKE SURE you attach the wrinkled by rough or careless handling, reworking
correct laundry sock bag to the correct net bag. is the usual result.
To make issuing individual bundles easier, always No articles should be returned to the owner
make sure that the name or laundry mark of the unless it represents the best quality of work and
person owning the articles is shown clearly on the care your laundry can give it. Streaks, stains,
net after you wrap and pin the bundle. broken buttons, or any blemishes on finished
Once you have done this, check the laundry work are usually inexcusable and should be
list and make sure you have all the finished press corrected before the article is returned to its
work (shirts, trousers, and so forth). Cover the owner.
press work with a suit wrapper and attach the
laundry list to the wrapper using glue or tape. QUALITY ASSURANCE
5-55
Specialists, or other personnel should be reported procedures. The primary factor attributed to loss
to your immediate supervisor. of clothing in the laundry is poor lot control. If
the laundry has good lot control it will avoid
delays, confusion, and loss of clothing articles.
HANDLING SENDBACKS To minimize laundry claims due to lost or
damaged clothing, laundry processing as discussed
Sendbacks are articles in individual bundles in this chapter should be followed.
and bulk lots that must be sent back for
reprocessing. Place an article sent back for
reprocessing in a net so that it can be reworked
immediately. Because sendbacks hold up delivery SECURING FITTINGS AND
of laundry, they should receive special attention EQUIPMENT
so that you can make delivery on schedule.
Recheck on them occasionally to make certain the Yoke is one of the damage control material
desired work is being done. conditions that is set each day aboard ship just
after working hours.
Once the laundry is secured for the day, the
Ship’s Serviceman working as damage control
CLAIMS FOR DAMAGED OR petty officer should make sure the material
LOST CLOTHING condition of yoke is set properly in the laundry.
Normally these yoke fittings are logged closed in
Claims by crew members arising from loss of damage control central at this time. If the laundry
or damage to personal clothing in the ship’s is going to operate past normal working hours,
laundry should be handled as shown in the any yoke fittings that are required to be opened
NAVSUP P-487. should be logged opened in damage control
The goal for laundry claims during any given central.
accounting period is zero; however, very seldom
is this goal obtained. Mistakes are made and Every day electricity to equipment is secured
claims are submitted usually because of the by turning off the switch on each piece of
following: equipment that controls the power. The electricity
to any equipment should be secured when that
Errors made during marking or assembly piece of equipment is not in use.
Steam to laundry presses should be secured
Delivery to the wrong division or daily by closing the valve to the steam line
officer/CPO connected to the press. Care should be taken to
prevent burning yourself. The steam valve to the
Weak security controls in the laundry laundry presses should be reopened the next
workday. Never leave loads of laundry in the
Clothing damaged during processing equipment or hang clothes near steam lines or
presses. All laundry cleaned for that day should
Loss or damage to clothing can only be be picked up by the responsible division/
corrected through the use of proper laundering department before securing for the day.
5-56
CHAPTER 6
DRY-CLEANING PERSONNEL
DRY-CLEANING SECURITY
6-1
review each stage to determine time, space, Normally, dry-cleaning plants do not have as
equipment, and operating personnel required, and much space as the ship’s laundry and you must
any other factors that will affect your schedule. have rigid control of the schedule from the
standpoint of receiving and issuing so that the
DRY-CLEANING STANDARDS section can handle the maximum amount of work
in the space available. Do not receive more dry
Dry-cleaning standards are based on a 96-hour weight than can be processed in 1 normal working
workweek and apply only to those ships that have day, except under very unusual conditions.
a dry-cleaning capability. These standards are
included in the Shipboard Habitability Program, TYPES OF SERVICES
OPNAVINST 9640.1. Your dry-cleaning plant
should have dry-cleaning equipment and press Any services provided in the dry-cleaning plant
capability sufficient to clean and finish press one should be completed in a period between 24 to
dress uniform per person per month. This works 72 hours. Services provided for items other than
out to about 1 pound of dry cleaning per person regular uniforms should be clearly defined in your
per week. Any troops that are embarked aboard schedule including the days and times these
your ship should not be included in dry-cleaning services are available. You should be flexible in
considerations. If your ship has between 100 to scheduling these additional services especially just
500 personnel, you should have a minimum of a before a personnel inspection or on a tender or
spotting board and press capability to finish press a repair ship that may be offering services to ships
one dress uniform per person per month. Ships alongside while in port. For instance, you should
with 100 to 500 personnel desiring dry-cleaning not be doing a large load of civilian clothes at the
equipment instead of a spotting board will be time of a personnel inspection when your work-
considered on a case basis. If the capabilities of load will be extra heavy and you won’t be able
your dry-cleaning plant permit, you may also to get the work done on time. Modify the schedule
provide service to ships near your ship. That is, around this time to make sure you get all uniform
in the case of tenders or repair ships, your ship items done before the inspection,
should provide dry-cleaning service to ships Normally, officer and CPO clothing can be
tended in addition to your own. processed on an individual basis; however,
enlisted personnel uniforms may provide too large
DRY-CLEANING EQUIPMENT a demand to do them in this manner. In a
CAPABILITIES situation like this, you may want to handle enlisted
personnel uniforms as a bulk (division/group)
Like the laundry, your equipment capabilities load. If you do this, make sure each enlisted
need to be considered when scheduling dry- person marks his or her uniform according to the
cleaning operations. Based on observations, U.S Navy Regulations, 1973, so you know who
information data, and review of past records the owns the clothing.
following can be expected of your dry-cleaning
equipment. DEADLINE FOR RECEIPT
Dry cleaning—dry to dry—one load rated To eliminate any problems in receipt or pickup
capacity per 50 minutes of dry-cleaning items, you should make sure you
clearly define on your schedule who is responsible
Dry-cleaning press utility—20 pieces per for these tasks. It is advisable to set a deadline
operator hour (POH) for receiving articles no later than 0900 daily. By
requiring delivery before 0900, the dry-cleaning
These equipment capabilities are dependent on personnel can easily sort the articles into proper
training, ability of personnel, arrangement of loads and keep the washer operating to capacity
equipment, and hotel utilities available for your without having to wait for sufficient articles of
equipment. one type to make a load.
You should consider the space in the dry- Schedule similar uniform items together
cleaning plant when making your schedule. because washer loads must be of similar material.
6-2
Your material groups are broken down into three of the premarked tag and staples the master(s) of
categories: (1) officer and CPO uniform items, the tag set and unused tags to the patron’s dry-
(2) enlisted uniform items, and (3) miscellaneous cleaning list.
items such as flags, foul weather jackets, civilian
clothes, and any other items not included in
category 1 or 2. DRY-CLEANING LIST AND TAGS
You should do officer and CPO items one day
and enlisted uniform items another. Any items A dry-cleaning list is a record of dry cleaning
other than uniform items can be scheduled out processed for an individual. Such a list saves time
over the week. Thus, on any given day you would and work in receiving and issuing and also reduces
have either category 1 or 2 scheduled with two the probability of misplacing articles. These lists
smaller groups of clothing out of category 3. may be bought commercially or ordered through
Unless it is necessary, don’t ever have more than the Ship’s Store Contract Bulletin. You may use
three different types of material scheduled on any it to check off finished work returned to the
given day. On large ships such as carriers or assembly room. The list provides for plant
tenders, the officer and CPO laundry is scheduled control, customer receipt, financial control, and
on separate days. furnishes eight tags for identifying the items that
are going to be dry cleaned. The procedure for
ADJUSTING THE SCHEDULE using the marking tags that are part of the dry-
cleaning list is as follows:
Unlike the ship’s laundry, the schedule in the
dry-cleaning plant may have to be adjusted more 1. Detach and safety pin or staple one tag to
often to meet specific conditions. As stated earlier, each article. If a customer has three articles, fasten
you can expect a synthetic dry-cleaning unit to a detachable tag to each item and leave the
produce one clean load approximately every 50 remaining tags attached to the master dry-cleaning
minutes. You can also expect to dry clean about list.
1 pound of laundry per person per week. If you
take these two factors into consideration you 2. When you assemble the items that have
should be able to determine the number of persons been dry cleaned, the count of the remaining tags
you can serve in a 1-day schedule and adjust the confirms the number of articles that belongs to
schedule accordingly. one customer. Thus if five tags remain, the
customer brought in three articles.
RECEIVING AND IDENTIFYING Cost columns that are located on the right side
of the list are necessary only when a charge is
The proper receiving and identifying of dry- made for dry cleaning.
cleaning articles is essential in preventing items
from being misplaced. There are two methods for
receiving and identifying dry-cleaning articles. Use INSPECTION
the method that best fulfills your needs.
Inspect each article for detachable uniform
Method A—Each piece of dry-cleaning work insignia and for items in pockets. Removal of ball-
is logged in and out using a dry-cleaning work log. point pens, crayons, lipsticks, and other foreign
The log is maintained by the receiving clerk in a objects at this point eliminates sources of damage
standard ruled book or lined pad of paper. If dry- to loads of clothing being cleaned. Put such items
cleaning tags are used as stated in method B in an envelope and attach it to the customer’s dry-
below, this logbook does not need to be used. If cleaning list. Return pockets to proper position
your dry-cleaning plant is using dry-cleaning lists before cleaning. If you find spots on an article,
without tags, use this log in conjunction with the send it to the spotter. Spots should be removed
dry-cleaning list. from the article before it is cleaned.
If time permits, determine whether any
Method B—Each patron fills out the list, buttons or buckles are missing or loose and note
removes the receipt stub at the bottom, and tears or any other marks. Note whether the article
attaches the list to the bundle. The receiving clerk has a belt. Care in preliminary examination avoids
then tags each article in the bundle with a section trouble later.
6-3
CLASSIFYING PRESPOTTING
The two most important things to consider All articles should be examined for spots
when items are classified for dry cleaning are (1) before they are cleaned. Analyze all spots to
color and (2) lint quality of the material. In determine what substance caused them and what
general, virtually all fibers or fabrics can be safely methods should be used to remove them.
dry cleaned provided they are resistant to the dry- Sometimes treating the spot may not remove it
cleaning solvent, frictional activity involved in the entirely but usually it will come out completely
dry-cleaning machine, and the stress of steam during the cleaning process.
pressing and finishing. Standard military uniforms Note that the flow chart (fig. 6-1) shows both
can be successfully dry cleaned aboard ship with prespotting and postspotting steps. The latter step
virtually no problems as long as the equipment is necessary in case a spot was missed earlier. If,
is used properly and the correct solvent is used. however, it is necessary to postspot an article, it
The solvent used should be tetrachloroethylene must go back to be cleaned again to remove the
(perchlorethylene), NSN 6810-00-270-9982 and chemical used in spotting. Spotting is discussed
NSN 6810-00-819-1128. Always remember to in detail later in this chapter.
classify similar items together for washing
purposes. If your dry-cleaning plant is washing
civilian clothes, it would be a good dry-cleaning DRY-CLEANING SOLVENT
practice to first determine the type of fiber or
fabric to be cleaned and then carefully check the The dry-cleaning process centers around the
permanent care label for manufacturer’s recom- dry-cleaning solvent which distinguishes dry
mendations or instructions for cleaning. On cleaning from simple wet cleaning or laundering.
occasions you may also dry clean Marine The removal of stains and soils is dependent upon
uniforms. Sort them together but dry clean them volubility, age and extent of soil, size of wash
separately. load, type of fabric, the amount of water and
detergent in solution, and the level and
Classify table covers, drapes, flags, and so on,
temperature of the solvent.
according to color, material, and lint quality. (Put
Only the synthetic solvents discussed in this
ties into separate bags and clean them with the
chapter are authorized on board Navy ships for
blue uniform.)
use in dry-cleaning plants. Tetrachloroethylene/
Foul weather jackets, face masks, winter perchloroethylene are the most commonly used
helmets, and winter trousers may be cleaned solvents and the brands are available through
together. supply. The solvents already contain detergent
which eliminates adding it to the inventory of
Although they have many different colors,
supplies.
signal flags may be cleaned in the same group.
Check the amounts of solvent in the storage
Transfer of lint among flags is not detrimental
tank from time to time and make sure that it is
to their use.
refilled as necessary. This prevents the solvent
Do NOT dry clean impregnated, rubberized, from getting too low for operation. If it is
or oiled articles, or articles manufactured wholly necessary, remind the sales office when the
or in part from leather. Dry-cleaning solvents quantity of solvent is reaching a low level so they
damage such materials beyond repair or use. can order a new supply.
When articles are classified, divide them into
SAFE HANDLING AND USE OF
equal units for loading into the dry-cleaning
DRY-CLEANING SOLVENT
machine. The weight units should be based on the
manufacturer’s recommendations for machine
Although dry-cleaning solvent has been used
capacity.
safely for many years, it is a toxic substance. It
A record of pounds cleaned and the number must, like other chlorinated solvents, be regarded
of loads cleaned daily is kept to determine the as a potentially hazardous material, which, if
numbers of pounds cleaned per gallon of solvent misused or improperly handled, can cause serious
and the cost per pound cleaned. The use of 1 injury or even death. It is essential, therefore, that
gallon of dry-cleaning solvent to clean 200 pounds perchloroethylene be handled only by knowledge-
of clothes is considered good usage. able and experienced individuals who are familiar
6-4
with the hazards associated with its use. The safety Incinerated in an approved incinerator
hazards of perchloroethylene are contained in
BUMEDINST 6260.12. Evaporated in very small quantities
Many incidents have been reported where
Ship’s Servicemen were overcome by fumes from Buried in landfills in compliance with
dry-cleaning solvent. To prevent and minimize the local, state, and federal regulations
hazards of handling dry-cleaning solvent, you
must follow these precautions: Dumping the solvent into any body of water is
strongly discouraged and may be illegal. No
Use solvent only in well-ventilated spaces. personnel should be allowed to return to any areas
where spills have occurred until all evidence of
Avoid prolonged or repeated breathing of excessive vapors is gone.
vapors.
HEALTH HAZARDS
Ventilate stowage areas well.
Perchloroethylene can be used safely when
proper precautions are observed; however, the
Free exhaust ducts, fans, and ventilation
user must guard against certain hazardous
shafts of dirt, lint, or other debris.
properties of the solvent. Users should guard
against inhalation of excessive perchloroethylene
Vent vapor recovery units to the outside
vapor, prolonged or repeated contact of the liquid
air.
with the skin, swallowing the liquid, and splashing
into the eyes. Manufacturers of dry-cleaning
In addition to the above precautions you should
equipment design and build their dry-cleaning
inspect your equipment daily for loose or leaky
systems with these points in mind. When such
joints, couplings, connections, valves, covers, or
equipment is operated and maintained in an
doors and report all discrepancies promptly to
appropriate manner, dry-cleaning solvent should
maintenance personnel. Do not eat, drink, or
not become a health hazard.
smoke in areas where the dry-cleaning solvent is
Dry-cleaning supervisors should make sure a
handled.
buddy system is adopted in the dry-cleaning
Any liquid solvent, even a trickle that comes
operation. All dry-cleaning personnel should be
in contact with the atmosphere, presents a
alert for the signs of overexposure or illness caused
potential hazard to personnel. If spills occur, they
by the dry-cleaning solvent including the
should be cleaned up promptly. Personnel who
following:
clean spills should wear rubber gloves and an
approved respiratory protection device that is
Loss of inhibitions, lightheadedness,
equipped with a canister or filter suitable for use
giddiness, or drunkenness
with chlorinated vapors. Personnel not wearing
rubber gloves or respirators should remain clear
Loss of coordination
of areas where spills have occurred. Open all
doors and turn on exhaust fans to ventilate the
Stinging sensation in the eyes, nose, or
area.
throat
You should use a sorbent to clean up small
spills. Allow the sorbent to stay in place until it
Headache, nausea, or dizziness
has completely absorbed the solvent and then
shovel the solvent-laden material into an airtight
FIRST AID
container and dispose of it properly. If a large
spill occurs, it should be drained and then pumped All personnel who work in areas where over-
into an airtight container for disposal. The dry- exposure to perchloroethylene could occur should
cleaning solvent should not be dumped into be th or ou g h ly tr ain ed in ad m in is t e ri ng
sewers, placed near water supplies, nor should it appropriate emergency first aid. Experience has
be drained into the bilges. It should be placed in shown that promptly administering such aid can
a suitable container and disposed of in one of the help to reduce the possible adverse effects of
following ways: accidental exposure. You must realize, however,
that first aid is for emergency treatment only and
Released to a licensed reclaimer medical attention should be obtained promptly.
6-5
Inhalation in toxic quantities following massive or prolonged
exposure, there is little absorption through the
The initial effects of overexposure due to skin under normal conditions of use. Personnel
inhaling the solvent will be nose and eye whose skin comes in contact with the solvent
irritation, lightheadedness, dizziness, mental should wash the affected area with large amounts
dullness, and uncoordination. If these symptoms of warm water and soap. Any contaminated
are present, the affected person should be clothes should be removed and dry cleaned.
removed from the contaminated area to fresh air.
Once the person is removed to an area where Eye Contact
there is fresh air, recovery is usually rapid, If
recovery is not rapid, symptoms worsen, or While the danger of serious injury is little or
breathing has stopped, start artificial respiration none if perchloroethylene is splashed into the
and obtain medical attention at once. eyes, a great deal of pain and redness may result.
The eyes should always be flushed or rinsed with
Skin Contact cool water immediately after contact and
immediate medical attention sought.
Perchloroethylene is an excellent solvent and
because of this it removes natural oils from the STOWAGE OF THE DRY-CLEANING
skin. Prolonged and/or repeated contact with the SOLVENT
liquid may produce rough and dry skin which is
more susceptible to infections. Exposures that are NSTM S9086-WK-STM-010 of Sept 87
infrequent or of short duration should have no contains stowage requirements for chlorinated
adverse effects; however, in some persons a mild cleaning solvents. Chapter 670 includes the
irritation, consisting of a mild temporary redness, stowage, handling, and disposal of hazardous
may occur. general-use consumables. Do not stow
There is little practical hazard from the tetrachloroethylene (perchloroethylene) near heat
standpoint of skin absorption. Although sources, or allow contact with hot surfaces. Do
perchloroethylene can penetrate the human skin
48.89
Figure 6-2.-Multimatic dry-cleaning machine.
6-6
not smoke in areas where dry-cleaning solvent is Dry-cleaning facilities should be kept in a clean
stowed or used. All stowage areas should be well and sanitary condition at all times. The medical
ventilated and checked regularly by the gas-free officer should provide the dry-cleaning plant with
engineer. Do not stow dry-cleaning solvent near sanitation instructions and inspect the dry-
any substance that the solvent is not compatible cleaning areas frequently. The medical officer
with including strong alkalies such as sodium should also provide a copy of the sanitation
hydroxide, oxidizers such as calcium hypochlorite instructions to be posted in plain view in the dry-
and sodium nitrate, or powdered metals such as cleaning area.
aluminum.
DRY-CLEANING EQUIPMENT
Dry cleaning, in spite of its name, is a washing
SANITATION process. Steps in the process are roughly similar
to those for washing with water, but the dif-
To protect themselves, personnel working in ferences are important. The equipment used in
the dry-cleaning plant where they are exposed to dry-cleaning fabrics is listed in the Naval Sea
dry-cleaning solvents should receive a physical Systems Command’s Navy Laundry and Dry-
examination on a schedule determined by the Cleaning Equipment Catalog and is currently used
medical officer. Dry-cleaning personnel should in shipboard dry-cleaning plants.
wear clean uniforms, maintain good personal
DRY-CLEANING MACHINE
hygiene, and wash hands frequently, especially
after visiting head facilities or handling soiled The dry-cleaning machines shown in figures
clothing. 6-2 and 6-3 are generally used on most Navy ships.
6-7
Although they look different, they basically dirt it has collected is removed—and back into
operate on the same principles. The dry-cleaning the washer, where the load is rinsed.
machine shown in figure 6-2 is commonly called 3. A portion of the solvent is drained off after
the multimatic (Model Solo) and has a load it passes through the filter. This solvent enters the
capacity of 30 pounds. The dry-cleaning machine distilling unit, where it is completely purified. This
shown in figure 6-3 is the VIC model manufac- is done by heating the solvent until it vaporizes.
tured by the VIC Manufacturing Company The vapor is then run over cold pipes to lower
and the components are shown for your reference. its temperature rapidly and return it to a liquid
The dry-cleaning units used today are much state. After distilling, the solvent again enters the
easier and safer to operate than machines used washing cycle. By this means the total amount of
in the past. They eliminate the job of moving solvent in the machine is kept at an acceptable
solvent-ladened clothes from one machine to level of purity for a long time.
another. You simply load the machine and when 4. At the end of the washing-rinsing period,
the cycle is complete clothes are dry and ready the flow of solvent is automatically shut off and
to press. This lowers the risk of solvent exposure. the machine spins to extract the solvent from the
Listed below is basically what happens to a load load.
during a complete cycle: 5. After extraction, any remaining solvent is
reclaimed during the drying process. This is done
1. The load is placed in the washer basket, by tumbling the garments in a stream of warm
where solvent and soap, with the motion of the air that vaporizes the solvent. The solvent-ladened
machine, carry on the initial washing process. air is passed over a cooling coil, condensed into
2. The solvent travels in a cycle through the liquid solvent, and returned to the stowage tank
washing basket into the filter-where much of the for reuse. The length of the drying cycle depends
6-8
on the setting of the temperature on the Synthetic uniforms should not be pressed on
thermostat. Until the temperature setting is HOT HEAD presses (uncovered polished steel).
reached, the drying cycle continues (normally Synthetics cannot withstand high temperatures
about 12 minutes). The temperature setting, and, therefore, should be done on a dry-cleaning
depending on the garment, should be set between press.
140° to 150°F.
6. Once the desired temperature is reached Steam lines under no more than 75 to 80
and the bulk of the solvent reclaimed, the clothes pounds per square inch pressure should be
are treated with a stream of fresh air. This portion connected to dry-cleaning presses. At this pres-
of the dry-cleaning process is the deodorizing cycle sure the proper amount of moisture and heat
that strips away any remaining odor or solvent is available to properly press the item of
vapor that may still be left in the clothes. apparel.
6-9
In lay No. 3, the left side pocket is even with
Trouser Tops the front edge of the machine and the back center
seam is even with the rear edge of the buck. The
Figure 6-5 gives the sequence of lays for left hip pocket lies in the center of the buck.
pressing trouser tops. With the fly open (lay No. Steam the material lightly and pull the pocket
1), draw the left trouser top over the small end of together.
the buck, having the fly front almost even with In making lay No. 4, draw the trouser top
the front edge of the buck. Steam by using the over the small end of the buck so that the end of
head and applying light pressure, then dry the buck fits well down into the seat of the
thoroughly with the vacuum. trousers and the back seam is directly in the
Again place the left trouser top on the small center of the buck. Apply steam and light
end of the buck as shown in lay No. 2. The pocket pressure and vacuum dry.
should be in the center of the buck. Straighten In making lay Nos. 5, 6, and 7, continue on
the pocket and make certain that the outer edge around the trouser top, pressing the right side.
is even and drawn together. Steam, press, and These lays are not shown as they correspond
dry the lay. closely to lays 3, 2, and 1.
119.35
6-10
When available, the automatic topper press
may be used to press trouser tops. The topper
press eliminates the need for lays discussed above
and also speeds up production. This type of press
is discussed later.
Trouser Legs
Lays for pressing trouser legs are given in
figure 6-6. The first step is to place the front
portion of the left leg on the buck—crotch at the
large end, the inside of the leg facing upward, the
seams lying on the center of the buck (see lay No.
1). Make sure that one seam rests upon the other
for the entire length of the leg. Apply steam to
soften the material and straighten the knee.
Lay the left leg, as shown in lay No. 2, on the
front of the buck so that the front crease is in the
center of the buck and the top of the trouser is at
the large end of the buck in a line with the second
or third button of the fly (or, if zippered, 2 or 3
inches from the bottom) in position so the crease
will extend upward as far as possible.
In lay No. 3, move the trouser leg to the rear of
the buck so that the back crease is lying on the
center of the buck. The leg should be placed so
that at least 4 inches of the seat will be creased.
Extend the crease as high as possible without
wrinkling the crotch.
Lay Nos. 4 (right leg, front portion), 5 (right
leg front crease), and 6 (right leg rear crease) are
substantially the same as lays 1, 2, and 3 of figure
6-6.
Uniform Coats
Check figure 6-7 (lays 1 through 6) and figure
6-8 (lays 7, 11, and 13) for the lays used in
pressing uniforms coats. Place the left side of the
coat collar and the left lapel on the rear of the
large end of the buck and press as shown in lay
No. 1. This operation shrinks the collar at the
gorge seam, restoring the shape of the garment
where it tends to stretch, from the seam at the
shoulder down to about 5 inches below the gorge
seam. Lay No. 2 is similar to lay No. 1 except that
the right side of the collar and the right lapel are
pressed. Make this lay on the front of the large
end of the buck. Lay Nos. 1 and 2 serve to restore
the balance of the coat so that the left front and
right front hang evenly.
After creasing the two sides of the collar,
place the collar on the large end of the buch (see
lay No. 3) so that the center is on the center line
of the buck. In most cases the collar is stretched
while
119.36
6-12
119.37.2
Figure 6-8.-Lays 7, 11, and 13 for pressing uniform coats.
being worn. Distribute the extra fullness over the the bottom of the seam is about 4 inches from the
length of the collar and steam freely. front edge of the buck.
In lay No. 4, place the right front of the coat
at an angle to bring out the chest. Never stretch The center seam in the back of the coat
the front of the coat; gather in the front slightly should be placed in the center line of the buck for
and shrink it to the proper length. Steam well lay No. 7 (fig. 6-8). See that the bottom edge of
before applying pressure, then vacuum dry. the under collar is placed even with the edge of
See that the pocket is smooth. Move the coat the buck. Any fullness in the center seam
forward on the buck for lay No. 5. The small end between the shoulders should be taken in.
of the buck fits into the chest about 1 inch below
the armhole pit and within 2 or 3 inches of the Continue on around the coat, making lay No.
side seam. Any fullness on the dart seam should 8 (left half of coat back), lay No. 9 (left side and
be taken in between the pocket and the armhole pocket), and lay No. 10 (left front edge) to
pit. correspond to lays 6, 5, and 4.
In lay No. 6, place the right half of the back
on the buck so that the lay is about 1 inch from Place the right facing of the coat fronton the
the right armhole and about 2 inches below the buck, facing up as shown in lay No. 11. This lay
collar. The side seam slants in from the armhole; takes in the coat edge from the bottom of the coat
6-13
to a point below the gorge seam. Lay No. 12, for center of the buck in line with the bottom of flap,
the left facing, is the same as No. 11. to avoid crushing buttons, Apply steam fully to
Insert the sleeve former as shown in lay No. take out fullness of knee and vacuum dry.
13 and place on the buck of press. Bring the press Lay No. 8 (right leg, front portion) and lay
head down for light contact only and steam from No. 9 (right leg, outside crease) are substantially
the head and the buck and then apply vacuum the same as lay Nos. 7 and 6.
until dry. Turn the sleeve over without removing
the former and repeat on the other side. The same
methods are applied for the right sleeve. Visible Enlisted Men’s Jumpers
creases from previous pressing can be removed
by rubbing on the buck and steaming with the Figures 6-10 and 6-11 give the sequence of lays
former still in the sleeve. For stubborn creases, for pressing enlisted men’s jumpers. The
wet with a damp cloth, allow to dry, and press procedure is the same for both blues and whites.
as above. Turn the jumper inside out for the entire
Fit the shoulder pad into the sleeve head at pressing operation. Place the body of the jumper
the back seam. After spreading the fullness evenly, on the center of the buck. Apply light pressure,
apply steam and then hold lightly against the head steam, and vacuum dry. See lay No. 1.
allowing the heat to press out the fullness. Next Place the right side of the jumper on the small
follow around to the front of the sleeve, getting end of the buck (lay No. 2), extending from
in far enough to take care of the wrinkles. Work shoulder to bottom. Insert your right hand into
out the wrinkles in the other shoulder. the shoulder seam, smoothing out wrinkles. Apply
Dry-cleaning plants on board some Navy ships steam and vacuum dry.
are equipped with a steam air finisher. This In lay No. 3, place the center of the jumper
equipment can be used to do suit coats and on the small end of the buck about 6 inches above
increase work output. This equipment is discussed the vee. Apply light pressure, steam, and vacuum
later in this chapter. dry.
Lay No. 4 is pressed in the same manner as
Enlisted Men’s Trousers
lay No. 2.
Figure 6-9 shows the sequence of lays for Place the sleeve in the center of the small end
pressing enlisted men’s trousers. The procedure of the buck as shown in lay No. 5, making sure
is the same for both blues and whites. creases correspond with the body crease and the
Turn the trousers inside out for the entire shoulder crease. Smooth out all the wrinkles by
pressing operation. Place the left front of the applying light pressure to avoid crushing buttons
trousers on the small end of the buck, smooth out on cuffs.
the flap, and then apply steam and vacuum dry. Lay No. 6 is pressed in the same manner as
See lay No. 1. lay No. 5.
In lay No. 2, the left side back is placed on In lay No. 7, place the collar in the center of
the small end of the buck, even with the side the buck and fold the sides to meet in the center
crease. Smooth out all wrinkles, apply steam as shown in lay No. 7. Apply plenty of pressure.
freely, and vacuum dry. Then fold the collar again so that the two outside
In making lay No. 3, draw the trouser top over creases are matched evenly. Place on the center
the small end of the buck so that the end of the of the buck and apply plenty of pressure. See lay
buck fits well into the seat of the trousers and the No. 8.
back seam is directly in the center of the buck. In lay No. 9, fold the jumper in the center so
Apply steam and light pressure and vacuum dry. that both sides of the jumper match. Place the
In making lay No. 4 and lay No. 5, continue center fold on the buck, apply light pressure,
on around the trouser top. These lays are not steam freely, and vacuum dry.
shown as they correspond closely to lay Nos. 2
and 1.
In lay No. 6, place the front portion of the STEAM AIR FINISHER
left leg on the buck, crotch at the large end. With
the seam facing up, running parallel to inside When available, use the steam air finisher to
crease, apply light pressure and vacuum dry. finish such items as coats, overcoats, peacoats,
Lay the left leg, as shown in lay No. 7, at the and foul weather jackets. There are three styles
rear of the buck, so the outside crease is in the of air finishers installed aboard Navy vessels. The
6-14
119.38
6-15
119.39.1
Figure 6-10.-Lays 1, 2, 3, and 5 for pressing enlisted men’s jumpers.
Ajax model is illustrated in figure 6-12. These air Operation of the Steam Air
finishers make jobs in large dry-cleaning plants Finisher
quicker and more efficient.
To eliminate problems, you should always
Controls and Indicators operate the air finisher in the automatic mode.
During automatic operation, the dura-tion of the
The controls and indicators you will be steam and hot air cycles is con-trolled by the
concerned with are illustrated in figure 6-13. steam timer and air timer settings. The amount
Table 6-1 illustrates the purpose and use of these of time to set each control depends on the type of
controls and indicators. Controls and indicators material. For most clothing items set the steam
may vary between models; however, the timer for 12 seconds and the air timer for 15
operating principle is the same. Always refer to seconds. If the finisher is set at 0 or above 30 on
your technical manual for correct operating either timer, it will not operate.
procedures.
6-16
LAY 7 - COLLAR
6-17
Figure 6-13.—Steam air finisher controls and indicators.
6-18
Adjust the shoulder of the form to fit the garment 6. Keeping your foot on the switch, insert
by pushing down on the knob at the top of form. wood bars in the sleeves along the seam to within
Insert your hands in the pockets to straighten the 2 inches of the armpit.
linings and the pocket flaps. 7. Release the foot switch to start the
automatic cycle. The automatic cycle can be
2. Overlap the front of the jacket with the
stopped anytime by stepping on the foot switch.
buttons outside and hold the coat firmly, closing 8. When the automatic cycle is complete, the
the front flap with the knee. red light goes off. Remove the vent clamps, release
3. Check and correct the back collar making the foot clamp, remove the sleeves, and remove
sure there is no exposed facing and snap the collar the coat.
form back. The operating procedures above may vary
4. Close the vents using the hand vent clamps, slightly between models, but you should always
one clamp for each vent. consult your manufacturer’s technical manual for
the correct operating procedures.
5. Start the steam before you insert the sleeves
by releasing the foot switch. Once the steam is AUTOMATIC PANTS TOPPER
discharging freely from the sleeves, stop steam by
pressing down on the foot switch. This When available, use the automatic pants
automatically resets the steam cycle timer. topper shown in figure 6-14 to speed up
6-19
production of trouser tops. The automatic pants Check for accumulations of lint on coils when
topper is quicker and eliminates the several lays you remove the lint bag in the evening. Clean the
required to finish trouser tops on a conventional pump lint strainer once each week or more often
press by using air and steam. Steam and air are under heavy use. Never remove this strainer for
set automatically and then released into the air cleaning while the machine is running. Be on the
bag for a desired period of time in which the alert for solvent and grease leaks. Occasionally,
trouser tops are finished. The pants topper can check the timer with a watch. Make sure main-
be run manually or automatically. Refer to your tenance and lubrication charts are followed.
technical manual for correct operating Report requirements for maintenance to your
procedures. supervisor.
6-20
Table 6-2.—Basic Stain Groups
PROTEIN TYPE
TANNIN TYPE
MISCELLANEOUS
6-21
should know before trying to remove a spot or SPOTTING TOOLS AND
stain that the substance and methods to be used EQUIPMENT
will not destroy the fabric or ruin its appearance.
When in doubt about whether a spot or stain can The spotter must know and understand the
be removed without serious damage to the equipment and tools used in spotting operations
material, the spotter should contact the in order to get the best possible results. Spotting
supervisor and obtain his or her advice before tools and equipment consist of the spotting board
starting the work. We have indicated earlier that assembly—main spotting board, sleeveboard,
identification and treatment of some spots are garment tray, chemical tray, and spotting gun;
necessary to keep them from becoming stains. spotting brushes; spatula; chamois and towels;
This is not always possible due to heavy cheesecloth and blotters; magnifying glass; soap
workloads and lack of time to check clothing solution containers; and spotting bottles and
items. In this case a note should be placed in the agents.
plan of the day (POD) by the supply officer asking
the owners of articles requiring spotting to tag
the articles with a note identifying the spots. This Main Spotting Board
information makes the spotter’s job easier, faster,
and more accurate. It also alerts the spotter to do The main spotting board is the spotter’s
spotting before dry cleaning. worktable. (See fig. 6-15.) It is shaped like an
43.93
6-22
ironing board to provide large and small work spotting gun should be held perpendicular when
spaces for articles of different sizes. The board blowing the chemicals or spots off a garment.
is usually a combination of a smooth area and Before using the spotting gun, point it toward the
a perforated or screened area. The smooth surface deck and depress the steam pedal to remove excess
is hard and usually made of glass, marble, or condensation. The spotting gun must be cleaned
Monel metal, all of which are resistant to alkalies daily and all chemicals removed from the nozzle.
and acids. The smooth area is used for tamping
and for applying spotting agents. The perforated Spotting Brushes
or screened area is used for flushing. The
perforated area must be taken apart and steam- Spotting brushes help break up stains so that
cleaned each day to remove excess chemicals or spotting agents can penetrate into and around the
dyes. stains. When the spotting brush is not being used,
the bristles should be pointed downward to allow
Sleeveboard the agents to drain from the bristles. The brush
can also be placed in the brush holder to obtain
The sleeveboard is mounted about 6 inches similar results. When the brushes are used for
above the level of the main spotting board. The tamping, the bristles should hit the fabric flat to
sleeveboard, like the main spotting board, also prevent damaging the fabric. Never brush or scrub
has a flushing and tamping area. The sleeveboard the spot.
is attached to the main board by a movable arm Spoting brushes usually come in two sizes
that can be adjusted. This board is used when (2-inch and 3-inch) and two colors (black and
working out stains on sleeves and other small white) and are made of nylon bristles. The large
areas. Clean the sleeveboard in the same manner brush is used mainly on woolens and synthetics
as the main spotting board. because the bristles are spread far apart. The small
brush has a close set of bristles and is effective
Garment Tray on silk. The black-bristled brush is used for dry-
side spotting and for dark-colored fabrics. The
The garment tray is under the main spotting white-bristled brush is used for wet-side spotting
board, midway between the board and the floor. and light-colored fabrics. After a brush is used
The tray must always be clean; otherwise, the on a garment, clean the brush with the spotting
garment resting in it will be soiled. gun.
All the basic spotting agents are placed on the The spatula is made of stainless steel, bone,
chemical tray. or ivory and is about 1 inch wide and 5 inches
long. The spatula is usually pointed on one end
Spotting Gun and rounded at the other end and is used to
manipulate chemicals, soften the stain, and to get
The spotting gun is used for removing spots better penetration. The pointed end should not
or stains from wool, silk, and synthetics. The gun be used because it will dig into the fabric and
is adjusted so that slight pressure on the steam distort it. The rounded end should be used for
pedal provides steam and more pressure provides better results. After each use the spatula should
hot water or wet steam. If compressed air is piped be cleaned.
to the spotting board, it will come through the
gun when the appropriate foot pedal is depressed. Chamois and Towels
When vacuum is piped to the spotting board, it
is controlled by a foot pedal. However, the A thick, heavy chamois is used for absorbing
vacuum is piped to the perforated area of the water and spotting solutions as they are removed
board to dry and hold the garment in place while from fabrics. The chamois should be spread
spotting. The spotting gun must be held about 4 smoothly over the portion of the spotting board
inches above the garment. If the gun is held closer being used. A medium-weight Turkish towel
than 4 inches from the fabric, the steam or air serves the same purpose. By absorbing cleaning
pressure at 70 to 80 pounds per square inch can chemicals, particularly acids, the absorbent
cause permanent damage to the fabric. The prevents pitting of the spotting board. Keep
6-23
chamois cloths or Turkish towels available for this materials. However, on board ship, squeeze-type
purpose. containers with a dropper top have been found
to be more convenient and satisfactory from the
Cheesecloth and Blotters standpoint of handling and breakage. The
chemical agents commonly used to remove spots
Cheesecloth, because it is soft and absorbent, and stains are listed in table 6-3. Their
is used in spotting or feathering out—picking up characteristics and uses are given, and also the
all the moisture around a spot just removed. This precautions you should take with them.
prevents rings from forming. Chamois, because
of its heavy texture, is not good for feathering out.
You can use blotters for absorbing materials IDENTIFYING SPOTS AND STAINS
rinsed from the garment. You can also use them
to test the resistance of dyes in fabrics to cleaning Once you have learned the basic uses of the
chemicals and/or spotting agents. Put a small equipment, tools, and chemical agents, you must
portion of fabric on a blotter and apply the be able to determine what the spot or stain is
chemical or spotting agent. The amount of before you try to remove it. Through experience
coloring matter dissolved by the chemical and as a spotter, you will be able to easily identify
absorbed by the blotter indicates the effect of the spots and stains. Until you learn, you must be
chemical on the dye. careful because if you try to remove a spot or stain
before properly identifying it you may damage the
Magnifying Glass clothing by using the wrong chemical or spotting
technique. Listed below are several ways to
When in doubt about the substance that identify a spot:
caused a spot or stain, a spotter may examine it
under a magnifying glass. Although an inex- Sight—Sight is the most important and the
perienced spotter may get few results with a quickest way to identify a spot or stain. Is the spot
magnifying glass at first, through practice the built up, built up and absorbed, or absorbed and
spotter will learn to identify various substances visible on the back side? What is its shape? Is
as they appear when magnified. it dull or shiny, smooth- or rough-surfaced,
The magnifying glass is used to observe the or is it rugged with uneven edges? What is
weave and imperfections of the fabric and to the color?
determine if a discoloration on the garment is a
spot or damaged fibers. It helps to determine the Feeling—Is the spot hard, soft, sticky, or
kind of spot or stain and to observe the action brittle? Does it become white when scratched?
of the spotting chemical. The glass can also be
used to determine whether a spot has a staining Odor—Sometimes the odor is so prominent
substance or whether the spot has a chafed area that positive identification of the spot or stain is
with loss of dye. The magnifying glass will help possible without the use of other guides.
you determine if the stained area is too weak to Sometimes a drop of water or a feather of steam
stand treatment and if a spot on a synthetic fabric is required to intensify the odor so you can
was caused by heat damage. positively identify what it is.
6-24
Table 6-3.—Chemicals Used in Spotting
Acetic acid, Clear, colorless liquid, To neutralize alkalis; Bleeds basic dyes.
28% . . . . . . . . . . . pungent odor to restore color; as
general spotting agent
Acetone . . . . . . . . . . Colorless, volatile liquid Solvent for stains from Dissolves cellulose ace-
with agreeable odor; oils, resins, paints, tate and some basic
flammable varnishes, and nail dyes.
polishes
Amyl alcohol . . . . . Clear, colorless liquid; Solvent for formalde- Harmless to all fabrics;
flammable hyde resins bleeds some basic
dyes.
Digestive White or yellow powder Convert albumins, Safe on all fabrics and
agents . . . . . . . . . starches, and sugars dyes unaffected by
into simpler com- water.
pounds which can be
removed
Hydrogen Clear, colorless liquid Spot bleaching; and small Safe in dilute form.
peroxide areas, on spotting
( 3 % ) . . . . . . . board
6-25
Table 6-3.—Chemicals Used in Spotting—Continued
Sodium Clear, colorless, o r Bleach for vegetable and Discolors animal fibers.
hypochlorite . . . . slightly yellow liquid synthetic fibers; to Strong solutions will
remove blood, blue injure vegetable fibers.
stains, grass stains, Follow treatment with
indelible pencil, mildew a sour.
and molds, medicine,
and perspiration stains
Sodium Whitish, slightly opaque, To remove iodine stains Safe on all fabrics and
thiosulfate. . . . . . crystalline substance dyes if rinsed well after
using.
by oil, solvent may remove the spot or stain. An indicates the presence of tannin. Wine and berry
ink spot may be tested as follows: stains are distinguished from ink stains by a
discharge of color. The color of wine and berry
Add a drop of water to the ink spot. If the stains will change from blue to red and back to
ink bleeds easily, it is considered to be water blue with alternate applications of ammonia and
soluble. acid.
Add a drop of acetic acid to the spot. If The spotter removes spots and stains by using
no more color bleeds, then remove the ink spot one or more of four following methods:
by a water and ammonia process of bleeding and
flushing until spot is completely removed. Solution
6-26
Table 6-4.—Spot and Stain Removal Chart
GROUP NO. 1—Albuminous and Simple Food Stains
Step No. 1
(l) Food . . . . . . . . . . . . . Built up, dark, turns white (A) Dampen area with water or steam.
when scratched (B) Apply neutral lubricant or protein type
agent.
(2) Starches . . . . . . . . . . Built up (C) Tamp with brush, flush with water or
steam.
(3) Perspiration . . . . . . . Absorbed
Step No. 2
(4) Blood . . . . . . . . . . . . Dull, absorbed, reddish (A) Dampen area with water or steam.
brown (B) Apply ammonia (WHITE MATERIAL
ONLY).
(5) Mud . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dull, absorbed (C) Tamp with brush, flush with water
or steam.
(6) Discharge . . . . . . . . . Absorbed, built up, dark
or white Step No. 3
(A) Dampen area with water or steam.
(7) Glue . . . . . . . . . . . . . Built up (B) Apply wet spotter.
(C) Tamp with brush, flush with water or
(8) Ice Cream . . . . . . . . Dull, absorbed steam.
fabrics is to dissolve them in solvents. In washing, called emulsifiers. In dry cleaning, emulsifiers are
water is the chief solvent, while in dry cleaning, already part of the dry-cleaning solvent; however,
perchloroethylene is the chief solvent. Most in regular washing, emulsifiers should be added
substances will dissolve in either solvent to the solvent (water) to assist it in efficient stain
mentioned above; however, many will not. These removal.
substances can be removed using appropriate
chemicals. Table 6-4 is a spot and stain removal
chart that lists different types of spots and stains
and the steps and procedures for removing them. CHEMICAL ACTION
The chemicals used in spot removal will mix with
the substance to loosen it so it may be rinsed away. In chemical action, two or more substances
Any clothing articles that are spotted after the combine to produce one or more totally new
wash or dry-cleaning cycle will have to be sent substances. These new substances are normally
through the cycle again to rinse away any very soluble and can be rinsed away easily. A good
chemicals still remaining in the article. This should example of this is when you use an acid to remove
be done before you dry or press the material. an alkaline spot or use an alkali, like ammonia
or sodium bicarbonate, to remove an acid spot.
EMULSIFICATION
When you do this the two substances react
Any substances that help the solvent in chemically to forma soluble salt that can be rinsed
removing stains such as soap or detergent are out of the fabric easily.
6-27
Table 6-4.—Spot and Stain Removal Chart—Continued
Step No. 1
(l) Coffee . . . . . . . . . . . . Dull, absorbed (A) Dampen the area with water.
(B) Apply neutral lubricant or tannin type
(2) Tea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absorbed agent.
(C) Tamp with brush, flush with water or
(3) Liquor . . . . . . . . . . . . Dull, absorbed steam.
(4) Beer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Dull, absorbed, ring around Step No. 2
the outside (A) Dampen area with water.
(B) Apply neutral lubricant and 28% acetic
(5) Soft Absorbed acid.
drinks . . . . . . . . . . (C) Tamp with brush, flush with water or
steam.
(6) Fruit Dull, absorbed
juices . . . . . . . . . . . Step No. 3
(A) Dampen the area with cold water.
(7) Medicine . . . . . . . . . . Absorbed (B) Apply the general formula.
(C) Tamp with brush, flush with cold water
(8) Grass . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smeared, dull absorbed only.
Step No. 4
(A) Dampen the area with water or steam.
(B) Apply rust remover.
(C) Never allow rust remover to come into
contact with spotting board.
(D) Flush with water or steam.
Step No. 5
(A) Dampen the area with water or steam.
(B) Apply digest powder.
(C) Allow digester to remain on stain for at
least 15 min.
(D) Flush with water or steam.
Step No. 6
(A) Dampen the area with water or steam.
(B) Spot bleach (Oxidizing).
( C) Flush with water or steam.
Chemicals must always be used very carefully Mechanical action in spotting is done by using a
because of the danger that they will affect the dye brush, spatula, sponge, or spray gun to work a
or damage the fibers. Note that in several cleansing agent into the fabric. The important
instances in table 6-4, it is recommended that other thing to remember about all mechanical action is
methods be tried first and the chemicals used only that it tends to wear or damage the fabric. Never
for persistent stains. use more force than is necessary and continue the
action only as long as necessary. Consider how
MECHANICAL ACTION
the various fibers react to mechanical action (for
Mechanical action is the simplest method of instance, felting of wool) and avoid actions
spot removal and an aid to all other methods. that will injure them. The spatula particularly
6-28
Table 6-4.—Spot and Stain Removal Chart—Continued
GROUP NO. 3—3 Miscellaneous Stains—Dye, Ink (Wet and Dry), and Rust.
Step No. 1
(1) Ink Absorbed (A) Dampen area with water.
(nonpermanent). . . . (B) Apply rust remover or oil base type
agent.
(2) Ink Absorbed (C) Flush area with water or steam,
(permanent) . . . . . . .
Step No. 2
(3) Dye stains . . . . . . . . Absorbed (A) Dampen area with water
(B) Apply neutral lubricant and acetic acid
or oil base type agent.
(C) Absorb ink with a blotter.
(D) Flush area with water or steam.
Step No. 3
(A) Dampen area with cold water.
(B) Apply general formula.
(C) Tamp with brush.
(D) Flush out with water or steam.
Step No. 4
(A) Dampen area with water.
(B) Apply neutral lubricant and ammonia.
(C) Absorb with a blotter.
(D) Flush area with water or steam.
(E) Dry area completely.
(F) Bleach (reducing).
Step No. 1
(4) Rust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absorbed, reddish color (A) Flush area with water or steam.
(B) Apply rust remover.
(C) Flush area with water or steam.
can cause damage to fabric when not used 2. Always examine the spot first and
properly. try, if possible, to determine what substance
caused it. This procedure was discussed ear-
lier.
STAIN REMOVAL SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS 3. Always make sure the solvent you are
treating the spot with will not affect the garment.
As with any job there are certain precautions This is done by doing a preliminary test in a
you should use when removing stains. They hidden portion of the garment as we discussed
include the following: earlier.
1. Stain removal should take place under the 4. CAUTION: Never use chlorine bleach or
best possible light conditions and with adequate alkalies on any material containing silk, wool, or
ventilation. any other animal fiber.
6-29
5. If you are spotting rayon articles, never 11. When you remove spots and stains from
treat them with organic solvents unless resistance delicate fabrics, you should place the stained
to the treatment is known by a preliminary test portion of the garment over a pad of clean cloth
on an unexposed portion of the garment. or a white blotter and apply the cleaning solution
6. When using chemical agents always allow with a squeeze bottle, a medicine dropper, or a
ample time for the agent to start to act on a spot cleaning sponge may also be used. Allow sufficient
before trying to remove it. time for the cleaning solution to penetrate, but
7. When you use the spatula to help the remove it as soon as possible to prevent damage.
cleaning formula to penetrate the spot, be careful. 12. All chemical agents used in spotting must
Rub the spatula back and forth across the spot be rinsed from the fabric thoroughly before you
using short smooth strokes without applying too dry or press the fabric.
much pressure. This will prevent damage to the
SPOTTING FORMULAS
fabric.
8. Always use the proper spotting brush as Spotting agents are normally available in the
we discussed earlier. The spotting brush should Ship’s Store Contract Bulletin. Ample supplies of
be used in the same manner as the spatula to spotting agents should be obtained before your
prevent damage to the fabric. ship deploys overseas or leaves port for an
9. Avoid excessive friction when treating silk extended period of time. The spotting formulas
or rayon fabrics. Where some friction is necessary, listed in table 6-5 are the ones generally used for
it is recommended you use the wrong side of the removing spots and stains for the purpose
garment. indicated. They are included in this chapter for
10. Do not use the spatula on silk or synthetic your information and should be used when
fabrics. The pressure you can apply on it without satisfactory commercial products are not
causing damage to the fabric will be insufficient available. All ingredients of these formulas are
to do any good. generally available aboard ship.
General Amyl acetate . . . . . . . . . . . 1 part Used with water to remove ink, tannin,
Formula . . . . . . . . Glacial acetic berry, lipstick, and dyestuff stains, or
acid 99% . . . . . . . . . . . . . ½ part stains that contain dyestuff. Safe on
Lactic acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 part all fabrics when cold, but not on all
Oxalic acid crystals dyestuffs.
(by weight) . . . . . . . . . . . ½ part
Synthetic
methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 part
Paint Chloropicrin . . . . . . . . . . . . Good for removing all kinds of paint
remover . . . . . . . . (Use as prescribed by and similar substances.
the manufacturer) Evaporates completely.
Prespotting Ammonia (26%) . . . . . . . . ½ part Used on paint, oil, tar, road oil, and
soap . . . . . . . . . . . Hexalin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 parts asphalt to prevent SETTING during
Oleic acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 parts the dry-cleaning process. Blood and
Water (distilled). . . . . . . . . 1½ parts tannin stains should be removed by
(Can use plain water.) water before you dry clean.
Wet spotters . . . . . . Acetone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 part Wet and dry solvents are used to
Castile soap . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 parts remove soil, paint oils, and greases.
Chloroform . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 part For very severe stains, or large areas,
Ethyl acetate . . . . . . . . . . . 1 part DO NOT USE wet spotters.
Synthetic
methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 part
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 part
6-30
APPENDIX I
GLOSSARY
AI-1
a wash cycle: the break suds, flush suds, two rinse CHAMOIS—Heavy cloth used to absorb
baths, and the sour bath. water and spotting solutions as they are removed
from the fabric.
BENZALDEHYDE—A general spotting
agent used to remove black ink, hair dye, and CHEESECLOTH—Soft, absorbent cloth
some types of shoe polish. used in spotting or feathering out; it picks up all
moisture around a spot just removed.
BREAKBACK—A transfer of an item from
a sales outlet back to the bulk storeroom. CHEMICAL ACTION—An action used in
spotting to remove stains by mixing two or
BREAKOUT—A transfer of material from more substances together on the fabric to
the bulk storeroom to a sales outlet or service produce one or more totally new substances
activity. that are very soluble and can be rinsed away
easily.
BUCK—The worktable of the laundry press
where items are pressed. CHEMICAL AGENTS—Chemicals com-
monly used to remove spots and stains.
BULK LOTS— All divisional laundry,
flatwork (bed linens, tablecloths, and so forth), CHEMICAL DISINFECTANTS—Germi-
and service lots (foodservice personnel, barbers, tidal solutions, sprays, or substances that
hospital corpsmen, and so forth). eliminate or render inactive the bacteria found on
barbering instruments.
BULK SALE—A sale made at cost to
an activity authorized to buy in this man- CHEMICAL SOLUBLE SOILS—Soils that
ner. are soluble or readily dissolvable in chemical
solvents, but are usually not soluble in water and
BULK SALESROOM—A separate cash sales may require special treatment.
unit established in a bulk storeroom from which
bulk sales are made. CHT TANKS—Collection, holding, and
transfer tanks are installed aboard ship for the
BULK STOREROOM—A main storage purpose of handling waste water until further
facility for all or part of the stock in a ship’s store transfer ashore or at sea.
operation. No sales are made from a bulk
storeroom. CLASSIFICATION—The process of
separating laundry for washing according to color,
BULK STOREROOM CUSTODIAN—A type of fabric, and degree of soil.
person in charge of a bulk storeroom. In separate
responsibility operations, the custodian is CLOTHING ITEMS—Standard Navy cloth-
responsible for the stock by quantity on individual ing items.
stock records.
COIL BOX—Housing for the steam coils
CALCIUM—A silver-white, soft metallic located in the top portion of the tumbler dryer.
element that forms a compound with chlo-
rides and sulfates to make hardness in COLOR TRANSFERENCE—The transfer of
water. the color of one fabric onto other fabrics during
the wash cycle.
CASH COLLECTION AGENT—An officer
or enlisted person designated in writing by the COMBINED RESPONSIBILITY OPERA-
ship’s store officer to collect and deposit cash with TION—A ship’s store operation in which one
the disbursing officer for cash received from sales person is responsible for both a sales outlet and
in the ship’s store. the bulk storeroom that supplies that outlet.
AI-2
COMPOSITE RECREATION FUND—A CYLINDER—Part of the washer extractor
fund in which a ship without a ship’s store shares that has three pockets to hold clothes and is
in the profits of the supporting ship’s store. For perforated to allow water and suds in the bottom
example, an SSN/SSBN supported by an AS of the shell to enter and clean clothes during the
receives a share of the ship’s store profits from wash cycle.
the AS to be used as the SSN/SSBN’s recreation
fund. CYLINDER DOOR—Door that allows the
laundry person access to each pocket in the
CONSTANTS—Data maintained in a central cylinder.
file in the ROM system that is used repetitively
to produce various reports and forms. DACRON—A synthetic fiber.
AI-3
temperature rapidly and return them to a liquid DUTY SUPPLY OFFICER—An officer or
state where they reenter the wash cycle. senior petty officer representing the supply
department after normal working hours.
DIVISIONAL LAUNDRY BAGS—Large
nylon bags used for pickup and delivery of EQUIPMENT CAPABILITIES—The output
divisional laundry and other bulk lots. capabilities of a piece of equipment in a given
period of time based on equipment capacity and
DIVISIONAL LAUNDRY PETTY OFFI- time required to complete a cycle.
CER—Petty officers assigned by their respective
divisions whom the laundry supervisor can contact EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE LOG—A
for delivery or pickup of bulk divisional laundry log used to record historical repair data on each
or for resolving any other problems concerning piece of laundry equipment.
the laundry.
EXHAUST DUCT—A rectangular or circular
DIVISIONAL SCHEDULE—A system of enclosure where air is sucked through by a large
scheduling appointments in the barbershop where fan motor and discharged to the outer part of the
a definite number of hours are set aside for ship.
personnel in a particular division to receive
haircuts. EXHAUST FAN—Fan used to remove air
from the basket of the tumbler dryer and force
DRAWSTRING—Device used to tighten the it out through the exhaust duct.
press cover onto the buck of the laundry press.
EXPENDITURE—Removal of stock from
DRUM CONTROL DISK— A disk that the the accountability of a ship’s store officer.
program chart is attached to on the inside of the
programmer. The drum control disk can be EXPENDITURE DOCUMENT—Any
operated automatically or you can turn it document that is assigned an expenditure serial
manually to set it on a particular operation on number.
the program chart.
EXTRACT MOTOR—Motor on the washer
DRY BULB THERMOMETER—A mercury- extractor that spins the cylinder around during
in-glass or alcohol-in-glass thermometer whose extract.
bulb is kept dry and shielded from radiation; used
to record temperatures in the ship’s laundry. FEATHER OUT—A spotting term referring
to the process of gradually dispersing moisture
DRY CLEANING—The process of im- from the center of the stain outward to prevent
mersing soiled and stained garments in dry- leaving water circles or sizing rings.
cleaning solvent to clean them.
FEED RIBBON DRIVE ROLL—A device
DRY-CLEANING STANDARDS—The that turns the feed ribbons on the flatwork ironer.
amount of dry-cleaning work that the dry-cleaning
activity can normally be expected to accomplish FEED RIBBONS—Devices used to feed
in a given period of time. flatwork into the flatwork ironer.
AI-4
and contacts the metal on the drum control disk, GROOMING STANDARDS— Standards set
that particular operation is energized. forth by U.S. Navy Regulations regarding the
appearance of naval personnel.
FISCAL YEAR—A 12-month period selected
for government accounting purposes beginning on GROUP SALE—A sale of merchandise to
1 October and ending 30 September the following a group in which several individual orders have
calendar year. been consolidated. A group sale is made
when individual sales to personnel cannot be
FLANNEL PADS—Pads used on the press made.
buck to provide cushion and good pressing
quality. HANDWHEEL—A device used to open and
secure the shell door to the washer extractor.
FLASH POINT—The lowest temperature at
which the vapors of a liquid form an ignitable HARD WATER—Water that contains an
mixture with the air. appreciable amount of salt; it cannot be used to
wash clothes because it renders the detergent
FLATWORK—Any items that can be safely useless for washing.
processed through the flatwork ironer can be
referred to as flatwork. The most common types HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE— Any sub-
of flatwork are bed linens and tablecloths. stance or mixture of substances that is toxic,
corrosive, irritating, flammable, a strong
FOOT PEDAL—Pedal worked by the foot oxidizer, a strong sanitizer, or that generates
that engages the compression roll on the flatwork pressure through decomposition, heat, or other
ironer. means.
FRAUD—Any theft of funds or merchandise HEAD—The top portion of the laundry press
or a change of official records by an accountable that is brought down against the fabric on the
officer or responsible individual in the ship’s store buck of the press during operation.
operation.
HEAD PRESSURE—The pressure exerted by
FRICTION MATERIAL—6-inch-wide the head against the buck of the press when it is
material that is wound around the feed ribbon in the lowered position.
roll; it has a rough surface so the feed ribbons
will catch properly on the drive roll and be driven HEAT STRESS—A combination of air
properly. temperature, thermal radiation, humidity,
airflow, and workload that may stress the
FUNCTION—A particular process in the body as it tries to regulate body tempera-
ROM system that affects the ship’s store records. ture.
AI-5
—
HYDROFLUORIC ACID—A compound ISSUE—An expenditure of stock for some
commonly referred to as rust remover, it is a further purpose. Issues reduce accountability.
colorless, volatile, fuming, corrosive acid used to
removed rust and tannin stains from clothing. JOG SWITCH—A switch that is depressed
simultaneously with the reverse or forward switch
HYDROGEN PEROXIDE—A mild liquid on the washer extractor to rotate the cylinder of
oxidizing bleach used chiefly for removal of the washer to the proper position for loading or
organic stains such as bloodstains. unloading.
AI-6
LOCAL INFECTION—An infection of the MONETARY—A term used in the ship’s store
skin or scalp indicated by a boil or pimple operation referring to money.
containing pus.
NONMETALLIC INSTRUMENTS—Barber-
MAGNIFYING GLASS—Used to identify ing equipment that is not made of metal.
substances by magnification.
NONPATHOGENIC BACTERIA—Bacteria
MAIN SPOTTING BOARD— A worktable that do not cause disease.
consisting of a smooth area used for tamping and
applying spotting agents and a perforated area NSA—Navy Stock Account is the inventory
used for flushing. of supplies purchased from the Navy Stock Fund
that have not yet been expended to end use.
MANUAL MODE—An equipment mode
NSF—The Navy Stock Fund is a revolving
during which the equipment is operated without
fund that finances the purchase or manufacture
the use of automatic devices.
of supplies and services that are to be taken up
in the Navy Stock Account (NSA).
MANUFACTURE DATE—The date a
particular item of stock was manufactured;
ORLON ACRYLIC—A synthetic fiber
indicated on the container of the item as a
chemically composed of acrylonitrile.
manufacturer’s code. These codes are currently
contained in NAVRESSO INST 4067.4. OVERRING—An incorrect higher price for
an item rung up on a cash register.
MANUFACTURED ITEMS—Items that
require further processing in the snack bar such OXALIC ACID—A poison powder used to
as popcorn. remove rust from clothing.
AI-7
PRECONDITIONING—Preparing heavy PROGRAMMER—A mechanism that
items to be pressed by drying them slightly in the controls all manual and automatic operations of
tumbler dryer to make pressing easier. the washer extractor.
AI-8
RETAIL STORE—A sales outlet where retail SHIP’S STORE AFLOAT CATALOG—
items are sold. Catalog containing luxury and semiluxury items.
It is published and maintained by NAVRESSO.
RETAIL STORE OPERATOR—The person
in charge of a retail store. For combined SHIP’S STORE CONTRACT BULLETIN—
responsibility operations, it also refers to the Catalog containing basic staple-type items
custodian of a retail store and bulk storeroom who required to support the needs of the crew. It is
provides supplies for that store. published and maintained by NAVRESSO.
SHIP’S STORE—The sales outlets and service SPATULA—A knifelike implement made of
activities on board a ship. bone or plastic used to increase the penetration
AI-9
or to spread out thick spotting agents and soften coats, overcoats, peacoats, and foul weather
the stain. jackets.
AI-10
activities or units for the purpose of identification and arrangement of stock, lighting, and signing
on all accounting documents and reports. help increase salability.
AI-11
APPENDIX II
STANDARDS OF CONDUCT
AII-1
compliance with the standards of conduct and regulations. If you are in doubt whether your
related requirements within the Department of the proposed actions or decisions comply to the terms
Navy. of regulation or law, you should consult legal
The contents of this instruction apply to all counsel or, if appropriate, a standards of
naval personnel and, when applicable, to retired conduct counselor or deputy counselor to
naval personnel and members of the Reserve make sure your actions or decisions are the
components. Noncompliance with this instruction proper and lawful conduct of Navy programs and
may result in disciplinary or punitive action. activities.
Appropriate administrative measures must be
taken to prevent and correct noncompliance to
this instruction in a timely manner. Conduct Prejudicial to the
You should become familiar with the Government
following terms because they are mentioned often
during our discussion. Conduct that is prejudicial to the government
tends to injure or impair the attitude of the public
Naval personnel—All civilian officers and toward the government. Whether specifically
employees and all active duty military personnel prohibited or not in this instruction, you should
of the Department of the Navy, including special avoid any action that may be prejudicial to the
government employees and personnel of government. Conduct prejudicial to the govern-
nonappropriated fund instrumentalities. ment might result in or reasonably be expected
to create the appearance of the following:
Gratuity—Any gift, favor, entertainment,
hospitality, transportation, loan, any other Using public office for private gains
tangible item, and any intangible benefit; for
example, discounts, passes, and promotional Giving preferential treatment to any person
vendor training given or extended to, or on behalf or entity
of, naval personnel or their spouses, minor
children, or households, for which a fair market
Impeding government efficiency or
value is not paid by the recipient or the U.S.
economy
Government.
AII-2
Dealing with Business and Industry ACQUIRING CONFLICTING
Representatives FINANCIAL INTERESTS
No matter where you work or what position Naval personnel must avoid acquiring or
you hold, sooner or later you will deal with retaining financial interest that would disqualify
business or industrial representatives. You must them from performing their duties or responsibili-
remember when doing so that you are representing ties. The following are some of the more likely
the government in these business dealings, and situations in which conflicts of interest might
you must make sure that while you handle them, arise. Naval personnel have government duties or
you observe the highest ethical standards. responsibilities related to business entities—
Practices that may be acceptable in the business
world may not be acceptable for naval personnel. with which they, their spouse, their minor
Avoid placing yourself in the position in which children, or household members are associated
a conflict of interest might arise or be suspected. with employees, officers, owners, directors,
Such a conflict of interest may arise or appear to members, trustees, partners, advisors, or
arise when you accept gratuities or engage in any consultants;
activity that would influence or reasonably be
interpreted as influencing the strict impartiality with which they, their spouse, minor
that must be maintained in all business children, or household members are negotiating
relationships involving the government. When or have arrangements for prospective
these business relations become personal, it employment; and
becomes difficult for you to maintain the
impartiality required in your relations with in which they, their spouse, minor
business or industrial representatives. You should children, or household members have interest
at all times make sure any person doing business through ownership of stocks, bonds, securities,
or attempting to do business with the DOD, or or other financial arrangements, such as trusts,
representing such entities, does not try to gain or through participation in pension or retirement
favor or favorable acceptance from you. You plans.
should deny any offers for special treatment from
such persons; follow the rule of strict impartiality Membership in Associations
when dealing with such persons in an official
capacity. When you accept gratuities or favors Naval personnel who are members or officers
from those who have or seek business dealings of nongovernmental associations or organizations
with the DOD, it may result in embarrassment to must avoid activities on behalf of the association
the department and to the naval personnel or organization that are incompatible with their
involved. It may also affect your judgment as the official government positions. SECNAVINST
recipient and impair the judgment of the public 5760.4 sets policy for the Department of the Navy
on the way the government handles its business regarding participation by naval activities and
dealings. It must be stressed that prohibited naval personnel in the activities of private
conflicts and apparent conflicts of interest may associations.
sometimes arise even with relationships and
transactions that the personnel involved may Equal Opportunity
perceive as unimportant. When in doubt about
the propriety of accepting gratuities, attending Naval personnel should scrupulously adhere
functions, or accepting other invitations of a to the DOD program of equal opportunity
hospitable nature, you must refrain. regardless of race, color, religion, sex, age, or
national origin, according to equal opportunity
directives.
Preferential Treatment
Reporting Suspected Violations
In all your business dealings with other
individuals or firms, special treatment must not Naval personnel who have information that
be given unless equivalent treatment is also given causes them to believe someone has violated the
to other individuals or firms who are justifiably standards of conduct should report such
entitled to such treatment. information to their appropriate supervisor. The
AII-3
matter will then be brought to the attention of and immediate subordinates. If the individual
the person concerned for a possible resolution cannot adequately perform his or her official
without further command action unless the duties after such disqualification, he or she must
command determines that such communication discontinue such involvement or be removed from
is not likely to resolve the problem or will that position.
adversely affect a proper investigation of the Naval personnel need not disqualify themselves
matter. under this section for holding shares of a widely
held diversified mutual fund or regulated
Resolving Violations investment company. Such holdings are exempted
as being too remote or inconsequential to affect
The resolution of standards of conduct the integrity of the services of government
violations must be accomplished promptly by one personnel.
or more measures, such as divestiture of
conflicting interests, disqualification for particular Using Inside Information
assignments, changes in assigned duties,
termination, or other appropriate action, as Naval personnel must not use, directly or
provided by statute or administrative procedures. indirectly, inside information to further a private
Disciplinary actions must be taken according to gain for themselves or others if that information
established personnel procedures. is not generally available to the public and was
obtained by reason of their DOD positions.
REGULATIONS GOVERNING THE
CONDUCT OF NAVAL PERSONNEL Using Naval Positions
AII-4
position, full-time naval personnel, except special This general prohibition does not apply to the
government employees and Reserve enlisted situations below:
personnel on active duty for training, are
prohibited from making personal commercial (1) The continued participation in employee
solicitations or sales to DOD personnel who are welfare or benefit plans of a former employee
junior in rank or grade, at anytime, on or off when permitted by law and approved by the
duty. appropriate standards of conduct.
This limitation includes, but is not limited to, (2) The acceptance of unsolicited advertising
the solicitation and sale of insurance, stocks, or promotional items that are less than $5 in retail
mutual funds, real estate, and any other value.
commodities, goods, or services. This prohibition (3) Trophies, entertainment, prizes, or
does not apply to the one-time sale by an awards for public service or achievement or given
individual of his or her own property or privately in games or contests that are clearly open to the
owned dwelling, or to the off-duty employment public or that are officially approved for naval
of naval personnel as employees in retail stores personnel participation.
or other situations not including solicited sales. (4) Things available to the public (such as
In regard to solicitation by civilian personnel, university scholarships covered by DOD Directive
the limitation applies only to solicitation of 1322.6 and free exhibitions by Defense contractors
personnel under the supervision, at any level, of at public trade fairs).
the solicitor. (5) Discounts or concessions extended
throughout the Navy and Marine Corps that are
realistically available to all naval personnel.
Assignment of Reserve Personnel (6) Participation by naval personnel in civic
for Training and community activities when the involvement
of Defense contractors is remote from the business
Naval personnel who are responsible for purposes of any contractor who is sponsoring,
assigning Reserves for training must not assign supporting, or participating in the activity (for
them to duties in which they will obtain example, participation in a little league or
information that could be used by them or their Combined Federal Campaign luncheon that is
private sector employers to gain unfair advantage subsidized by a Defense contractor).
over civilian competitors. (7) Social activities engaged in by officers in
command and other naval officials, or their
representatives, with local civil leaders as part of
Gratuities community relations programs of the Department
of the Navy according to SECNAVINST 5720.44.
Except as discussed later in this section, naval (8) The participation of naval personnel in
personnel and their spouses, minor children, and widely attended gatherings of mutual interest to
members of their households must not solicit, government and industry, sponsored or hosted by
accept, or agree to accept any gratuity for industrial, technical, and professional associations
themselves, members of their families, or others, (not by individual contractors), provided that they
either directly or indirectly from, or on behalf of, have been approved according to DOD Instruc-
a defense contractor. A defense contractor is a tion 5410.20.
person or other entity that fulfills one or more (9) Situations in which participation by naval
of the following criteria: personnel at public ceremonial activities of mutual
interest to industry or local communities and the
Is engaged in or seeks business or financial Department of the Navy serves the interest of the
relations of any sort with any DOD component government and acceptance of the invitation is
approved by the commanding officer or other
Conducts operations or activities that are head of the activity to which the invited personnel
either regulated by a DOD component or are attached.
significantly affected by DOD decisions (10) Contractor-provided transportation,
meals, or overnight accommodations in con-
Has interests that may be substantially nection with official business when arrangements
affected by the performance of the official duties for government or commercial transportation,
of DOD personnel meals, or accommodations are clearly impractical
AII-5
and the individual reports the circumstances in Receipts in Connection with Official
writing to his or her appropriate supervisor as Travel
soon as possible.
(11) Attendance at promotional vendor The acceptance of accommodations,
training sessions when the vendor’s products subsistence, or services, furnished in kind, in
or systems are provided under contract to connection with official travel from sources other
DOD and the training is to facilitate the than those prohibited from our previous
use of those products or systems by naval discussion is authorized only when the individual
personnel. is to be a speaker, panelist, project officer, or
(12) Attendance or participation of naval other bona fide participant in the activity attended
personnel in gatherings, including social events and when such attendance and acceptance is
such as receptions, that are hosted by foreign authorized by the order-issuing authority as being
governments or international organizations, in the overall government interest.
provided that the acceptance of the invitation is Except as noted above, naval personnel may
approved by the commanding officer or other not accept personal reimbursement from any
head of the activity to which the invitee is attached source for expenses incident to official travel,
or, when there is doubt as to the propriety of unless authorized by their commanding officer or
acceptance, b y h i g h e r a u t h o r i t y . ( S e e the head of their activity, consistent with guidance
SECNAVINST 1650.1 for further informa- by the appropriate standards of conduct counselor
tion pertaining to gifts from foreign govern- (pursuant to 5 USC 4111 or other authority).
ments.) Rather, reimbursement must be made to the
(13) Customary exchanges of gratuities government by check payable to the Treasurer of
between naval personnel and their friends and the United States. Personnel will be reimbursed
relatives or the friends and relatives of their by the government according to regulations
spouses, minor children, or members of their related to reimbursement. In no case may naval
household where the circumstances make it clear personnel accept reimbursement, either in kind
that it is that relationship rather than the business or in cash, that is extravagant or excessive in
of the persons concerned that is the motivating nature.
factor for the gratuity and where it is clear that When accommodations, subsistence, or
the gratuity is not paid for by any entity. services in kind are furnished to naval personnel
(14) Situations in which, in the sound by nongovernment sources, appropriate deduc-
judgment of the individual concerned or his or tions must be reported and made in the travel per
her superior, the government’s interest will be diem, or other allowance payable.
served by naval personnel participating in
activities otherwise prohibited. In any such case, Prohibitions of Contributions or
a written report of the circumstances must be Presents to Superiors
made by the individual or his or her appropriate
supervisor in advance of acceptance or, when an Naval personnel must not solicit a contribution
advance report is not possible, within 48 hours from other DOD personnel for a gift to an official
after acceptance, to the appropriate supervisor, superior, make a donation or a gift to an official
if he or she is not otherwise aware of the superior, or accept a gift from other DOD
acceptance, and to the appropriate standards of personnel subordinate to themselves. This
conduct counselor or deputy counselor. requirement, however, does not prohibit gifts or
contributions of nominal value on special
Naval personnel who receive gratuities, or occasions, such as marriage, illness, transfer, or
have gratuities received for them in circumstances retirement, provided any gifts acquired with such
not in conformance with the standards of this contributions do not exceed a reasonable value.
section, must promptly report the circumstances
to the appropriate supervisor for a determination Use of Government Facilities,
as to the proper disposition. The appropriate Property, and Manpower
supervisor must consult with the standards of
conduct counselor or deputy counselor. Naval personnel must not directly or indirectly
Procedures with respect to recruit officer training use, take, dispose of, or allow the use, taking, or
command (ROTC) staff members are set forth in disposing of, government property leased to the
DOD Directive 1215.8. government, for other than officially approved
AII-6
purposes. Government facilities, property, and expected to bring discredit on the government or
manpower (such as stationery, stenographic and the Department of the Navy, or is otherwise
typing assistance, Mimeograph, and chauffeur inconsistent with the requirements of this
services) must be used only for official instruction, including the requirements to avoid
government business. Naval personnel have a actions and situations that reasonably can be
positive duty to protect and conserve government expected to create the appearance of conflicts of
property. These provisions do not prevent the use interests.
of government facilities for approved activities in Enlisted naval personnel on active duty may
furtherance of naval community relations, not be ordered or authorized to leave their post
provided they do not interfere with military to engage in a civilian pursuit, business, or
missions or government business. See professional activity if it interferes with the
SECNAVINST 5720.44 for community relations customary or regular employment of local
guidance. civilians in their art, trade, or profession.
Active duty Regular officers of the Navy and
Use of Civilian and Military Titles Marine Corps may not be employed by any person
or Position in Connection with furnishing naval supplies or war materials to the
Commercial Enterprise United States. If such an officer is so employed,
his or her entitlement to pay ceases for so long
All naval personnel, except special government as he or she is so employed.
employees, are prohibited from using their grade, Off-duty employment of military personnel by
rank, title, or position in connection with any an entity involved in a strike is permissible if the
commercial enterprise or in endorsing any person was on the payroll of the entity before the
commercial product. This does not prevent author beginning of the strike and if the employment is
identification for materials published according otherwise in conformance with the provisions of
to DOD procedures. A commercial enterprise is this instruction. After a strike begins and while
any entity that engages in activities that produce it continues, no military personnel may accept
income as defined in Int. Rev. Code of 195461, employment by that involved entity at the strike
and that has not been exempted from paying location.
income taxes pursuant to Int. Rev. Code of 1954, Naval personnel are encouraged to engage in
501(a). teaching, lecturing, and writing. Naval personnel,
All retired military personnel and all members however, must not, either for or without com-
of Reserve components, not on active duty, are pensation, engage in activities that are depend-
permitted to use their military titles in connection ent on information obtained as a result of
with commercial enterprises, provided that they their government employment, except when the
indicate their Inactive Reserve or Retired status. information has been published or is generally
If, however, such use of military titles in any way available to the public, or it will be made generally
casts discredit on the Department of the Navy available to the public and the official authorized
or the Department of Defense or gives the to release such information to the public gives
appearance of sponsorship, sanction, endorse- written authorization for the use of nonpublic
ment, or approval by the Department of the Navy information on the basis that the use is in the
or the Department of Defense, it is prohibited. public interest.
In addition, commanders of overseas installations Civilian Presidential appointees in the
may further restrict the use of titles including use Department of the Navy must not receive
by retired military personnel and members of compensation or anything of monetary value for
Reserve components, not on active duty, in any consultation, lecture, discussion, writing, or
overseas areas. appearance, the subject matter of which is devoted
substantially to naval responsibilities, programs,
Outside Employment of DOD or operations or that draws substantially from
Personnel official material that has not become part of the
body of public information.
Naval personnel must not engage in outside
employment or other outside activity, with or Gambling, Betting, and Lottery
without compensation, that interferes with, or is
not compatible with, the performance of their While on government owned, leased, or
government duties, that may reasonably be controlled property, otherwise while on duty for
AII-7
the government, naval personnel must not partici- semiannually, in a manner that will ensure
pate in any gambling activity, including a lottery familiarity and compliance with the pertinent
or pool, a game for money or property, or the provisions of this instruction by all personnel.
sale or purchase of a number slip or ticket. The (This is a continuing requirement and is in
only exceptions are for activities that have been addition to the initial briefing required.)
specifically approved by the Secretary of the
Navy. Establish and execute the procedures and
controls established in this instruction so that all
Indebtedness naval personnel within the organization who are
required to file confidential statements of
Naval personnel must pay their just financial affiliations and financial interests (DD Form
obligations in a timely manner, particularly those 1555) do file them in a timely manner, and
imposed bylaws (such as federal, state, and local that such statements are promptly and carefully
taxes), so that their indebtedness does not reviewed.
adversely affect the government as their employer.
The Department of the Navy is not required to Make determinations pursuant to
determine the validity or amount of disputed SECNAVINST 5370.2 and 18 USC 208(b) with
debts. respect to disqualification of personnel within the
organization from performing duties in which
RESPONSIBILITIES FOR ACTIONS they have conflicts or apparent conflicts of
interests.
The basic responsibility for complying with the
requirements of this instruction rests with Make sure reservists detailed to perform
individual personnel concerned, but the primary active duty for training at the organization are
responsibility for ensuring such compliance must assigned duties that will minimize the possibility
rest with officers exercising command or similar that they may obtain information that could be
authority over personnel. Each commanding used by them or their employers to gain an unfair
officer or head of a command, a bureau, an advantage over civilian competitors.
office, or an activity is specifically responsible for
the following actions: Receive and take prompt and appropriate
action on reports concerning acceptance of
Review applicable information contained gratuities or other violations of SECNAVINST
in SECNAVINST 5370.2 to all naval personnel 5370.2 or related statutes by personnel within the
within his or her organization at least organization.
AII-8
APPENDIX III
REFERENCES
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Manual of Naval Preventive Medicine, NAVMED P-5010, Chapter 1,
Bureau of Medicine and Surgery, Washington, DC.
Ship Store Afloat, NAVSUP P487, Chapters 1,2,3, and 9 and Appendix
D, Revision 3, Naval Supply Systems Command, Washington, DC.
Chapter 3
Navy Safety Precautions For Forces Afloat, OPNAVINST 5100.19, Office
of the Chief of Naval Operations, Washington, DC.
AIII-1
Storage and Materials Handling, DOD Instruction 4145.19-12-1,
Department of Defense, Washington, DC.
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
AIII-2
Ships Store Afloat, NAVSUP P-487, Chapter 2 and Appendix D, Revision
3, Naval Supply Systems Command, Washington, DC.
AIII-3
INDEX
A C
INDEX-1
Dry-cleaning operation—Continued F
dry-cleaning personnel, 6-1
dry-cleaning schedule, 6-1 to 6-3 Flatwork ironer, 5-38 to 5-42
adjusting the schedule, 6-3 Fleet accounting and disbursing centers, 1-3
deadline for receipt, 6-2 Fleet assistance teams, 1-2 to 1-3
dry-cleaning equipment capabilities,
6-2
dry-cleaning standards, 6-2
group or class scheduling, 6-2 to 6-3 G
types of services, 6-2
dry-cleaning security, 6-1 Garment tray, 6-23
dry-cleaning solvent, 6-4 to 6-7 Glossary, AI-1 to AI-11
first aid, 6-5 to 6-6
eye contact, 6-6
inhalation, 6-6
skin contact, 6-6 H
health hazards, 6-5
safe handling and use of dry-cleaning Handling cash from sales, 2-11 to 2-13
solvent, 6-4 to 6-5 Hazardous materials, 3-14
stowage of the dry-cleaning solvent, Heat stress log, 5-4
6-6 to 6-7
maintenance of dry-cleaning presses, 6-20
methods used in spotting, 6-26 to 6-30
chemical action, 6-27 to 6-28 I
emulsification, 6-27
mechanical action, 6-28 to 6-29 Insoluble soils, 5-14
solution, 6-26 to 6-27 Inventory, 2-25 to 2-26
spotting formulas, 6-30
stain removal safety precautions,
6-29 to 6-30
L
receiving and identifying, 6-3 to 6-4
classifying, 6-4
Laundry detergent, 5-15
dry-cleaning list and tags, 6-3
Laundry logs, 5-3 to 5-4
inspection, 6-3
Laundry personnel, 5-2 to 5-3
prespotting, 6-4
Laundry pressing and finishing, 5-42 to 5-46
sanitation, 6-7
Laundry schedules, 5-7 to 5-8
spots and stains, 6-20 to 6-26
Laundry security, 5-6
identifying spots and stains, 6-24 to
6-26
spotter, the, 6-21 to 6-22
spotting, 6-20 to 6-21 M
spotting tools and equipment, 6-22 to
6-24 Magnifying glass, 6-24
chamois and towels, 6-23 to 6-24 Main spotting board, 6-22 to 6-23
cheesecloth and blotters, 6-24 Moneybags, 2-21
chemical tray, 6-23
garment tray, 6-23
magnifying glass, 6-24
main spotting board, 6-22 to 6-23 N
sleeveboard, 6-23
soap solution containers, 6-24 Naval Supply Systems Command, 1-2 to 1-3
spatula, 6-23 Navy Resale and Services Support Office, 1-2
spotting bottles and agents, 6-24 Navy Resale Program, 1-2
spotting brushes, 6-23 Night depository safe, 2-21
spotting gun, 6-23 Nonpathogenic bacteria, 4-5
INDEX-2
O Operation of the sales outlets—Continued
operation of the retail store, 2-5 to
Operation of the sales outlets, 2-1 to 2-7
2-34 authorized customers, 2-5 to 2-6
amusement machines, 2-32 to 2-33 foreign governments, 2-6
cash collections, 2-20 to 2-24 merchant ships, 2-6
accounting for cash, 2-22 to 2-24 official government organiza-
cash receipt book, 2-22 to 2-23 tions, 2-6
cash register record, 2-23 to 2-24 other military activities, 2-6
cash delivered by the sales outlet service-type ships, 2-6
operator, 2-20 to 2-21 survivors of marine and aircraft
cash left in the cash register disasters, 2-6
overnight, 2-21 hours of operation, 2-6 to 2-7
moneybags, 2-21 policy signs, 2-7
night depository safe, 2-21 pricing policies, 2-10 to 2-11
cash transactions, 2-13 to 2-20 clothing, 2-10
cash register malfunctions, 2-15 displaying prices, 2-11
overrings and underrings, 2-15 to markdowns, 2-11
2-16 mark-ons, 2-10
personal and traveler’s checks, 2-13 markup, 2-10
to 2-14 prices to other military activities,
personal checks returned by the 2-11
bank, 2-16 to 2-18 sanitation and cleanliness, 2-26
putting money in the register, 2-14 security, 2-24 to 2-25
refunds, 2-15 breakin to a ship’s store space,
special-type sales, 2-18 to 2-20 2-24
bulk sales, 2-18 to 2-19 fraud, 2-24 to 2-25
group sales, 2-18 ship’s store, 2-1 to 2-5
traveler’s checks, 2-19 to 2-20 accountability and responsibility, 2-2
taking the customer’s money, 2-14 to to 2-5
2-15 assigning responsibilities, 2-4
display of merchandise, 2-7 to 2-10 letters of assignment, 2-4
arranging displays, 2-9 to 2-10 multiple sales outlet operators,
decorations, 2-9 to 2-10 2-4 to 2-5
equipment condition, 2-9 separate and combined responsi-
fixtures, 2-9 bilities, 2-4
layout, 2-9 establishing a ship’s store, 2-1 to
location, 2-9 2-2
signs, 2-9 precommissioned ships, 2-2
attractive, 2-8 unauthorized activites, 2-2
correlated, 2-9 purpose of the ship’s store, 2-2
easily seen, 2-8 snack bar, 2-33 to 2-34
neatly arranged, 2-8 cash collections, 2-33
quickly identified, 2-8 cost control, 2-33
readily accessible, 2-8 operating goal, 2-33
handling cash from sales, 2-11 to production records, 2-33
2-13 multiple operators, 2-34
cash registers, 2-12 to 2-13 prices, 2-33
cash register keys, 2-12 to 2-13 retail snack bar items, 2-34
cash register tapes, 2-13 sanitation of the snack bar, 2-34
location of the register, 2-12 vending machines, 2-26 to 2-32
change funds, 2-13 locked money boxes, 2-28
inventory, 2-25 to 2-26 delivery by the vending machine
restocking, 2-26 operator 2-28
storing for sea, 2-26 optional procedures, 2-28
INDEX-3
.
INDEX-4
Ship’s laundry, 5-1 to 5-56 Ship’s laundry—Continued
assembly and issue, 5-54 to 5-56 laundry personnel, 5-2 to 5-3
assembly of bulk lots, 5-55 laundry supervisor, 5-2 to 5-3
assembly of individual lots, 5-54 to other laundry personnel, 5-3
5-55 laundry pressing and finishing, 5-42 to
handling finished laundry, 5-55 5-46
handling sendbacks, 5-56 laundry presses, 5-43
issuing laundry, 5-55 to 5-56 operation of the laundry press, 5-46
quality assurance, 5-55 press layouts, 5-44 to 5-45
charges for laundry service, 5-1 to 5-2 safety features, 5-46
claims for damaged or lost clothing, types of laundry presses, 5-43
5-56 laundry schedules, 5-7 to 5-8
disposal and environmental protection, laundry security, 5-6
5-7 maintenance of presses, 5-46 to 5-48
fabrics, 5-13 changing pads, 5-47 to 5-48
flatwork ironer, 5-38 to 5-42 cleaning press heads, 5-47
care and maintenance, 5-41 to 5-42 operating the tumbler dryer, 5-36 to 5-38
changing combination pads and drying techniques, 5-37 to 5-38
covers, 5-42 general maintenance, 5-38
friction material on return operation of the Pellerin Milnor washer
ribbon drive roll, 5-42 extractor, 5-27to 5-31
ironer ribbons, 5-42 automatic operations, 5-29
waxing the ironer, 5-42 maintenance of the shipboard washer
feeding the flatwork ironer, 5-40 to extractors, 5-30 to 5-31
5-41 manual operation, 5-29 to 5-30
large items, 5-41 Milnor controls and indicators, 5-27
small items, 5-41 to 5-29
ironer controls, 5-38 to 5-39 safety features, 5-29
operation of the flatwork ironer, operation of the washer extractor (Edro
5-40 model), 5-19 to 5-26
safety precautions, 5-39 to 5-40 automatic operation, 5-25 to 5-26
handling lots, 5-9 to 5-13 description of the programmer, 5-22
identifying bulk lots, 5-9 to 5-10 to 5-23
identifying individual lots, 5-10 to loading and unloading, 5-26
5-12 manual operation, 5-26
location of the laundry mark, preoperational checks, 5-24 to 5-25
5-11 to 5-12 program chart, 5-23 to 5-24
steps in identifying individual automatic supply, 5-24
lots, 5-11 temperature control, 5-23 to
ribbon-type laundry marking 5-24
machines, 5-12 to 5-13 water levels, 5-24
care and maintenance of laundry safety features, 5-24
marking machines, 5-12 to washer extractor controls, 5-19 to 5-22
5-13 press lays, 5-48 to 5-54
operating ribbon-type machines, finishing other articles, 5-48 to 5-54
5-12 press lays for shirts, 5-48
ships without laundry marking press lays for trousers, 5-48
machines, 5-13 processing laundry, 5-8 to 5-9
heat stress, 5-4 to 5-6 receiving bulk lots, 5-8
laundry detergent, 5-15 receiving individual lots, 5-8 to 5-9
laundry logs, 5-3 to 5-4 rinsing, 5-15 to 5-19
bulk work and press deck logs, 5-3 laundry sour, 5-15 to 5-19
to 5-4 starch, 5-19
equipment maintenance log, 5-4 safety, 5-1
heat stress log, 5-4 sanitation, 5-1
INDEX-5
Ship’s laundry—Continued Standards of conduct—Continued
securing fittings and equipment, 5-56 SECNAVINST 5370.2—Continued
stowage and handling of laundry regulations governing the conduct of
supplies, 5-6 to 5-7 naval personnel, AII-4 to AII-8
handling laundry sour, 5-7 affiliations and financial interest,
handling starch, 5-7 AII-4
handling two-shot detergent, 5-7 assignment of reserve personnel
tumbler dryer, 5-31 to 5-36 for training, AII-5
controls and indicators, 5-32 to 5-34 commercial soliciting by naval
primary lint traps, 5-34 personnel, AII-4 to AII-5
secondary lint traps, 5-34 to 5-36 dealing with present and former
steam coils, 5-36 military and civilian personnel,
tumbler dryer fires, 5-36 AII-4
types of soil, 5-13 to 5-14 gambling, betting, and lottery,
chemical soluble soils, 5-13 AII-7 to AII-8
insoluble soils, 5-14 gratuities, AII-5 to AII-6
special soils, 5-14 indebtedness, AII-9
water soluble soils, 5-14 outside employment of DOD
wash water, 5-14 personnel, AII-7
types of hard water, 5-14 prohibitions of contributions or
water softening methods, 5-14 presents to superiors, AII-6
washer extractors, 5-19 receipts in connection with
washing, 5-13 official travel, AII-6
washing formulas, 5-15 use of civilian and military titles
Ship’s store, 2-1 to 2-5 or position in connection with
Sleeveboard, 6-23 commercial enterprise, AII-7
Snack bar, 2-33 to 2-34 use of government facilities,
Soap solution containers, 6-24 property, and manpower,
Soil, types of, 5-13 to 5-14 AII-6 to AII-7
Spots and stains, 6-20 to 6-26 using inside information, AII-4
Spotting formulas, 6-30 using naval positions, AII-4
Spotting, methods used in, 6-26 to 6-30 responsibilities for actions, AII-8
Spotting tools and equipment, 6-22 to 6-24 Steam air finisher, 6-14 to 6-19
Standards of conduct, AII-1 to AII-8 Stowage, 3-1 to 3-16
Department of Defense standards of bulk storeroom stowage, 3-1 to 3-9
conduct, AII-1 maintaining financial accountability,
actions by NAVRESSO, AII-1 3-3 to 3-9
ship’s store policy, AII-1 errors in receiving, 3-3
SECNAVINST 5370.2, AII-1 to AII-8 movement of stock, 3-3 to 3-5
acquiring conflicting financial security controls, 3-5
interests, AII-3 to AII-4 spot check inventories, 3-5 to 3-7
equal opportunity, AII-3 tax-free tobacco products, 3-7 to
membership in associations, 3-9
AII-3 range of responsibilities, 3-2 to 3-3
reporting suspected violations, responsibility of bulk storeroom
AII-3 to AII-4 custodians, 3-1 to 3-2
resolving violations, AII-4 special stowage, 3-14 to 3-16
policies governing the conduct of hazardous materials, 3-14
naval personnel, AII-2to AII-3 dangerous materials, 3-14
conduct prejudicial to the safe materials, 3-14
government, AII-2 semisafe materials, 3-14
dealing with business and special stowage of ship’s store stock,
industry representatives, AII-3 3-15 to 3-16
personal judgment, AII-2 candy, 3-16
preferential treatment, AII-3 canned drinks, 3-16
INDEX-6
Stowage—Continued T
special stowage—Continued
special stowage of ship’s store Tumbler dryer, 5-31 to 5-36
stock—Continued
clothing, 3-15
film, 3-16 U
flammable ship’s store stock,
3-15 Underrings and overrings, 2-15 to 2-16
food products and snack bar
items, 3-15 to 3-16
tobacco, 3-16 V
stowage of ship’s store stock, 3-9 to 3-14
fundamentals of good stowage, 3-9 Vending machines, 2-26 to 2-32
to 3-11 locked money boxes, 2-28
manual handling, 3-11 to 3-14 servicing the vending machines, 2-30 to
accessibility of stock, 3-12 2-31
arrangement of stock, 3-12 to vending machine cash collections, 2-27 to
3-13 2-28
issue and rotation, 3-13 vending machine controls, 2-28 to 2-29
markings of stock, 3-12 vending machine sanitation, 2-31 to
storeroom maintenance, 3-13 2-32
ventilation and humidity control,
3-14
safety, 3-11 W
storeroom security, 3-14
Supply automation, 1-1 Washer extractors, 5-19
Supply department afloat, 1-3 to 1-5 Water soluble soils, 5-14
Supply system, 1-1 Wet disinfectant, 4-6
INDEX-7
Assignment Questions
1
1-5. Auditing ship’s store returns, IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 1-9 THROUGH
paying dealers’ bills, and 1-12, SELECT FROM COLUMN B THE
reconciling differences with DIVISION RESPONSIBLE FOR THE FUNCTION
documents covering receipts LISTED IN COLUMN A.
from purchase and receipts from
other supply officers are some A. FUNCTIONS B. DIVISIONS
of the responsibilities of what
activity? 1-9. Operate and 1. s-1
maintain the
1. FAADC vending 2. s-2
2. NAVRESSO machines
3. NAVSUP aboard ship 3. s-3
4. NAVMASSO
1-10. Maintain the 4. s-4
military pay
Learning Objective: Explain records
the mission, functions,
organization, and 1-11. Account for
responsibilities of an afloat consumables, equipage,
supply department. repair parts, and
other material as
required
1-6. The mission of the afloat
supply department is to provide 1-12. Operate and manage
the material and service needs the general mess
of the ship.
1. True
2. False Learning Objective: Explain
the factors that pertain to the
1-7. The supply officer is security of supply department
responsible to the commanding spaces aboard ship.
officer for the proper
operation and administration of
which of the following 1-13. Before unauthorized personnel
functions? can be allowed into supply
department spaces, final
1. Procurement and receipt of approval must be granted by
repair parts which of the following
2. Operation of the ship’s individuals?
store
3. Operation of the general 1. The supply officer
mess 2. The leading petty officer
4. All of the above 3. The ship’s master-at-arms
4. The person in charge of the
1-8. When the supply officer assigns space
an assistant supply officer to
the duty of ship’s store 1-14. Keys to supply department
officer, what official, if any, spaces may be taken off the
must approve the assignment? ship overnight by the person in
charge of the space providing a
1. Commander, Naval Supply key log is maintained
Systems Command identifying the holder of the
2. Director, Ship’s Store key.
Division (SSD),
NAVRESSO 1. True
3. Commanding officer 2. False
4. None
2
SUPPLY DEPARTMENT SPACES ARE DIVIDED 1-22. The ROM system is included
INTO GROUPS TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE under what security
SECURITY IN WORKING SPACES. IN classification?
ANSWERING QUESTIONS 1-15 THROUGH 1-18,
SELECT FROM COLUMN B THE SECURITY 1. Routine
GROUP FOR WHICH THE SPACE LISTED IN 2. Secret
COLUMN A IS ASSIGNED. 3. Classified
4. Unclassified
A. SPACES B. GROUPS
1-23. What individual is required to
1-15. Ship’s 1. I input user IDs and passwords
galley into the ROM system on a
2. II need-to-know basis?
1-16. Ship’s
laundry 3. III 1. The security officer
2. The supply officer
1-17. General 4. IV 3. The ship’s store officer
stores 4. The leading Ship’s
storeroom Serviceman
1-18. Ship’s store bulk 1-24. Once users have been given
storeroom access to the ROM system, their
names will be included in the
ROM security access list which
1-19. What should the Storekeeper in is maintained in what location
charge of a Group I space do in a sealed envelope?
with the key to the space at
the end of the workday? 1. File SSA-17
2. Ship’s store officer’s safe
1. Retain it until the next 3. The supply officer’s safe
day 4. File SSA-21
2. Return it to the general
key locker in the supply
office Identify
3. Turn it over to the duty Learning Objective:
supply officer the factors that pertain to the
4. Turn it over to the leading security of Group III and Group
SK IV spaces.
3
1-26. When available from supply, 1-31. The inside perimeter of the
which of the following items removable sales windows to the
should be installed on doors retail store is secured by
leading to Group III spaces in using what securing device(s)?
addition to dead bolt locks?
1. A car seal
1. Keyless combination locks 2. Bars
2. Key-type padlock 3. Slip locks
3. Key-type lock with 4. Key locks
high-security shackle
4. Key-type lock used in 1-32. What additional security
conjunction with a numbered measure should the custodian of
car seal the bulk storeroom take when
the contents of the bulk
1-27. When installing hasps on doors storeroom are visible from the
leading to Group III spaces, outside?
what should you use to secure
the hasp to the door? 1. Keep all high-cost,
small-cube items out of
1. Screws sight or break them out to
2. Pop rivets the retail store
3. Tamperproof bolts 2. Make sure adjacent
4. Nails passageways are well
lighted
1-28. What action, if any, should be 3. Make sure security watches
taken for exposed hinge pins on check the bulk storeroom at
hasps installed on doors varying intervals
leading to Group III spaces? 4. Each of the above
1. Make a note of the problem 1-33. Group III spaces should not be
to the ship’s security reentered after working hours
patrol and have the space by the responsible custodian
checked more often unless circumstances warrant it
2. Use an additional hasp with and final approval is obtained
the appropriate lock from what individual, if any?
3. Tack weld the hinge pins to
prevent removal 1. Ship’s store officer
4. None 2. Duty supply officer
3. Leading Ship’s Serviceman
1-29. After the custodian of the 4. None
Group III space changes the
combination of the lock that 1-34. Merchandise exceeding what
secures the space, the new retail value should NOT be left
combination is sealed in an in the display windows of the
envelope and turned over to retail store after working
what holding individual? hours?
1. The leading Ship’s 1. $50
Serviceman 2. $40
2. The ship’s store officer 3. $35
3. The supply officer 4. $25
4. The security manager
1-35. The key or combination to the
1-30. For security, duplicate keys to padlock securing the coin box
Group III spaces are placed in in the vending machine is kept
a sealed envelope, signed and by which of the following
dated across the flaps by the individuals?
ship’s store officer and the
responsible custodian, and 1. Ship’s store officer
placed in the ship’s store 2. Supply officer
officer’s safe. 3. Vending machine operator
4. Commanding officer
1. True
2. False
4
1-40. What security precaution is
1-36. The locks installed by the taken with regard to duplicate
manufacturer on the outside of keys to Group IV spaces?
vending machines are considered
adequate for security 1. Kept in a sealed envelope
purposes. in the supply officer’s
safe
1. True 2. Kept by the supply officer
2. False in a special duplicate key
locker in the supply office
1-37. When locked money boxes are or in the supply officer’s
used in the vending machine, safe
the keys that lock the money 3. Kept in the general key
box itself into the vending locker in the supply office
machine are kept by what 4. Kept by the leading Ship’s
individual? Serviceman for access into
ship’s store spaces after
1. Vending machine operator normal working hours
2. Supply officer
3. Agent cashier
4. Person making collections Learning objective: Explain
the procedures for emergency
1-38. With what security measure are entry into Group III spaces.
the duplicate keys to the
locked money boxes in the
vending machines handled? 1-41. Emergency entry procedures are
included in supply department
1. Kept in a special duplicate instructions and should be
key locker in the supply posted outside which of the
office following spaces?
2. Sealed in an envelope and
kept in the supply 1. Group I
officer’s safe 2. Group II
3. Sealed in an envelope and 3. Group III
kept in the ship’s store 4. Group IV
officer’s safe
4. Retained by the responsible 1-42. If the ship’s store officer has
custodian until relieved to enter a Group III space in
the absence of the responsible
1-39. Where are the working keys to custodians such entry
the ship’s laundry kept after made in the presence of at
normal working hours? least how many witnesses?
1. In the custody of the 1. One
Ship’s Serviceman in charge 2. Two
of the laundry 3. Three
2. In the custody of the duty 4. Four
supply officer
3. In the custody of the 1-43. How should the ship’s store
leading Ship’s Serviceman officer secure a Group III
4. Inside the general key space after he or she has
locker in the supply office entered it and is ready to
secure it?
1. Replace the lock and attach
a car seal
2. Replace the lock after
changing the combination
3. Replace the lock and add a
key-type lock
4. Lock it with a different
keyless padlock
5
1-44. After a Group III space has 1-47. On a commissioned ship, what
been entered by the ship’s action is required by the
store officer, how long should commanding officer to establish
the witnesses remain a ship’s store?
thereafter?
1. Receive approval from the
1. Until the space is secured ship’s type commander
2. Until the responsible before establishing the
custodian returns ship’s store
3. Until the command duty 2. Send an official letter to
officer arrives the Naval Supply Systems
4. They do not have to remain Command informing them the
day the ship’s store will
begin operations
1-45. Which of the following actions 3. Send an official letter to
should be taken by the the Navy Resale and
responsible custodian of a Services Support Office
Group III space that was informing them the day the
entered under emergency ship’s store will begin
conditions? operations
4. Send an official letter to
1. Reseal the combination and the fleet accounting and
duplicate keys to the dead disbursing center
bolt in separate envelopes requesting approval to
and replace them in the establish a ship’s store
ship’s store officer’s safe
2. Change the combination to 1-48. On a precommissioned ship, a
the lock ship’s store may be established
3. Verify the car seal number after which of the following
4. All of the above conditions is met?
1-46. What individual may enter a 1. The prospective disbursing
Group III space in the presence officer has reported aboard
of two witnesses when an 2. Approval of the ship’s type
emergency exists and the ship’s commander has been received
store officer or responsible 3. The prospective supply
custodian is not available? officer has reported aboard
4. Approval for establishment
1. Duty section leader of a ship’s store has been
2. Duty storekeeper received from the Naval
3. Command duty officer Supply Systems Command
4. Leading Ship’s Serviceman
1-49. Activities operating within the
Questions 1-47 through 1-75 ship’s store must be authorized
refer to chapter 2 of the text. by what officer?
1. The ship’s store officer
Learning Objective: Identify 2. The supply officer
practices and procedures 3. The commanding officer
applicable to the establishment 4. The type commander
and operation of the ship’s
store afloat. 1-50. Ship’s stores are operated to
fulfill which of the following
purposes?
1. Provide a source of funds
for welfare and recreation
2. Promote morale
3. Provide a source of
articles necessary for
day-to-day living
4. All of the above
6
1-55. When a retail store is operated
1-51. TO provide customers with a by more than one person, which
convenient and reliable source of the following requirements
for obtaining the most needed must be met?
articles, the retail store
operator must keep the most 1. Cash should be collected at
popular items in stock at all the end of each shift
times using which of the 2. Inventory should be taken
following references? monthly
3. Approval must be obtained
1. NAVSUP P-487 from the ship’s type
2. The list of basic stock commander
items 4. All of the above
3. The ship’s Store Afloat
Visual Merchandising Guide
4. The Ship’s Store Afloat
Catalog Learning Objective: Explain
the general policies that
1-52. Which of the following govern the operation of the
individuals is accountable for sales outlets aboard ship.
the operation of the retail
store?
1-56. Purchases made from the sales
1. The retail store operator outlets in the ship’s store
2. The ship’s store officer operation may be used by the
3. The leading Ship’s purchaser for which of the
serviceman following purposes?
4. The disbursing officer
1. For sale to a friend
1-53. Before you can be assigned 2. For the personal use of a
responsibilities in the ship’s friend
store operation, the ship’s 3. For the personal use of the
store officer is required to purchaser or his or her
perform which of the following dependent(s)
actions? 4. For barter with another
person
1. Send you to ship’s
Serviceman C school 1-57. Which of the following
2. Assign responsibilities in personnel are NOT authorized to
writing use the ship’s store?
3. Administer a performance
test 1. Foreign service personnel in
4. Update your personal a foreign port
training record 2. Enlisted Marine Corps
personnel en route to duty
1-54. Which of the following 3. Public Health Service
operations would be considered Personnel on board for
a combined responsibility training
operation? 4. Officers of the Coast Guard
on board for training
1. A service activity and bulk
storeroom supplying that 1-58. A third class petty officer
service activity operated comes to the standard Navy
by different persons clothing store to make a
2. A sales outlet and bulk purchase. Which of the
storeroom supplying that following items should NOT be
sales outlet operated by sold to the petty officer?
the same person
3. A can drink vending machine 1. Neckerchief
and bulk storeroom 2. Third class chevron
supplying that vending 3. E-7 insignia
machine operated by 4. White service dress jumper
different people
4. All of the above
7
1-59. Sales of ship’s store stock and 1-64. What minimum number of hours
nondistinctive items may be per week should the retail
made to merchant ships in store be open while the ship is
distress on a cash basis when underway?
the request made by the master
of the merchant ship is 1. 20 hours
approved by the commanding 2. 24 hours
officer of the ship that will 3. 42 hours
sell the merchandise. 4. 48 hours
8
1-69. What markup rate, if any, is 1-73. For what price are standard
prescribed for retail items in Navy clothing items sold in the
the ship’s store? ship’s store?
1. cost plus 15% 1. Retail price
2. Cost plus transportation 2. Price prescribed in the
expenses plus 15% standard price list
3. Cost plus 15% rounded off 3. Cost price plus 15%
to the next higher nickel 4. Price established by the
4. None Naval Supply Systems
Command
1-70. The ROM system automatically
computes the prescribed markup 1-74. The ROM system will not compute
for all stock items. What a markup for stock items
individual may override the assigned to which of the
ROM markup system and enter a following department codes?
different price?
1. A1
1. The leading Ship’s 2. D1
Serviceman 3. D3
2. The ship’s store 4. L1
recordskeeper
3. The ship’s store officer 1-75. What is meant by the term
4. Each of the above “mark-on”?
1-71. The markup on retail items 1. An amount added to the cost
should be sufficient enough to price to arrive at the
provide for which of the retail price
following expenditures? 2. An increase in the
previously established
1. Markdowns and surveys retail price
2. Operating expenses of the 3. An amount added to the cost
service activities of operation items to cover
3. Sales outlet operating losses by inventory
expenses 4. An increase in the
4. All of the above previously established cost
price
1-72. What overall maximum percentage
of profit is the ship’s store
authorized to make?
1. 5%
2. 10%
3. 15%
4. 20%
9
Assignment 2
10
2-6. What is the purpose of 2-11. If available, ledges in the
merchandise displays in the retail store should be used to
ship’s store? store merchandise that cannot
fit on the shelves.
1. To show what is available
for order 1. True
2. To make the store look 2. False
attractive
3. To facilitate taking 2-12. Which of the following pairs of
inventories items would be a good example
4. To inform and educate the of two items of ship’s store
customer stock correlated properly in
the retail store?
2-7. Customer displays should be
changed frequently for which of 1. Toothpaste stowed near
the following purposes? toothbrushes
2. Perfume stowed near
1. To stimulate customer bracelets
interest 3. Cigarettes stowed near
2. To make inventory easier uniform items
3. To make room for breakouts 4. Soap stowed near crackers
of merchandise
4. To rotate stock items into 2-13. Decorations are used in the
the display that were left sales outlets for which of the
out following reasons?
11
2-16. Shower shoes do not lend 2-20. When, if ever, may the cash
themselves to individual price register in the sales outlet be
marking. Where should the installed in an area where the
price for shower shoes be customer does not have a view
displayed so the customer knows of the amount rung up?
how much they cost?
1. When the cash register is
1. On a price list posted in installed in a walk-in
the ship’s store office store
2. On a piece of paper located 2. When making sales directly
near the cash register from the bulk storeroom
3. No price needs to be 3. When the cash register
displayed if the retail provides the customer with
store operator has a copy an itemized receipt
of the price list 4. Never
4. On the bin or shelf holding
the shower shoes by use of 2-21. The cash register keys will be
a sign, price list, or in the custody of which of the
shelf label following individuals?
2-17. What price marking system 1. The leading petty officer
should the retail store 2. The sales outlet operator
operator use to display prices 3. The person making
on items located in the retail collections
store? 4. The agent cashier
1. Price marker or price tags 2-22. What action should the sales
2. Grease pencil outlet operator take when the
3. Crayons retained cash register tape in
4. Each of the above the cash register has run out?
2-18. Prices displayed on merchandise 1. Continue using the register
in the retail store should only until the end of the day
be changed by the operator on 2, Remove the detailed tape so
the authority of a Retail Price it will not jam and
Change, NAVSUP Form 983, continue ringing up sales
approved by what officer? until cash collections are
made
1. Ship’s store officer 3. Remove the tape and install
2. Supply officer a new register tape
3. Disbursing officer provided by the ship’s
4. Commanding officer store officer
4. Contact the ship’s store
officer or designated cash
Learning Objective: Determine collection agent and have
the procedures for using the the tape changed before
cash register in the sales ringing up any additional
outlet. sales
2-23. When arranging money in a
2-19. Which of the following drawer with less than five
individuals is/are allowed compartments, where should you
access to the cash register in place the personal checks?
the retail store for ringing up
sales? 1. Underneath the twenties
2. Under the cash tray
1. The ship’s store officer 3. In a drawer next to the
2. The designated cash twenties not being used
collection agent 4. Underneath the ones
3. The retail store operator
4. All of the above
12
2-24. When new bills are placed in 2-27. The customer makes a purchase
the cash register, what action of $3 and gives you a $5 bill
should the cash register for payment. Where should you
operator take to prevent errors place the $5 bill while making
in giving change? change ?
1. Place the new bills in a 1. On the change plate of the
drawer by themselves in the register
cash register 2. On the counter near the
2. Place the new bills under register
the ones rolled together 3. In the $5 compartment OF
3. Tear a corner off of each the cash drawer
new bill 4. On the keys of the cash
4. Turn the corner up on each register
new bill
2-28. A customer gives you a $10 bill
2-25. Most errors involving the cash to pay for merchandise valued
register occur at which of the at $7.50. As you give change
following times? to the customer, how do you
count it?
1. When the cash is being
collected at the end of the 1. Count up $2.50 as you take
business day the change from the cash
2. When the cash register register and count from
operator exchanges money $7.50 to $10.00 as you hand
with the customer the change to the customer
3. When the cash register 2. Count up to $2.50 as you
operator is placing the take the change from the
change fund in the register cash register and repeat
4. When the cash register the same count as you hand
operator is ringing up the change to the customer
sales 3. Count $7.50 to $10.00 as
you take the change from
2-26. Under what conditions may the the cash register and
cash register operator ring up repeat the same count as
more than one item at a time on you hand the change to the
the cash register? customer
4. Count from $7.50 to $10.00
1. When the retail store is as you take the change from
very busy the cash register and count
2. When the items are of low up to $2.50 as you hand the
cost and can be added change to the customer
together easily in the
operator’s head
3. When a calculator is Learning Objective: Identify
available for the cash the procedures for handling
register operator to use ship’s store funds in the sales
4. When the cash register is outlets aboard ship.
designed to total more than
one item at a time
2-29. Payment for merchandise
purchased in the ship’s store
may be made by which of the
following methods?
1. U.S. currency
2. Personal check
3. Traveler’s check
4. All of the above
13
2-30. For what amount over the 2-35. When will the sales outlet
purchase price, if any, may operator return the funds
traveler’s checks be accepted advanced for change to the
in the ship’s store? person providing the funds?
1. $5 1. At the end of the month
2. $10 2. At the start of the
3. $25 business day
4. None 3. At the close of the
business day before the
2-31. Which of the following kinds of register reading is taken
personal checks is acceptable 4. At the end of each
in the ship’s store? accounting period
2-33. A change fund is advanced to 2-38. What will the sales outlet
the sales outlet operator for operator do with the completed
use as change during the refund voucher?
business day. The amount of
change fund advanced to the 1. Forward it to the ship’s
sales outlet operator is store officer for filing
determined by what officer? 2. Place it under the cash
tray in the cash register
1. Supply officer until daily collections
2. Ship’s store officer 3. Give it to the leading
3. Disbursing officer Ship’s Serviceman
4. Commanding officer 4. Ring it up in the cash
register and hold it in the
2-34. What form is signed by the cash drawer until
sales outlet operator to collections are made
receipt for change funds?
1. NAVSUP Form 470
2. NAVSUP Form 464
3. NAVCOMPT Form 2114
4. NAVCOMPT Form 153
14
2-39. When a personal check written 2-42. ROM users will accomplish
for purchase in the ship’s which, if any, of the following
store is returned due to actions to adjust the
insufficient funds, what will accountability of the retail
the ship’s store officer do store for losses incurred from
with the check? dishonored checks?
15
2-44. When payment is not received 2-47. During normal store hours,
for bulk sales at the time the where will the retail store
merchandise is delivered from operator hold the working stock
the retail store, what action of traveler’s checks?
should the retail store
operator take? 1. In an empty cash drawer in
the cash register
1. Make a list of the items 2. Under the cash tray in the
taken and retain this list cash register
under the cash tray in the 3. Under the counter within
register until payment is reach from the cash
received register
2. List the items taken on a 4. Stowed securely in a
summary NAVSUP Form 973, three-combination safe
retain one copy in the cash
register under the cash 2-48. What is the minimum amount of
tray until payment is sale of traveler’s checks the
received, and forward the retail store operator can make
original to the ship’s to one customer?
store office
3. Maintain a copy of the 1. $100
Requisition and 2. $50
Invoice/Shipping Document, 3. $25
DD Form 1149, for bulk 4. $5
sales under the cash tray
in the cash register until 2-49. You have just sold traveler’s
payment is received checks to one customer with a
4. List the items taken on an face value of $600. What total
Inventory Count Sheet, amount should you collect from
NAVSUP Form 233, retain the the customer?
blue copy in the cash
register under the cash 1. $601.98
tray, and forward the 2. $604.02
white, yellow, and pink 3. $606.00
copies to the ship’s store 4. $612.00
office
2-45. ROM users must enter the amount Learning Objective: Identify
of cash collected from bulk the procedures for collecting
sales in the ROM cash receipt cash in the retail store.
function using what store
number?
2-50. What individual is responsible
1. 99 for collecting and depositing
2. 98 funds received from sales in
3. 96 the ship’s store?
4. 95
1. Ship’s store officer
2-46. The sale of traveler’s checks 2. Disbursing officer
through the ship’s store 3. Supply officer
requires the approval of what 4. Commanding officer
officer?
2-51. How often will cash be counted
1. Commanding officer and collected in the retail
2. Disbursing officer store when locked moneybags and
3. Ship’s store officer a night depository safe are not
4. Supply officer used?
1. Monthly
2. Weekly
3. Twice a week
4. Daily
16
2-55. When moneybags are issued to
2-52. All cash including change funds the retail store operator, they
will be collected from the have two keys that come with
retail store at which of the each bag. One is retained by
following times? the
- - -retail
- store operator.
What happens to the other key?
1. At the end of each
accounting period 1. Retained by the supply
2. When the retail store is officer in a duplicate key
closed for 72 hours or more locker
3. When the ship’s store 2. Kept in a sealed envelope
officer is relieved in the ship’s store
4. All of the above officer’s safe
3. Retained in the personal
2-53. How will the person making custody of the person
collections compute the total making collections
cash that should be collected? 4. Exchanged each duty day by
the offgoing and oncoming
1. Current register reading duty supply officers
plus the previous day’s
register reading minus any The combination to the night
change fund 2-56.
depository safe is known by
2. Current register reading which of the following
plus change fund minus the individuals?
previous day's register
reading 1. Disbursing officer
3. Current register reading 2. Ship’s store officer
minus the previous day’s 3. The designated cash
register reading minus any collection agent
change fund 4. Both 2 and 3 above
4. Current register reading
minus previous day’s When using the night depository
register reading plus the 2-57.
change fund safe, the person making
collections will take the cash
register readings at what time?
2-54. When the retail store operator
is delivering all cash 1. At the close of business
including change funds to the the day the deposit is made
cash collection agent, how 2. At the close of business
often, at a minimum, should the the following day
cash collection agent take the 3. Before the start of
register readings? business the following day
4. Before the end of the week
1. Once weekly
2. Twice weekly A change fund of over $50 may
Three times weekly 2-58.
3. be left in the cash register
4. Every day overnight if approved by what
officer?
1. Disbursing officer
2. Ship’s store officer
3. Type commander
4. Commanding officer
Learning Objective:
the documents used by the sales
outlet operator to account for
cash collected in the ship’s
store.
17
2-59. The Cash Receipt Book, NAVSUP 2-62. What is the disposition of the
Form 470, for the retail store
is kept in the custody of what Overring/Refund voucher, NAVSUP
individual? Form 972, once the retail store
operator gives it to the person
1. The ship’s store officer making collections?
2. The cash collection agent
3. The disbursing officer 1.The amount of the
4. The retail store operator overring/refund voucher is
entered in the cash receipt
2-60. How often is the ship’s store book for information
officer required to compare the purposes only and the
amounts entered in the Cash NAVSUP Form 972 is stapled
Receipt Book, NAVSUP Form 470, to the applicable page of
with the amounts entered in the the NAVSUP Form 470
ROM system? 2, The Overring/Refund
Voucher, NAVSUP Form 972,
1. Daily is disposed of once a
2. Twice a week separate entry is made in
3. Once a week both the NAVSUP Form 470
4. Monthly and NAVSUP Form 469 and is
included in the total cash
2-61. When an error is made in the collections for the month
cash receipt book, what should 3. A separate entry is made in
be done to correct it? both the NAVSUP Forms 469
and 470 and the
1. Draw a line through the Overring/Refund Voucher,
error, write the correct NAVSUP Form 972, is stapled
information above the to the applicable page of
error, and both the sales the NAVSUP Form 469; the
outlet operator and the amount of the
person making collections overring/refund voucher is
initial the line-out not included in the total
2. Draw a line through the collections for the month
entire line, write the 4. The overring/refund voucher
correct information in the is entered in the Cash
following space, and both Register Record, NAVSUP
the sales outlet operator Form 469, for information
and the person making purposes and then turned
collections initial the over to the disbursing
line-out officer for filing
3. Draw a line through the
entire line, write the 2-63. At the end of the month, the
correct information above sales outlet operator will
it, and both the sales total up the amounts in the
outlet operator and the Cash Receipt Book, NAVSUP Form
person making collections 470. The total figure computed
initial the line-out by the sales outlet operator
4. Erase the entire error and must match the total figure
enter the correct shown on what form?
information 1. NAVSUP Form 464
2. NAVSUP Form 469
3. NAVSUP Form 977
4. NAVSUP Form 978
18
2-64. When the person making 2-67. When can a ship’s store space
collections is the cash be reopened for business after
collections agent, the ship’s being broken into?
store officer will review the
cash receipt book for each 1. After the person
sales outlet at least how responsible for the breakin
often? is captured
2. After all disciplinary
1. Monthly action as required by the
2. Weekly UCMJ is resolved
3. Twice a week 3. After inventory is
4. Daily accomplished and
accountability
reestablished
4. After an action report is
Learning Objective: Identify received by the commanding
the general procedures followed officer from the Naval
when theft or fraud occurs in Supply Systems Command
the ship’s store operation.
2-68. Which of the following examples
of mishaps in the ship’s store
2-65. To prevent theft in a walk-in operation would be considered
retail store, the retail store fraud?
operator should take which of
the following precautions? 1. The ship’s store officer
changes the ship’s store
1. Keep a close watch on afloat financial control
customers record and supporting
2. Allow only a limited number documents to conceal a
of customers in the retail large loss in the retail
store at a time store
3. Do not allow customers to 2. The leading Ship’s
shop in the retail store Serviceman steals an
wearing heavy jackets expensive watch during a
4. All of the above working party and reports
to the ship’s store officer
2-66. After a ship’s store space has that the working party
been broken into, it is stole it
reported to the commanding 3. The retail store operator
officer and an informal is not ringing up all sales
investigation is made for what in the retail store and is
purpose? placing the excess amount
of money in his or her
1. To determine who is pocket
responsible for the theft 4. All of the above
2. To reveal the extent of the
loss 2-69. After the commanding officer
3. To determine what receives a report of fraud in
structural damage was done the ship’s store operation, he
4. To use the findings as or she will direct the ship’s
evidence in the event of a store officer to conduct an
court-martial informal examination.
1. True
2. False
19
2-70. Physical inventory is taken in 2-73. Which of the following
the retail store at which of individuals may NOT be assigned
the following times? to an inventory team?
1. When the retail store 1. An E-6 Storekeeper (SK)
operator is relieved 2. The ship’s store officer
2. At the end of each 3. The ship’s store
accounting period recordskeeper
3. When directed to do so by 4. An E-7 Mess Management
higher authority Specialist (MS)
4. All of the above
2-74. The inventory layout sketch for
2-71. What individual is responsible one of the sales outlets will
for the inventory in the sales show which of the following
outlets? information?
1. The ship’s store officer 1. Personnel assignments
2. The leading Ship’s 2. Fixture numbers
Serviceman 3. Stock arrangements
3. The sales outlet operator 4. All of the above
4. The ship’s store
recordskeeper 2-75. The layout sketch for each
sales outlet is prepared by
2-72. When sufficient personnel are what individual?
not available for inventory,
how many persons may be 1. The sales outlet operator
assigned to each inventory 2. The ship’s store officer
team? 3. The leading Ship’s
Serviceman
1. One 4. The ship’s store
2. Two recordskeeper
3. Three
4. Four
20
Assignment 3
21
3-7. During the daily collections of 3-10. How many cans did you sell
the vending machine, the meter since the last collection?
reading was 10295. If the
previous meter reading was 1. 543
09956 and the selling price per 2. 733
can was raised from 35 cents to 3. 767
40 cents at the time of the 4. 957
last collection, how much cash
should be collected from the 3-11. When the ship’s store officer
vending machine? or cash collection agent is not
aboard to accept the locked
1. $115.60 money box and a night
2. $118.65 depository safe is not
3. $135.60 available, the vending machine
4. $148.60 operator will turn the locked
money box over to the supply
3-8. The vending machine operator department duty officer or
should be issued money boxes another commissioned officer
for use in the vending machines for safekeeping. Each time the
by what individual? vending machine operator
delivers a locked money box to
1. The person responsible for the duty officer, what
making collections action must be taken?
2. The disbursing officer
3. The leading Ship’s 1. The locked money box and
Serviceman meter reading are turned
4. The supply officer over to the duty officer,
all cash is counted and
3-9. The key that locks the money verified, and a cash receipt
box into the vending machine is received by the vending
will be kept by what machine operator
individual? 2. The money box and the keys
to the money box are turned
1. The ship’s store officer over to the duty officer,
2. The cash collection agent but the cash is not counted
3. The disbursing officer 3. The locked money box and
4. The vending machine meter reading are turned
operator over to the duty officer,
and an entry is made in the
In answering question 3-10, money box log and signed by
refer to the information in the the vending machine
following paragraph. operator and the duty
officer
You are the vending machine operator 4. The locked money box is
on a large ship and you are delivering turned over to the duty
the locked money box to the person officer for safekeeping
making collections. The vending without signing for or
machine from which you removed the counting the money
money box is not equipped with a meter
or cash totalizer and you must compute 3-12. How are amusement machines
the number of cans you sold. At the aboard ship acquired by the
time of the last collection there were ship’s store officer?
112 cans in the vending machine. At
the time of collection there are 95 1. Purchased through a
cans in the vending machine and you NAVRESSO Bulletin
placed 750 cans in the machine since 2. Leased from the contractor
the last collection. 3. Purchased using a special
DD Form 1155
4. Purchased through the
supply center using OPTAR
funds
22
3-13. The amusement machine money box 3-16. What action should the vending
is secured using a keyless machine operator take to keep
combination lock and which of track of the canned sodas
the following items? placed in each vending machine
in a separate responsibility
1. A restraining bar operation?
2. A lead car seal
3. A key-type padlock 1. Keep a daily record posted
4. A dead bolt lock in the back of the soda
storeroom to account for
the canned sodas put in
each machine
Learning Objective: Identify 2. Carry a memorandum book
the procedures used by the with you at all times and
operator when servicing and list the quantity of canned
caring for the vending machine. sodas placed in each
machine daily
3. Maintain a daily record
3-14. What are the two primary jobs placed on the inside of
of the vending machine each vending machine
operator? indicating the date, type,
and quantities of canned
1. Filling and repairing the sodas placed in each
vending machine vending machine
2. Taking care of customer 4. Fill out an Intra-Store
complaints and repairing Transfer Data, NAVSUP Form
the vending machine 973, each time sodas are
3. Filling the vending placed in a vending machine
machines and taking care of including the date, type,
customer complaints and quantity of canned
4. Repairing and collecting sodas placed in each
money from the vending vending machine
machines
3-15. What is the primary purpose of
timely schedules for refilling
the vending machines?
1. To increase profits
2. To ensure maximum rotation
of products
3. To ensure canned sodas are
cold at all times
4. To ensure a continuous
supply of products and
services
23
IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 3-17 THROUGH 3-22. A cleaning record should be
3-20, SELECT FROM COLUMN B THE maintained on the inside of
PROBABLE CAUSE FOR THE PROBLEM LISTED each vending machine by the
IN COLUMN A. operator. This record should
be kept current for how many
A. PROBLEMS B. PROBABLE days?
CAUSES
1. 60 days
3-17. A vending 1. Products were 2. 30 days
machine stacked in 3. 15 days
accepts a the wrong 4. 10 days
customer’s slot
$.50, but
the customer 2. The sold-out
does not get light is Learning Objective: Identify
any change inoperative the procedures for operating
back even the snack bar aboard ship.
though the 3. The change
price of the light is
canned soda inoperative 3-23. What is the primary objective
is $.40 of the snack bar aboard ship?
4. The coin
3-18. A customer changer is 1. To promote morale
receives a dirty 2. To provide profits to the
product other recreation fund
than the one 3. To provide crew members
selected with a convenient place to
go for snacks after normal
3-19. A customer places working hours
money in the vending 4. To give the best possible
machine, but it does service to the greatest
not register because number of customers
it gets stuck in the
coin mechanism 3-24. In determining the type of
service to be rendered by the
3-20. Customer places snack bar aboard ship, you must
money in the vending consider the availability of
machine; the money is which of the following factors?
accepted but when the
customer pushes the 1. Equipment and space only
selection button nothing 2. Space and personnel only
comes out 3. Personnel, time, and
equipment only
4. Time, personnel, space, and
equipment
3-21. To make the job of cleaning
under and around the vending 3-25. What is the operating goal for
machine easier, the vending the snack bar?
machine itself should be
mounted on a stand so it is 1. A 35 percent markup over
about how many inches off the the cost of the items sold
deck? 2. The amount of money needed
to purchase new supplies
1. 10 inches 3. The desired gross profit
2. 12 inches percent
3. 3 inches 4. The gross amount of sales
4. 6 inches anticipated for the
accounting period
24
3-26. The operating goal for the 3-31. All cash collected from the
snack bar is established by snack bar is included and
what individual? recorded with the sales from
the retail store.
1. The ship’s store officer
2. The supply officer 1. True
3. The commanding officer 2. False
4. The snack bar operator
3-32. When the snack bar is operated
by more than one person, how
In answering question 3-27, often will cash be collected?
refer to the information in the
following paragraph. 1. At the end of each
accounting period
You are determining the selling price 2. Monthly
for ice cream in the snack bar. The 3. At the end of each shift
cost of selling the ice cream is 4. Twice weekly
$1.20. The desired profit margin for
the snack bar is 35%. 3-33. How often should a
representative from the medical
3-27. What should the selling price department aboard ship inspect
for the ice cream be? the snack bar for sanitation
and cleanliness?
1. $1.85
2. $1.70 1. Once every 2 weeks
3. $1.65 2. Daily
4. $1.60 3. Monthly
4. Weekly
3-28. The Production Record, NAVSUP
Form 241, is maintained to 3-34. Once the operator of the snack
determine the cost per portion bar receives his or her initial
of those items manufactured in physical examination, how often
the snack bar. What individual thereafter is he or she
maintains the NAVSUP Form 241? required to receive another
physical?
1. The office recordskeeper
2. The cash collection agent 1. Annually
3. The leading Ship’s 2. Every 6 months
Serviceman 3. Each accounting period
4. The snack bar operator 4. Monthly
3-29. How often will the ship’s store 3-35. Utensils used for serving ice
officer check the NAVSUP Form cream or frozen desserts must
241? be kept in running water or
water maintained at what
1. Every time inventory is temperature in between
taken in the snack bar servings?
2. Each accounting period
3. Monthly 1. 200°F
4. Weekly 2. 180°F
3. 160°F
3-30. The value of retail items sold 4. 130°F
in the snack bar must be
computed at what minimum
frequency?
1. Each accounting period
2. Monthly or as required
3. Weekly
4. Daily
25
3-36. Once the equipment used to 3-40. The responsibilities of the
manufacture ice cream is bulk storeroom custodian are
cleaned and disinfected, the assigned in writing by what
interior parts of the machine individual?
that come in contact with the
ice cream can only be touched 1. The leading Ship’s
by the operator’s hands at Serviceman
which of the following times? 2. The commanding officer
3. The supply officer
1. When taking it apart to 4. The ship’s store officer
clean it
2. In between servings 3-41. Stowing materials in the bulk
3. When adding additional mix storeroom not in the custody of
4. All of the above the bulk storeroom custodian is
acceptable under which of the
Questions 3-37 through 3-72 following conditions?
refer to chapter 3 of the text.
1. Just before deployment
overseas
Learning Objective: Determine 2. When the storeroom is not
the general duties and being inventoried
responsibilities of the bulk 3. When stowage space is
storeroom custodian. limited for one of the
other supply divisions
4. When an emergency exists
3-37. The responsibility for and the commanding officer
effectively arranging stock in authorizes it in writing
the ship’s store storerooms
begins with what individual? 3-42. What is the primary
responsibility of the bulk
1. The commanding officer storeroom custodian?
2. The ship’s store officer
3. The leading Ship’s 1. Proper stowage, security,
Serviceman financial accountability,
4. The person in charge of the receipt, and expenditure of
storeroom all stock in the bulk
storeroom
3-38. The bulk storeroom custodian is 2. Protection of stores from
responsible to what individual damage or deterioration
for the stock in the bulk 3. Arranging stock for
storeroom? breakouts and inventories
4. Issuing stock to the retail
1. Retail store operator stores
2. Office supervisor
3. Ship’s store officer 3-43. How should the storerooms be
4. Ship’s store recordskeeper numbered on a ship with 10 or
more bulk storerooms?
3-39. During the receipt of material,
the bulk storeroom custodian 1. By department code number
will accept responsibility and 2. By compartment and frame
custody for materials received number
once he or she performs which 3. In numerical sequence
of the following actions? 4. By commodity number
26
3-44. The primary factor that 3-48. While the working party is
contributes to inventory moving materials from the pier
shortages or overages in the to the bulk storeroom, which of
bulk storeroom is lack of the following personnel is/are
internal checks and controls. authorized inside the bulk
storeroom?
1. True
2. False 1. All personnel on the
working party
3-45. What should the bulk storeroom 2. The leading Ship’s
custodian NEVER do when Serviceman
receiving material into the 3. Only those personnel
bulk storeroom? authorized by the bulk
storeroom custodian
1. Physically inspect the 4. The receipt inspector
merchandise for quality
and damage 3-49. What action should the bulk
2. Make sure the quantity storeroom custodian take when
received is the same as the quantity he or she counted
shown on the receipt is not the same as shown on the
document receipt document?
3. Change the quantity shown
on the receipt document 1. Cross out the quantity
when it is not the same as shown on the receipt
the quantity counted document, initial it, and
4. Sign and date the enter and circle the actual
accountability stamp on amount received
the receipt document 2. Circle the quantity shown
without counting the on the receipt document;
merchandise the office will take care
of the shortage
3-46. When receiving stock into the 3. Circle the quantity shown
bulk storeroom, the custodian on the receipt document and
will obtain the retained write the actual amount
receipt documents from which of received above it
the following files? 4. Leave the receipt document
blank until the ship’s
1. The outstanding purchase store officer recounts the
order file merchandise
2. The incoming material file
3. The receipt inspector’s 3-50. When may the bulk storeroom
file custodian use the quantity
4. The accountability file indicated on the outside of the
container as his or her count?
3-47. What action will the bulk
storeroom custodian take to 1. When the case has been
accept merchandise receipts? opened
2. When the case has been
1. Circle the quantity opened but taped shut
received on the receipt 3. When the case has not been
document and sign and date previously opened
the received block 4. Both 2 or 3 above
2. Circle the quantity
received on the receipt 3-51. What ship’s store term is used
document and sign the to describe the movement of
accountability stamp retail items from the bulk
3. Check the quantities storeroom to the retail store?
received and place initials
by each check 1. Breakout
4. Sign the accountability 2. Breakback
stamp only 3. Issue
4. Transfer
27
3-52. Which of the following items 3-56. What portion of the NAVSUP Form
would be issued from the bulk 973 is retained by the bulk
storeroom? storeroom custodian for his or
her records?
1. Cigarettes for the
cigarette machine 1. Original
2. Snack bar ingredients 2. Duplicate
3. Repair parts for the can 3. Triplicate
drink machine 4. Quadruplicate
4. Retail items for the retail
store 3-57. What scenario can the bulk
storeroom custodian expect to
3-53. What ship’s store term is used encounter if a discrepancy is
to describe the movement of noted between quantities broken
stock from the sales outlet to out and quantities received?
the bulk storeroom?
1. Conduct an inventory of all
1. Breakout items located in the
2. Breakback receiving person’s space
3. Issue 2. Conduct an inventory of the
4. Transfer item discrepancy in the
bulk storeroom and compare
3-54. What portion(s) of the it to the inventory
Intra-Store Transfer Data, quantities on the
NAVSUP Form 973, is/are given corresponding Stock Record,
to the bulk storeroom custodian NAVSUP Form 464
to move stock from the bulk 3. Survey the items missing,
storeroom to the retail store? charging the Navy Stock
Fund
1. Original only 4. Mark the items missing down
2. Original and duplicate only to zero, charging Ships’
3. Original, duplicate, and Store Profits, Navy
triplicate only
4. Original, duplicate,
triplicate, and Learning Objective: Identify
quadruplicate the purpose of and procedures
for conducting spot check
3-55. What action will the bulk inventories aboard ship and
storeroom custodian take once explain the procedures for
he or she has broken out the handling tax-free tobacco
merchandise and recorded the products.
quantities broken out on the
breakout document?
3-58. What is the purpose of taking
1. Sign and forward the spot check inventories in the
original to the receiving bulk storeroom?
custodian
2. Sign and forward the 1. To make sure inventory
original and all copies to count sheets are correct
the ship’s store officer 2. To see what merchandise
3. Sign and forward the needs to be ordered
original to the office 3. To see if there is any
recordskeeper difference between the
4. Sign and forward the quantity of stock in the
quadruplicate to the office bulk storeroom and the
recordskeeper quantity shown on the
NAVSUP Form 464
4. To make sure the ship’s
store does not have an
excess inventory on any
ship’s store items
28
3-59. When will the ship’s store 3-62. In addition to the normal
officer conduct spot check ship’s store inventory cycles,
inventories? how often should tax-free
cigarettes be inventoried?
1. Daily
2. Weekly 1. When departing the 3-mile
3. Monthly limit of the United States
4. At unannounced times only
2. When arriving within the
3-60. What are the procedures 3-mile limit of the United
normally used for taking spot States only
check inventories? 3. When arriving within a
CONUS port only
1. The bulk storeroom 4. When departing from or
custodian indicates the arriving within the 3-mile
balance on hand of each limit of the United States
item on the Intra-Store
Transfer Data, NAVSUP Form 3-63. Tax-free tobacco products must
973, after a breakout or be removed from the retail
issue store while the ship is in a
2. The bulk storeroom United States port. An
custodian will receive a exception to this rule would be
locally prepared spot check when time does not warrant
inventory sheet from the moving the products and the
ship’s store officer and ship’s stay in port does not
count the items listed on exceed how many days?
it
3. A two-count inventory is 1. 5 days
conducted with one person 2. 10 days
counting and one recording 3. 15 days
4. The ship’s store officer 4. 30 days
selects certain items,
enters them on an Inventory 3-64. Tax-free tobacco products need
Count Sheet, NAVSUP Form not be inventoried when the
238, and counts them ship arrives within the 3-mile
limit of the United States if
3-61. Tax-free tobacco products may the tax-free tobacco products
be sold in the ship’s store are stowed in a storeroom
only when the ship is in what secured by replacing the lock
location? and attaching a numbered car
seal. The above procedure is
1. Outside the 3-mile limit authorized at the discretion of
of the United States the commanding officer when the
2. In international waters ship is scheduled to depart
3. Inside a United States port beyond the 3-mile limit of the
4. Inside the 3-mile limit of United States within what
the United States maximum time period?
1. 1 day
2. 5 days
3. 3 days
4. 15 days
29
3-65. The stowage plans for the bulk 3-69. What part of your body should
storeroom should be flexible you use to lift an object?
for which of the following
purposes? 1. Your back
2. Your arms
1. To provide for changing 3. Your shoulders
conditions and requirements 4. Your legs
2. To make sure space is used
to the maximum capacity 3-70. Which of the following actions
3. To prevent damage to stock should you avoid while carrying
4. To prevent overstocking the a load?
storeroom
1. Carrying the load so you
3-66. Your ship should begin planning have a clear view over the
for the stowage of ship’s store top of the load
stock within what range of 2. Changing directions while
months before a scheduled moving the load by moving
deployment? your feet
3. Changing your grip while
1. 1 to 3 months carrying the load
2. 2 to 4 months 4. Facing the spot where you
3. 3 to 5 months are going to-set the object
4. 4 to 6 months down
3-67. Which of the following factors 3-71. In what priority should the
will help you in determining a bulk storeroom custodian issue
suitable location to stow stock from the bulk storeroom?
stock?
1. First in--first out
1. Size of the storeroom 2. First in--last out
2. Storeroom location 3. Last in --first out
3. The characteristics of the 4. Issue the stock that is
storeroom easily accessible
4. All of the above
3-72. When the bulk storeroom
3-68. What individual is responsible custodian receives highly
for preparing safety perishable stock into the bulk
precautions for the bulk storeroom, what date should be
storeroom? marked on each case?
1. The bulk storeroom 1. Manufacturer’s date
custodian 2. Date of the purchase order
2. The office recordskeeper 3. Receipt date
3. The ship’s safety officer 4. Shipping date
4. The ship’s store officer
30
Assignment 4
31
4-8. When conditions in the bulk
storeroom allow the positioning
Learning Objective: Identify of an aisle between the items
the correct procedures for being stowed, how wide should
arranging stock in the bulk this aisle be?
storeroom.
1. 5 feet
2. 2 feet
4-4. How should the bulk storeroom 3. 2 ½ feet
custodian arrange the stock in 4. 3 ½ feet
the bulk storeroom?
4-9. You have just received a large
1. Container labels facing out quantity of one stock item.
and cases arranged by item, When conditions allow, how many
brand name, and date of storerooms should this stock
receipt or manufacture item be stowed in?
2. Container labels facing
sideways with the date of 1. One storeroom
receipt or manufacture date 2. Two storerooms
showing on the outside 3. Three storerooms
3. Container labels facing out 4. Four or more storerooms
with the date of receipt or
manufacture indicated on
the top of the case 4-10. Fragile material should be
4. Container labels facing stowed in which of the
inward and arranged by date following locations in the bulk
of receipt storeroom?
4-5. What type of stock items should 1. In a separate location,
be stowed in areas easily using empty cardboard
accessible to the custodian of carton strips to fill in
the bulk storeroom? unused space
2. In the same location as
1. Items that are similar heavy material
2. Popular items 3. In the angle irons on the
3. Slow-moving items sides of the ship
4. Breakable items 4. On the deck gratings in the
rear of the storeroom
4-6. What stock item should be
stowed in areas that provide a
balance between required Learning Objective: Explain
handling and accessibility? the procedures for maintaining
the material condition of the
1. Hair spray bulk storeroom.
2. 50-pound laundry sour
3. Dial deodorant
4. Bath soap 4-11. The custodian of the bulk
storeroom should notify which
4-7. What type(s) of stock items of the following individuals
should be stowed together to when there are damaged or
make the job of issuing and deteriorated items located in
controlling these items easier? the bulk storeroom?
1. Popular items 1. The supply officer
2. Similar items 2. The ship’s store
3. Slow-moving items recordskeeper
4. Light and heavy items 3. The custodian’s supervisor
4. The retail store operator
32
4-12. The cleaning and maintenance of
the bulk storeroom is the
responsibility of what Learning Objective: Explain
individual? the procedures and precautions
used for stowing materials
1. The damage control petty that require special handling.
officer
2. The custodian
3. The receipt inspector 4-18, When stowing stock with special
4. The retail store operator handling requirements, which of
the following factors should
4-13. How often should the bulk the custodian consider?
storeroom be cleaned and swept?
1. Hazards to personnel or
1. Daily facilities
2. Twice weekly 2. Shelf life so the oldest
3. Weekly stock is issued first
4. Monthly 3. Temperature control to
prevent deterioration
4-14. How often should the custodian 4. All of the above
examine electrical systems in
the bulk storeroom? 4-19. The requirements for stowage of
dangerous, semisafe, and safe
1. Daily materials are contained in
2. Weekly which of the following
3. Monthly publications?
4. Bimonthly
1. Hazardous Material
4-15. How often should the ship’s Identification System
store officer inspect the bulk (HMIS) List, DOD 6050.5
storeroom? 2. Afloat Supply Procedures,
NAVSUP P-485
1. Each business day 3. Food Service Management
2. Twice weekly Manual, NAVSUP P-486
3. Weekly 4. Ship’s Store Afloat, NAVSUP
4. During the monthly zone P-487
inspection
4-20. Which of the following
4-16. When the ship is expecting to categories of materials must be
get underway, the custodian of stowed in the paint and
the bulk storeroom should flammable liquids storeroom?
notify what individual once the
storeroom is prepared for sea? 1. Safe only
2. Safe and semisafe
1. The ship’s store officer 3. Dangerous and safe
2. The custodian’s supervisor 4. Dangerous and semisafe
3. The supply officer
4. The officer of the deck 4-21. What atmospheric condition in
your storeroom may cause
4-17. When possible, how often should pinholing in canned products?
the bulk storeroom custodian
ventilate the bulk storeroom to 1. High temperature
permit good air circulation? 2. Low humidity
3. Low temperature
1. Daily 4. High humidity
2. Weekly
3. Monthly
4. Once per accounting period
33
4-22. What is the maximum closed cup 4-28. What is the maximum recommended
flash point a product can have stowage (a) temperature and
to be classified a flammable (b) humidity for chocolate?
item?
1. (a) 65°F (b) 75%
1. 100°F 2. (a) 65°F (b) 50%
2. 160°F 3. (a) 70°F (b) 50%
3. 200°F 4. (a) 70°F (b) 75%
4. 220°F
4-29. Which of the following types of
4-23. What publication lists candy is more affected by high
authorized ship’s store items humidity than by temperature?
that are classified as
flammable stock? 1. Chocolate candy
2. Nonchocolate candy
1. NAVRESSO Pub 90 3. Nougat
2. NAVRESSO Pub 43 4. Fudge
3. NAVSUP P-487
4. NAVSUP P-486 4-30. What date is used by the
custodian to determine the
4-24. Flammable stock stowed in the order in which photographic
retail store should be limited film should be issued from the
to how many days’ sales? bulk storeroom?
1. 30 days 1. Receipt date
2. 60 days 2. Order date
3. 3 days 3. Manufacture date
4. 15 days 4. Expiration date
4-25. How should you arrange standard 4-31. When cigarettes are stowed in
Navy clothing stock in the bulk the bulk storeroom, the
storeroom? temperature in the storeroom
should not exceed what amount?
1. By manufacture date
2. By size in stock number 1. 60°F
order 2. 65°F
3. By purchase order number 3. 70°F
4. By style number 4. 75°F
4-26. What is the ideal temperature 4-32. What is the recommended way to
for storerooms where food stow canned drinks to prevent
products are stowed? them from falling while the
ship is underway in high seas
1. 60°F and at the same time to provide
2. 65°F good air circulation?
3. 70°F
4. 75°F 1. Cross stack them
2. Stack them so they are at
4-27. When you are stowing cookies or least 3 feet from the
crackers in your storeroom, overhead
they will become stale rapidly 3. Secure them on pallets or
when the storeroom humidity deck grating with battens
percentage is greater than what 4. Stack them together
amount? tightly, bulkhead to
bulkhead
1. 50%
2. 75% 4-33. What causes secondary damage in
3. 80% a stack of canned drinks?
4. 85%
1. Damaged and/or leaky cans
or cases left in the stack
2. High temperature
3. High humidity
4. Cold ventilation
34
Questions 4-34 through 4-69 4-38. To maintain a high quality of
refer to chapter 4 of the text. service in the barbershop, you
must become familiar with the
standards of service the
Learning Objective: Explain barbershop should provide to
the organization and customers. What publication or
administration of the afloat instruction will the barber use
barbershop. to learn the barbershop
standards of service?
4-34. The overall responsibility for 1. NAVEDTRA 10119-B
the administration and 2. OPNAVINST 3120.32
operation of the afloat 3. NAVPERS 15665
barbershop rests with what 4. NAVSUP P-487
individual?
4-39. Which of the following
1. The retail store operator instructions are used to assist
2. The supply officer shipboard barbers in performing
3. The barbershop supervisor their duties properly?
4. The leading Ship’s
Serviceman 1. Supply department
instructions
4-35. Services provided in the 2. Ship’s instructions
barbershop should include which 3. Medical instructions
of the following? 4. All of the above
1. Regular haircut 4-40. Which of the following
2. Afro haircut instructions should be posted
3. Tonic inside the barbershop for all
4. All of the above barbers to see?
4-36. What is the primary purpose of 1. Ship’s instructions
the afloat barbershop? 2. Supply department
instructions
1. To provide haircuts to 3. Medical instructions
every crew member before an 4. Both 2 and 3 above
inspection
2. To provide input to the 4-41. The barbershop supervisor is
Navy on personal grooming responsible directly to what
standards officer for the satisfactory
3. To provide the desired operation of the barbershop?
haircut of each individual
4. To provide a regulation 1. The supply officer
haircut to maintain the 2. The medical officer
smart appearance of Navy 3. The executive officer
men and woman 4. The commanding officer
4-37. As a barber, you should become 4-42. What is the primary job of the
familiar with the Navy grooming barbershop supervisor?
standards contained in what
publication? 1. To make sure courtesy and
military etiquette are
1. Navy Customer Service maintained in the
Manual, NAVEDTRA 10119 barbershop at all times
2. Shi p’s Store Afloat, NAVSUP 2. To make sure security is
P-487 maintained in the
3. Navy Regulations, 1973 barbershop
NAVPERS 15665 3. To make sure supplies are
4. Standard Organization and ordered
Regulations of the U.S. 4. To make sure all barbers
Navy, OPNAVINST 3120.32 are using proper barbering
techniques
35
4-47. The barber should control the
atmosphere within the
Learning Objective: Identify barbershop by keeping the air
the barbershop space at what temperature?
requirements and the importance
of customer service. 1. 60°F
2. 65°F
3. 70°F
4-43. Which of the following actions 4. 75°F
by the barber could cause a
poor relationship between the 4-48. When the barbershop is equipped
barbershop and the ship’s crew? with more than one barber
chair, how far apart should the
1. Answering the phone using barber chairs be spaced?
military courtesy
2. Showing no favoritism 1. 5 ½ to 6 feet
between customers 2. 4 ½ to 5 feet
3. Opening the barbershop late 3. 3 ½ to 4 feet
4. Attending to complaints of 4. 2 ½ to 3 feet
customers
4-49. How many barber chairs should
4-44. While servicing a customer in be available for a ship with
the barbershop, which of the 900 personnel attached?
following actions should you
AVOID? 1. One
2. Two
1. Carrying on a conversation 3. Three
with another barber while 4. Four
cutting a customer’s hair
2. Discussing family problems 4-50. When, if ever, should a
with the customer separate barbershop be provided
3. Criticizing another barber on ships that carry troops?
in front of a customer
4. All of the above 1. When deployed overseas
2. When one barber chair is
4-45. The barbershop should plan required for the troops
services so quality and prompt 3. When two or more barber
customer service is given to chairs are required for
every individual. To do this, the troops
how often should the barbershop 4. Never
plan to give a haircut to each
crew member? 4-51. A barber standing for several
hours at a time can put added
1. Once every 7 days stress on the body. Which of
2. Once every 2 weeks the following rules should the
3. Once every 10 days barber follow to help relieve
4. Once a month some of the added stress?
4-46. How much time should be allowed 1. Keep the stomach held in
for each barber to service one 2. Keep the shoulders back
customer? 3. Carry the weight of the
body on the balls of the
1. 10 minutes feet
2. 15 minutes 4. All of the above
3. 20 minutes
4. 30 minutes
Learning Objective: Explain
the procedures for scheduling
appointments in the barbershop.
36
4-52. What is the primary purpose of 4-56. How long should the barbershop
scheduling appointments in the supervisor retain the used -
barbershop? appointment sheets in the
barbershop?
1. To distribute work evenly
between barbers 1. 1 month
2. To provide better service 2. 2 weeks
to the customer 3. 5 days
3. To limit the number of 4. 10 days
customers at any one time
4. To resolve complaints of
customers about not Learning Objective: Identify
receiving a haircut the principles and techniques
used in maintaining barbershop
4-53. When using the appointment sanitation.
system in the barbershop, what
is the best time for the barber
to post his or her appointment 4-57. What is the main purpose of
sheet? barbershop sanitation?
1. The day before the 1. To keep the barbershop
scheduled time of the clean
haircut 2. To prevent the spread of
2. 2 days before the infectious diseases
scheduled day of the 3. To prolong the life of
haircut barbering equipment
3. The week before the 4. To keep the barbering
appointment equipment clean
4. Monthly
4-58. How often should a member of
4-54. What action should the barber the medical department aboard
take when several crew members ship inspect the barbershop?
miss their appointments?
1. Weekly
1. Cut down on the hours of 2. Twice weekly
operating the barbershop 3. Monthly
2. Give the names of the crew 4. Quarterly
members to the responsible
division officer 4-59. After barbers receive their
3. Change from the appointment initial physical examination,
schedule to the division how often thereafter should
schedule they receive another one?
4. Do not serve those crew
members missing 1. Each time they become ill
appointments 2. Monthly
3. Every 6 months
4-55. When the division schedule is 4. Annually
used in the barbershop, what
individual controls the 4-60. Barbershop sanitation is
scheduling of appointments for required to control what type
each division? of bacteria that produce
diseases in the barbershop?
1. The barbershop supervisor
2. The division petty officer 1. Nonpathogenic
3. The supply officer 2. Chromosome
4. The leading Ship’s 3. Pathogenic
Serviceman 4. Photosynthetic
37
4-61. Which of the following 4-66. How many customers can be
disinfectants is/are used in served with one individual neck
the afloat barbershop for strip?
disinfecting metallic
instruments? 1. One
2. Two
1. Clippercide spray 4-in-1. 3. Three
approved by the EPA with an 4. Four or more
EPA registration number
2. Formalin solution (10 4-67. How often should the barber
percent solution of change the covering cloths in
formaldehyde) the barbershop?
3. Formaldehyde tablets
4. All of the above 1. Daily
2. Twice a week
4-62. When the workload in the 3. Weekly
barbershop is light and the 4. Twice a month
disinfectant solution does not
have to be changed daily, how 4-68. The pressure of the compressed
often should it be changed? air used to remove hair from
the customer should be no
1. Weekly greater than what psi?
2. Twice weekly
3. Monthly 1. 5 psi
4. Bimonthly 2. 10 psi
3. 15 psi
4-63. Nonmetallic instruments such as 4. 30 psi
combs should be immersed in a
disinfectant solution for what 4-69. A barber should not provide
minimum time period before customer service to any
reusing? individual who has any kind of
sore or diseases on the scalp
1. 10 minutes or the back of the neck within
2. 15 minutes the hairline.
3. 20 minutes
4. 30 minutes 1. True
2. False
4-64. How often should metallic
instruments in the barbershop ● Questions 4-70 through 4-75
be disinfected? refer to chapter 5 of the text.
38
4-71. Based on Navy guidelines, how 4-73. What publication or
many laundry personnel would be instruction should you use to
sufficient to operate a ship’s find the safety precautions
laundry serving 500 officer and that apply to shipboard
enlisted personnel? laundries?
1. Five 1. NAVRESSOINST 4067.4
2. Two 2. NAVMED P-5010
3. Three 3. NAVSUP P-485
4. Four 4. OPNAVINST 5100.19
39
Assignment 5
40
5-11. You should evacuate the ship’s 5-16. What determination should you
laundry until a heat stress make before disposing of any
survey is conducted when the laundry chemicals at sea or
temperature in the laundry in port?
reaches what maximum
temperature? 1. The stowage requirements of
the chemical
1. 85°F 2. The hazardous priorities of
2. 90°F the chemical
3. 95°F 3. The shelf life of the
4. 100°F chemical
4. The age of the chemical
5-12. A heat stress survey was
conducted in the ship’s laundry 5-17. To what publication should you
by the medical officer. It was refer for the classification
determined that the stay time and stowage requirements for
would be 2 hours. How long shipboard consumables?
should the recovery time be?
1. NAVSUP P-485
1. 8 hours 2. NAVSUP P-487
2. 2 hours 3. NAVSUP P-4998
3. 6 hours 4. HMIS, DOD 6050.5
4. 4 hours
Learning Objective: Identify
Learning Objective: Identify the basic procedures for
the procedures for stowing and receiving and identifying lots.
handling supplies in the ship’s
laundry.
5-18. The receiving laundry person is
responsible for which of the
5-13. The supplies stowed in the following duties?
laundry should be limited to
the amount required for what 1. Receiving lots
time period? 2. Marking lots
3. Classifying lots
1. 1 week 4. All of the above
2. 2 weeks
3. 1 day 5-19. What individual will the
4. 1 month receiving laundry person
contact to resolve problems
5-14. How should the supplies in the with the pickup of clean
ship’s laundry be stowed? laundry?
1. In separate covered metal 1. The ship’s store officer
bins using a bin liner or 2. The divisional laundry
plastic bag petty officer
2. In the receiving area in 3. The leading petty officer
the original container of each division
3. On the wash deck in a 4. The leading Ship’s
cardboard container near Serviceman
the washer extractor
4. On the wash deck in the 5-20. The receiving laundry person
original closed container should not accept divisional
laundry bags over what weight
5-15. Which of the following actions limitation?
should you take to prevent
powdered laundry supplies from 1. The washer extractor
becoming hard or lumpy? capacity
2. 60 pounds
1. Store them in a cool space 3. 80 pounds
2. Keep them well covered 4. 100 pounds
3. Keep them dry
4. All of the above
41
5-21. What is the primary problem 5-26. What form is used by officers
with handling lots in the and CPOs to identify the items
ship’s laundry? they have sent to the laundry
for processing?
1. Marking them
2. Identifying them 1. NAVSUP Form 233
3. Classifying them 2. NAVSUP Form 235
4. Damaging them 3. NAVSUP Form 236
4. NAVSUP Form 238
5-22. What individual is responsible
for stenciling the clothing 5-27. The receiving laundry person
in divisional bulk lots? will classify all items in the
individual lots according to
1. The divisional laundry the wash formula that will be
petty officer used.
2. The receiving laundry
person 1. True
3. Each enlisted person 2. False
4. The laundry supervisor
5-28. Clothes may be effectively
5-23. What individual is responsible washed in nets providing what
for making sure only properly precaution is taken?
stenciled clothing is accepted
within each division? 1. Use nylon net bags
2. Put several size items in
1. The laundry supervisor each bag
2. The leading petty officer 3. Load the nets properly
of each division 4. Use woven nets
3. The divisional laundry
petty officer 5-29. What is the maximum load for a
4. The receiving laundry 24-inch by 36-inch net bag?
person
1. 12 pounds
5-24. Personnel working on the wash 2. 10 pounds
deck should use identification 3. 8 pounds
markers or flags to identify 4. 5 pounds
which of the following types of
laundry within the washer 5-30. What is the laundry mark for
extractor? SHCS George D. Mills,
224-56-8757?
1. Officers’ uniforms
2. Bulk lots 1. 224568757
3. Individual lots 2. M-224568757
4. All of the above 3. D-8757
4. M-8757
Learning Objective: Identify
the basic procedures for
receiving and identifying
individual lots.
42
5-31. What is the correct procedure 5-34. What should the laundry person
for handling differences do to prevent wrinkling the
between the laundry’s count of ribbon while setting the type
an individual lot of laundry handles of the marking machine?
and the customer’s count?
1. Use both hands
1. The laundry supervisor 2. Have the printer arm in the
checks the count, enters downward position
the correct count on the 3. Move the type handles with
laundry list, circles and the printer arm in the
initials the customer’s center position
count, and informs the 4. Keep the printer arm in the
customer of the difference upright position
through the individual who
delivered the lot 5-35. Which of the following tools
2. Three people in the laundry should you use to clean the
check the count, inform the type on the marking machine?
laundry supervisor of the
difference, and change and 1. Wire brush
initial the changes on the 2. Sponge
laundry list 3. Chamois cloth
3. The laundry supervisor 4. Scrub pad
returns the individual lot
to the customer for a 5-36. What action, if any, should the
recount laundry supervisor take when
4. The laundry person the marking machine in the
discovering the difference ship’s laundry breaks down?
notes it on the laundry
list and logs it in the 1. Use a fine point ink pen to
press deck log mark items
2. Use a laundry marking pen
available through the
Learning Objective: Identify retail store
the procedures for using the 3. Use identification markers
marking machine in the ship’s and tags
laundry. 4. None; no marking is done
until the laundry marking
machine is repaired
5-32. Which of the following items
are not marked individually in
the laundry but are placed in a Learning Objective: State the
separate net bag? primary goal of the washing
process and identify the
1. Undershirts various types of soil and the
2. Handkerchiefs general precautions taken when
3. Trousers washing different fabrics.
4. Tropical shorts
5-33. While using the laundry marking 5-37. What is the primary goal of the
machine, how should you bring washing process?
the material you are marking in
contact with the type? 1. To wash the clothing and
have zero laundry claims
1. By raising the inking arm 2. To strengthen and beautify
2. By raising the printing the appearance of clothing
lever forward 3. To remove all soil from
3. By pressing the printing clothing being washed
lever backward 4. To wash and return all the
4. By pressing the printing clothing to the owner
lever downward within 24 hours
43
IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 5-38 THROUGH 5-43. What action by the laundry
5-41, SELECT FROM COLUMN B THE TYPE OF person may cause the
SOIL THAT IS DESCRIBED IN COLUMN A. redepositing of soil on the
clothing during the wash cycle?
A. DESCRIPTIONS B. SOILS
1. Washing a light load of
5-38. Soil that 1. Water dungaree trousers with
includes a soluble black socks
variety 2. Washing white and colored
of substances 2. Chemical fabrics together
such as soluble 3. Washing heavily soiled
starch, syrups, clothing with lightly
catsup, and 3. Special soiled clothing
so forth and 4. Washing lightly soiled
is removed 4. Insoluble fabrics together
during the
normal laundering 5-44. When should the laundry
process chemicals come in contact with
the fabrics in the washer
5-39. Soil that includes extractor?
such things as paint,
ink, adhesives, and 1. Before the water is added
so forth, and cannot 2. After the first bath
be removed during the 3. As soon as the water is
normal laundering added
process but may 4. After the correct water
possibly be removed level is reached
using spotting operations
5-40. Soil that includes the Learning Objective: Identify
majority of soils the various laundry chemicals,
removed in the laundry; types of wash water, and the
most of these types formulas used in washing
of soils are readily fabrics in the ship’s laundry.
dispersed during the
wash cycle, but they
tend to contribute to 5-45. What type of water is most
fabric damage due to suitable for washing clothes in
fiber abrasion the ship’s laundry?
5-41. Soil that includes 1. Soft water
substances such as grease 2. Salt water
and oils, is usually not 3. Hard water
soluble or dissolvable when 4. Chlorinated water
washing, and may require
special treatment 5-46. What type of treatment is
required for permanently hard
water?
5-42. Color transfer is primarily
caused on fabrics when the 1. Exchanging the compounds
laundry person on the wash deck contained in the water
does not accomplish which of 2. Boiling it
the following actions? 3. Using lime soaps during
washing
1. Loading the washer properly 4. Distilling or adding
and according to weight special chemicals
limitations
2. Adding sour according to
the wash formula
3. Extracting the clothes
properly
4. Classifying the clothes
properly
44
5-47. How is seawater made usable 5-53. What action should the laundry
aboard ship? person take when the clothing
is washed according to the wash
1. Using the base exchange formula and still does not come
method of purification out clean?
2. Changing the compounds of
sodium in the seawater to 1. Rinse them again manually
compounds of calcium and 2. Soak them in the washer
magnesium overnight and rinse and
3. Using the distillation extract them in the morning
method 3. Wash them again increasing
4. Adding chloride and the amount of chemical
removing the sodium additives
4. Wash them again according
5-48. Detergent/oxygen bleach is a to the appropriate wash
powdered substance used safely formula
for laundering which of the
following types of fabrics? 5-54. Which of the following
conditions should be eliminated
1. Colored when laundry sour is added to
2. Cotton the wash cycle properly?
3. Synthetic
4. All of the above 1. Remaining alkalies
2. Rust or yellow
5-49. Based on a washer extractor discoloration
with a 100-pound washing 3. Unsterilized clothes
capacity, how much 4. All of the above
detergent/oxygen bleach should
be added to the wash cycle when 5-55. Laundry starch can be used to
using seawater? improve appearance and give
body to which of the following
1. 12 ounces types of fabrics?
2. 16 ounces
3. 20 ounces 1. Certified Navy twill
4. 32 ounces products
2. Cotton products
5-50. The wash formulas should be 3. Work clothes
posted in what area of the 4. All of the above
laundry?
1. The issue room Learning Objective: Determine
2. The wash deck the procedures for using and
3. The press deck operating the Dyna wash washer
4. The receiving area extractor.
45
5-57. What switch on the Dyna Wash 5-62. What source(s) is/are used as a
energizes the power to the guideline for cutting the
control panel and the program chart?
programmer?
1. The Navy wash formula
1. Master switch 2. Instructions provided by
2. Control switch the Navy exchange
3. Wash switch 3. Instructions contained in
4. Timer switch the technical manual
4. Charts available from the
5-58. When loading or unloading the supply system
washer extractor, the washer
cylinder door can be lined up In answering questions 5-63 and
with the outer shell door by 5-64, refer to the following
depressing either the forward paragraph.
or reverse switch with what
other switch? You are setting the temperature
control on a 100-pound washer
1. Drum control switch extractor for a load of laundry that
2. Signal switch will be washed using Navy wash formula
3. Jog switch I.
4. Extract switch
5-63. At what temperature should the
5-59. The timer wheel on the black pointer on the
programmer will not begin to temperature control be set?
move until which of the
following switches are 1. 90°F
energized? 2. 120°F
3. 130°F
1. Timer switch 4. 160°F
2. Master switch
3. Control switch 5-64. At what temperature should the
4. All of the above red pointer on the temperature
control be set?
5-60. What indicator light will light
up and alert laundry personnel 1. 160°F
when the automatic cycle is 2. 140°F
complete by sounding a bell? 3. 130°F
4. 120°F
1. Signal indicator light
2. Master indicator light 5-65. What switch on the Dyna Wash
3. Wash indicator light washer extractor prevents the
4. Timer indicator light outer shell door from opening
during extraction?
5-61. What safety device is installed
on the inside of the washer 1. Jog switch
extractor programmer to protect 2. Interlock switch
laundry personnel from 3. Control switch
electrical shock when the 4. Vibration switch
programmer door is opened?
1. Vibration switch Learning Objective: Determine
2. Interlock switch the procedures for washing with
3. Microswitch the Dyna Wash washer extractor.
4. Control switch
46
5-67. What safety precautions should
STEPS IN OPERATING you take when unloading the
THE WASHER EXTRACTOR washer extractor?
47
Learning Objective: Determine
the procedures for operating
the Milnor washer extractor.
(cont’d)
48
Assignment 6
49
6-10. Which of the following factors 6-14. How often should the primary
may cause the clothes to become lint traps on the tumbler dryer
wrinkled during the drying be cleaned?
cycle?
1. After each dryer load
1. Clothes were not starched 2. Every 2 hours
during the washing process 3. Every 6 hours
2. Clothes were improperly 4. Every 4 hours
washed
3. Dryer temperature is too 6-15. What is the primary purpose of
low the secondary lint trap?
4. Dryer is overloaded
1. To cut down on the amount
6-11. You have just removed some of lint entering the
freshly laundered heavy tumbler dryer
clothing items from the washer 2. To keep the steam coils
extractor. To make pressing of clean of lint and dirt
these items easier, you should 3. To protect the ship’s
partially dry them in the exhaust blowers
tumbler dryer for what maximum 4. To help cut down on the
time period? buildup of lint in the
ducting
1. 10 minutes
2. 8 minutes 6-16. How often should the steam
3. 6 minutes coils on the tumbler dryer be
4. 4 minutes inspected for cleanliness?
50
IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 6-19 THROUGH 6-26. What will happen if you touch
6-22, SELECT FROM COLUMN B THE PART OF the safety finger guard on the
THE FLATWORK IRONER THAT IS USED FOR flatwork ironer while the
THE PURPOSE INDICATED IN COLUMN A. ironer is operating?
A. PURPOSES B. PARTS 1. The flatwork ironer will
adjust to the next lower
6-19. Smooths and 1. Feed speed
flattens the ribbons 2. The compression roll will
flatwork disengage
against the 2. Padded 3. An alarm will alert the user
steam-heated rolls 4. The flatwork ironer will
cylinder stop
3. Return
6-20. Catches all ribbons 6-27. What action should you take if
finished some linen becomes jammed in
material 4. Delivery the flatwork ironer?
table
6-21. Carries and 1. Disengage the compression
leads the flatwork roll and pull the linen out
into the ironer 2. Put on a pair of safety
over the cylinder gloves, turn the speed
control lever in reverse,
6-22. Holds the flatwork and slowly pull the linen
against the underside Out
of the heated cylinder 3. Put on safety gloves and
and passes it back to try to remove the linen
the front while the flatwork ironer
is running in the fast
speed
6-23. Which of the following parts of 4. Shut the ironer off at the
the flatwork ironer prevent(s) power source, release the
the hand of the operator from compression rolls, allow
getting near the padded the ironer to cool, and
pressure rolls? remove the jammed linen
1. The feed ribbons 6-28. When, if ever, may you operate
2. The finger guard a flatwork ironer with a faulty
3. The apron safety finger guard?
4. The removable cover
1. When the workload is heavy
6-24. What control on the flatwork and you are behind schedule
ironer engages the compression 2. When there are two or more
roll? persons present at the
flatwork ironer in case of
1. The start button an emergency
2. The drive roll 3. Only when a person is
3. The speed control lever standing by the emergency
4. The foot pedal stop button ready to cut
the power off
6-25. How often should you check the 4. Never
safety finger guard on the
flatwork ironer to make sure it
is working properly? Learning Objective: Identify
the procedures for operating
1. Every shift the flatwork ironer.
2. Twice weekly
3. Monthly
4. Quarterly
51
6-29. What are the proper procedures 6-31. What are the proper procedures
for preheating the flatwork for securing the flatwork
ironer? ironer at the end of the day?
1. Keep the main steam valve 1. Turn the machine off and
partially open for 20 raise the compression roll
minutes and then open it so the machine can cool for
all the way for another 25 30 minutes
minutes 2. Close the steam supply,
2. Open the steam valve raise the compression roll
one-half a turn first and and allow the machine to
gradually allow steam to run for 20 or 30 minutes
enter the cylinder; without steam to allow it
continue to open the steam to cool properly before you
valve slowly until it is shut the power off
open all the way 3. Turn the power off, secure
3. Turn the steam valve on all the steam, and remain in
the way and allow 45 the laundry until the
minutes for the cylinder to ironer cools down
heat 4. Raise the compression roll
4. Bring the cylinder in and allow the-machine to
contact with the padded run for 10 to 15 minutes,
rolls, keep the main steam gradually turning the steam
valve partially open for 10 off to allow the machine to
minutes, and then turn the cool, and then shut it off
steam on all the way
6-32. The compression roll on the
6-30. Which of the following actions flatwork ironer should be
should you AVOID to prevent raised when the ironer is left
damaging the variable speed unattended for what minimum
mechanism? time period?
1. Setting it to the lowest 1. 5 minutes
speed while warming the 2. 10 minutes
flatwork ironer 3. 15 minutes
2. Engaging the compression 4. 20 minutes
roll while the ironer is on
3. Changing the speed of the 6-33. What is the purpose of feeding
ironer while the ironer is the flatwork into the ironer
on wrong side up?
4. Decreasing the speed of the
ironer while the ironer is 1. To prevent scorching the
off right side
2. To prevent wearing through
the smooth side
3. To exert more pressure on
the rough side of the
material
4. To give a smooth finish to
the right side of the
material
52
6-34. What procedure should be used 6-38. What is/are the purpose(s) of
to feed large items into a using the spray gun with the
75-inch ironer? laundry press to press uniform
articles?
1. One person only feeds the
items into the ironer 1. To keep the laundry press
2. Two persons feed all the pad and cover cool
items into the ironer 2. To prevent articles from
3. Two persons feed the large sticking to the laundry
items into the ironer press head
folded 3. To compensate for moisture
4. Three persons feed all the loss while the other parts
items into the ironer of the uniform are pressed
4. All of the above
6-35. Into what part of the cylinder
of the flatwork ironer should 6-39. What control button(s) must you
small items be fed? depress to make the laundry
press head lower onto the items
1. Center you are pressing?
2. Left end
3. Right end 1. Both red buttons
4. Along the entire length 2. Both green buttons
3. One of the green buttons
only
Learning Objective: Identify 4. One green button and one
the various laundry presses red button
used in the shipboard laundry,
the controls used to operate 6-40. How do you release the laundry
them, and the safety press head from the item being
precautions applicable to their pressed?
use.
1. By pushing one or both of
the green buttons
6-36. What part of the press is used 2. By pushing both red buttons
as your worktable when you 3. By pushing one of the red
press uniform items? buttons
4. By pushing one red button
1. The rigid metal frame and one green button
2. The buck
3. The press head
4. The manifold
6-37. What type of press would be
best suited for pressing
flatwork when a flatwork ironer
is not available?
1. A taper press
2. A triple head press
3. A sleeve press
4. A rectangular press
53
6-41. What procedure should you use 6-44. What safety feature on the
to check the head pressure on laundry press prevents you from
the laundry press? getting your hand caught under
the press head?
1. Insert a bedding sheet on
the press, leaving a 1. You must press both green
portion of it exposed, and buttons to lower the press
try to pull it out after head
the press head is closed 2. There is an emergency
2. Place a piece of paper release button by your foot
under the press head, 3. You must press both red
leaving a portion of it buttons to lower the press
exposed, and try to pull it head
out after the press head is 4. There is a antilocking
closed device located in the press
3. Place a piece of cardboard head adjustment
under the press head,
leaving a portion of it In answering question 6-45,
exposed, and try to pull it refer to the following
out after the press head is paragraph.
closed
4. Roll a bedding sheet up SH3 Brown and SH3 Lewis are working in
into a round cylinder and the ship’s laundry pressing khaki
try to close the press head shirts and trousers. They are both
on it working at the same three press
operator station because all the other
6-42. What is the correct procedure operator stations are being used.
for heating the laundry press Petty Officer Lewis is pressing khaki
head? trousers and Petty Officer Brown is
pressing khaki shirts. Petty Officer
1. Turn the steam valve on all Lewis is having difficulty with the
the way and check the press trousers because they keep slipping
head in 20 minutes off the press. To eliminate this
2. Open the steam valve problem, Petty Officer Lewis plugs one
gradually for 2 minutes and of the red buttons so it is always in
then open it completely the DOWN position. This allows him to
3. Turn the steam valve hold the trousers steady with one hand
partially open for 20 to prevent them from slipping and at
minutes and then open it the same time use his other hand to
all the way press the other red button. Petty
4. Gradually open the steam Officer Brown does not have this
valve for 5 minutes and problem pressing the shirts because
then open it completely one of the red buttons on the press he
is working on is already stuck and
6-43. When you are pressing under inoperative. SH1 Moore walks through
normal conditions, how long the ship’s laundry making rounds, sees
should you keep the press head what is going on, and stops both of
down on clothing articles? them from working.
1. 15 seconds 6-45. The reason SH1 Moore stopped
2. 30 seconds both SH3 Brown and SH3 Lewis
3. 45 seconds from working was because they
4. 60 seconds were violating some of the
rules of safety while using the
laundry press. How many safety
precautions did SH3 Brown and
SH3 Lewis violate?
1. Five
2. Two
3. Three
4. Four
54
6-46. The press head should lower and 6-49. What is the first step in
lock on a thick object if it is pressing a pair of trousers?
adjusted properly.
1. Straighten the pockets out
1. True 2. Straighten the waistband
2. False 3. Pull the trouser legs
taut
4. Match the inseams
55
6-57. What is the first action
laundry personnel should take
Learning Objective: Identify after new ribbons have been
the procedures used by laundry installed on the flatwork
personnel when performing ironer?
general maintenance on laundry
equipment in the ship’s 1. Heat the flatwork ironer up
laundry. and check for tension
2. Run the flatwork ironer
with the compression roll
6-53. Which of the following engaged for a period of 20
personnel may perform to 30 minutes
mechanical and/or electrical 3. Wax the ironer
maintenance on the washer 4. Adjust the compression roll
extractor? so it engages properly and
seats smoothly
1. The damage control petty
officer of supply 6-58. When, if ever, should the
2. The laundry supervisor friction material on the return
3. Qualified shipboard ribbon drive roll be replaced?
maintenance personnel
4. All of the above 1. Monthly
2. When it becomes smooth and
6-54. Which of the following worn
conditions may occur if lint 3. When the return ribbons
deposits are allowed to move faster than the heated
accumulate on the air passages cylinder and the padded
and heat chambers on the compression roll
tumbler dryer? 4. Never
1. Spontaneous heating 6-59. What action should you take
2. Restricted airflow when the flatwork ironer
3. Clothes not drying properly padding is changed and one end
4. All of the above of the ironer is thicker than
the other end?
6-55. The flatwork ironer should be
waxed for which of the 1. Pass some heavy towels or
following purposes? other thick material
through the thicker end of
1. To prolong ribbon life the flatwork ironer
2. To prevent linen from 2. Remove the padding and
sticking to the heated replace according to
cylinder manufacturer’s instructions
3. To give a smooth finish to 3. Engage the compression
flatwork roll, turn the steam on,
4. All of the above and run the flatwork ironer
for approximately 15
6-56. How often should you wax the minutes
flatwork ironer? 4. With the compression roll
engaged, run the flatwork
1. Twice weekly ironer for about 20 minutes
2. Each morning without steam
3. After 6 to 8 hours of work
4. Both 2 and 3 above 6-60. What is the ideal steam
pressure for operating
conventional presses?
1. 75 psi
2. 80 psi
3. 90 psi
4. 100 psi
56
6-61. What general maintenance should 6-65. How often should the steel wool
you perform on the laundry pad be changed?
press every morning before you
begin to press uniform items? 1. Annually
2. Every 6 months
1. Clean the press 3. Monthly
2. Change the pad and covers 4. Weekly
3. Do a hydrostatic test
4. Wax the press head
6-62. What is the primary purpose of Learning Objective: Determine
using press head mitts when you the procedures required to
clean the press heads? issue and assemble finished
laundry.
1. To scrub the dirt off the
press head
2. To apply press head cleaner 6-66. Where should the individual
3. To protect your hands from laundry ticket, NAVSUP Form
being burned by the press 233, be placed before the
head individual lots are received
4. To apply press head wax into the assembly area?
1. In the press deck log
MATERIALS USED TO PAD THE 2. Inside the appropriate net
BUCK OF THE LAUNDRY PRESS bag
3. In the assembly bin in
A. Flannel pads alphabetical order
B. Steel wool pad 4. In a drawer in the assembly
C. Press cover area for safekeeping until
the individual bags are
received
Figure 6B
6-67. Where should the individual
IN ANSWERING QUESTION 6-63, laundry list, NAVSUP Form 233,
REFER TO FIGURE 6B WHICH LISTS be placed after articles from
THE MATERIALS THAT ARE USED TO PAD THE an individual lot have been
BUCK OF A LAUNDRY PRESS, BUT NOT checked in and verified after
NECESSARILY IN THE ORDER GIVEN. being cleaned and pressed?
6-63. In what sequence should the 1. Attached to each individual
materials be applied to the laundry bag with a laundry
buck of the press? pin
2. Attached to one of the
1. A, B, C khaki shirts or trousers
2. B, A, C with a staple gun
3. B, C, A 3. Retained in the ship’s
4. C, B, A laundry for record
4. Attached to the suit
6-64. How do you change the flannel wrapper covering the press
layers on the press? work belonging to that lot
with glue or tape
1. Change both the top and
bottom layers weekly 6-68. An individual lot of laundry
2. Change one layer a week should be checked for which of
putting the new layer on the following conditions before
the top it is returned to the owner?
3. Change one layer a week
putting the new layer on 1. Cleanliness
the bottom 2. Stains and blemishes
4. Change one layer every 2 3. Proper creasing and
weeks putting the new layer smoothness
on the bottom 4. All of the above
57
6-69. When clean bulk laundry is 6-72. What is the primary purpose of
picked up by the responsible obtaining the proper signatures
division, which of the and making sure the count
following procedures should the reflected on the NAVSUP Form
laundry person follow? 233 is correct before issuing
the laundry?
1. Weigh the bulk laundry and
note the weight in the bulk 1. To establish accurate
work log records for future
2. Sign the bulk work log for reference
issuing the laundry 2. To establish validity in
3. Have the person receiving laundry claims
the laundry sign the bulk 3. To establish the weekly
work log summary sheet
4. All of the above 4. To establish a report
required at the end of the
6-70. A bag of laundry weighing 50 accounting period
pounds is finished and sent
back to the divisional 6-73. When should you reprocess
compartment weighing 49 pounds. articles that have been
What does this weight loss returned to the ship’s laundry
indicate when there are because they were
complaints of lost clothing? unsatisfactory?
1. The complainers are merely 1. The next time lots are
troublemakers delivered to the laundry
2. The loss probably is 2. When the laundry finds time
occurring in the living to reprocess them
compartment 3. Immediately so that
3. It is a mistake because the delivery will not be
laundry never loses delayed
clothing 4. After the day’s workload
4. The laundry put 1 pound of has been completed
clothing in the wrong bag
6-71. When should finished laundry be
issued?
1. According to the schedule
2. When completed
3. After normal working hours
4. Early in the morning
58
Assignment 7
59
7-7. What is the maximum amount of 7-11. Occasionally, uniform
work you should receive in the accessories are left on the
dry-cleaning plant daily when dry-cleaning articles sent to
operating under normal the dry-cleaning plant. During
conditions? what portion of the
dry-cleaning process will
1. The amount of work that can these accessories be removed?
be completed in 1 workday
2. 2 days’ work 1. Classification
3. 3 days’ work 2. Receipt
4. 1 week’s work 3. Inspection
4. Marking
7-8. To eliminate delays in
processing dry-cleaning 7-12. What should be done with
articles, what action is foreign objects found in the
required of each division in pockets of articles sent for
regard to the delivery of dry-cleaning?
dry-cleaning articles?
1. Give them to the immediate
1. Set a required delivery supervisor
time 2. Notify the customer to pick
2. Have the dry cleaning them up
delivered in separate 3. Put them in an envelope and
laundry net bags staple the envelope to the
3. Have divisional laundry dry-cleaning list
delivered twice daily 4. Remove them but put then
4. Have divisional laundry back in the pocket before
delivered every day returning the uniform
article to the customer
7-9. What is a difference between
methods A and B for receiving 7-13. When classifying articles for
and identifying dry-cleaning dry cleaning, which of the
articles? following factors should you
give the most consideration?
1. The customer fills out the
dry-cleaning list in A; the 1. The age of the article
receiving clerk in B 2. The weight of the material
2. The receiving clerk tags 3. The color and lint quality
the articles in B; no 4. The size of the article
tagging is done in A
3. The receiving clerk fills 7-14. How many pounds of dry-cleaning
out the dry-cleaning list work should be cleaned for each
in B; the customer in A gallon of dry-cleaning solvent?
4. The customer tags each
article in A; no tagging is 1. 200 pounds
done in B 2. 350 pounds
3. 400 pounds
7-10. To help save time and work and 4. 450 pounds
prevent the possibility of
misplacing items of clothing,
which of the following actions Learning Objective: Identify
should dry-cleaning personnel the procedures for safe use and
take? handling of dry-cleaning
solvent.
1. Train each other in only
one phase of the
dry-cleaning operation 7-15. The safe handling and use of
2. Receive and issue dry-cleaning solvents are
dry-cleaning articles in a described in which of the
space other than the following instructions?
assembly room
3. Use a dry-cleaning list 1. BUMEDINST 6260.12A
4. Process one individual’s 2. NAVRESSOINST 4067.4
bundle at a time 3. OPNAVINST 3120.32
4. OPNAVINST 5100.20
60
7-16. In using or handling 7-21. To eliminate hazards associated
dry-cleaning solvent, which of with the use of dry-cleaning
the following actions would be solvent, which of the following
considered hazardous? precautions should you take in
the dry-cleaning plant?
1. Not inhaling the solvent
vapors 1. Use the buddy system
2. Stowing the solvent in a 2. Operate and maintain
well-ventilated space dry-cleaning equipment
3. Using solvent in a space properly
with no ventilation 3. Guard against the hazardous
4. Keeping exhaust vents in properties of the solvent
the dry-cleaning plant 4. All of the above
clean and free of dirt and
lint
61
7-26. Dry-cleaning personnel should 7-31. What factor determines the
receive a physical examination length of time the drying cycle
on a schedule determined by will last?
what individual?
1. The amount of solvent left
1. The supply officer on the clothing
2. The medical officer 2. The temperature setting
3. The ship’s store officer 3. The type of clothing
4. The commanding officer 4. The amount of clothes
7-27. What is the primary purpose of 7-32. Why does the head of the
the distilling unit on the dry-cleaning press have a
dry-cleaning machine? covering on it?
1. Cleans the inside of the 1. To obtain a smoother
machine pressing job
2. Purifies the solvent 2. To protect the metal
3. Cleans the load of articles surface of the press head
4. Makes solvent 3. To prevent a gloss finish
on pressed articles
7-28. During what phase of the 4. To protect the buck from
dry-cleaning cycle is the scorching
solvent shut off?
7-33. What action must the operator
1. At the end of the of the dry-cleaning press
wash/rinse cycle perform to supply steam and
2. After the clothes are vacuum to the buck?
extracted
3. At the end of the drying 1. Push both table-mounted
cycle buttons
4. After the washer drum fills 2. Depress both foot pedals
up with solvent 3. Press the steam handle on
the press head in the DOWN
7-29. What is the desired temperature position
setting for the dry-cleaning 4. Open the steam vacuum
machine? supply line
1. 170°F to 180°F 7-34. The operator of the
2. 160°F to 170°F dry-cleaning press must use
3. 150°F to 160°F both hands to perform which of
4. 140°F to 150°F the following actions?
7-30. What part of the dry-cleaning 1. Provide steam to the press
cycle removes any remaining head
odors or solvent vapor that may 2. Provide vacuum to the buck
still be in the clothing? 3. Open the press head
4. Close the press head
1. Rinse
2. Drying 7-35. When pressing the seat of
3. Extract trousers, where should you
4. Deodorizing place the back seam?
1. Near the front of the buck
2. In the center of the buck
3. Toward the rear of the buck
4. Drawn over the large end of
the buck
62
7-36. When pressing the front portion 7-40. The steam air finisher is used
of the leg, you must make sure to finish which of the
the trousers are arranged in following items?
what position?
1. Uniform coats
1. The crotch is at the small 2. Shirts
end of the buck 3. Trousers
2. The leg is lying well to 4. Linens
the front of the buck
3. The outside of the leg is 7-41. What control on the steam air
facing upward finisher is used to control the
4. The side seams are lying amount of time air is blown on
one on the other the clothing article in the
manual mode?
7-37. What procedure should you use
to press the collar of an 1. The air control timer
officer’s uniform coat? 2. The steam toggle switch
3. The air toggle switch
1. Press the inside of the 4. The steam control timer
collar first and then the
outside 7-42. What control on the steam air
2. press the sides of the finisher is used to control the
collar on the large end of amount of time steam is blown
the buck and the center of through the clothing in the
the collar on the small end automatic mode?
3. Press the inside of the
collar center only; leave 1. The steam control timer
the ends alone 2. The steam toggle switch
4. Press each side of the 3. The neon signal indicator
collar with the lapel and 4. The air control timer
press the center separately
7-43. In the automatic mode, the air
7-38. When pressing the right side of timer on the steam air finisher
the coat back, you should place should be set for what amount
the bottom seam at least how of time for most clothing
many inches from the front edge items?
of the buck?
1. 10 seconds
1. 1 inch 2. 12 seconds
2. 2 inches 3. 15 seconds
3. 3 inches 4. 20 seconds
4. 4 inches
7-44. In the automatic mode, what
7-39. The enlisted men’s jumper is will occur if the steam or air
always pressed inside out. timer on the steam air finisher
is set for 0 or 30?
1. True
2. False 1. The steam air finisher will
not operate
2. The article will be
Learning Objective: Identify finished slightly wet
the general procedures for 3. The article may become
operating and using the steam damaged
air finisher and automatic 4. The alarm will sound to
pants topper. alert the user to change
the timer
7-45. The steam air finisher will
stop during the automatic cycle
any time the operator steps on
the foot switch.
1. True
2. False
63
7-46. The automatic pants topper is 7-50. What is the proper way to clean
used to finish which of the the foam filter on the
following items? dry-cleaning machine?
1. Trouser legs 1. Brush off the excess lint
2. Shirts on the foam material, wash
3. Peacoats with an all-purpose
4. Trouser tops detergent, and squeeze dry
2. Brush off the excess lint
7-47. The automatic pants topper uses from the foam material,
which of the following pressing wash with clear water, and
aids to press items? squeeze dry
3. Vacuum off all excess lint
1. Water and replace
2. Air 4. Vacuum off all excess lint,
3. Steam wash with a cleaning
4. Both 2 and 3 above solvent, and squeeze dry
7-51. How often should the pump lint
Learning Objective: Determine strainer be cleaned on the
the general procedures for dry-cleaning machine?
maintaining equipment in the
dry-cleaning plant. 1. Weekly
2. Twice monthly
3. Monthly
7-48. To prevent the buildup of dust 4. Quarterly
and dirt on the dry-cleaning
machine, what maintenance 7-52. How many flannel pads should be
action should you take? used to pad the dry-cleaning
press?
1. Apply a light coat of wax
to the machine 1. One
2. Use a synthetic soap when 2. Two
washing the machine 3. Three
3. Apply a light coat of 4. Four
silicone to the machine
4. Use a safe solvent to wash
the machine Learning Objective: Identify
the characteristics of spots
7-49. How often should the foam and stains, the job of the
filter on the dry-cleaning spotter, and the tools used to
machine be cleaned? remove spots and stains.
1. After each wash
2. Daily
3. Weekly 7-53. What is the difference between
4. Monthly a spot and a stain?
1. A stain cannot be removed
without damage to the
fabric; a spot can
2. A stain must be treated
before the clothing is
cleaned; a spot need not be
3. A stain can be removed
without additional
treatment; a spot cannot
4. A stain is the result of
dry cleaning before spot
treatment; a spot is the
result of food, blood,
grease, and so on
64
7-54. What should the spotter do if 7-59. What spotting equipment has a
he or she is not certain flushing and tamping area like
whether a spot or stain can be the main spotting board and is
removed? used when working out stains on
sleeves and other small areas?
1. Inform the owner it cannot
be removed 1. The sleeveboard
2. Send the article back to 2. The garment tray
the owner and advise the 3. The chemical tray
owner to file a laundry 4. The blotter
claim
3. Contact the supervisor and 7-60. What material is used to pick
obtain advice up the remaining moisture
4. Return the article to around a spot that was removed?
prevent further damage
I. Cheesecloth
7-55. The owner of spotted clothing 2. Toweling
can best assist the 3. Blotter
dry-cleaning plant by 4. Chamois
identifying the spot in what
manner? 7-61. What material is used by the
spotter to test the resistance
1. Drawing a chalk circle of dyes in fabrics to the
around the spot on the chemicals on the spotting
clothing agents?
2. Washing the clothing before
it is sent to the 1. Cheesecloth
dry-cleaning plant 2. Toweling
3. Tagging the clothing with a 3. Blotter
label bearing the word SPOT 4. Chamois
4. Attaching a note to the
clothing telling the cause
of the spot Learning Objective: Identify
spots and stains and explain
7-56. The screened area of the main the procedures used for
spotting board is used for removing them.
which of the following
purposes?
1. Tamping 7-62. The location of the spot or
2. Applying spotting agents stain may be beneficial to the
3. Flushing spotter in identifying what
4. All of the above caused it.
7-57. How often should the screened 1. True
area on the main spotting board 2. False
be taken apart and cleaned?
7-63. What is the purpose of
1. Daily performing a solvent test?
2. Twice weekly
3. Weekly 1. To determine if a spot or
4. Monthly stain should be removed by
water or dry solvent
7-58. What is the spatula used for? 2. TO determine what type of
spot is on the clothing
1. To manipulate chemicals 3. To test the resistance of
2. To soften the stain dyes on the clothing
3. To help the chemical 4. To soften the spot or stain
penetrate the stain for easier removal
4. Each of the above
65
IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 7-64 THROUGH 7-70. When the spotter has removed a
7-67, SELECT FROM COLUMN B THE stain with hydrochloric acid,
SPOTTING METHOD DESCRIBED IN COLUMN A. what chemical should be used to
neutralize the action of the
A. DESCRIP- B. METHODS acid?
TIONS
1. A
7-64. Two or more 1. Emulsification 2. B
substances 3. C
combined to 2. Chemical 4. D
produce one action
or more new 7-71. Toremove stains resulting from
substances 3. Solution resins, paints, or nail polish,
what chemical is used?
7-65. The adding 4. Mechanical
of sub- action 1. A
stances to 2. B
help the 3. C
solvent in the 4. D
removal of stains
7-72. Before using a solvent to treat
7-66. The mixing of two a spot or stain, you should
substances, one of first determine whether the
which is the solvent solvent will harm the article
by testing it in a hidden
7-67. The use of a brush, spatula, portion of the clothing.
and so forth, to work a
cleansing agent into the 1. True
fabric to remove a stain 2. False
7-73. When using chemical agents, you
should remove the agent
immediately after applying it
to the clothing.
SPOTTING CHEMICALS
1. True
A. Oxalic acid 2. False
B. Sodium chloride
C. Acetone 7-74. What part of the spatula should
D. Ammonia be used by the spotter in
removing spots?
Figure 7A 1. The front end
2. The rounded end
IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 7-68 3. The flat center
THROUGH 7-71, REFER TO FIGURE 4. The tip of the point
7A, WHICH LISTS CHEMICALS USED TO
REMOVE SPOTS AND STAINS. 7-75. A spatula may NOT be safely
used on which of the following
7-68. What chemical is useful in materials?
removing rust?
1. Synthetic
1. A 2. Cotton
2. B 3. Linen
3. C 4. Wool
4. D
7-69. What chemical should the
spotter use to remove fruit
stains?
1. A
2. B
3. C
4. D
66